Home

Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual

1. wo eo HEBBESBE EG 28954391 20882412 5 Lm aoezan 200 000 9 85 Lm 28953575 20882412 28953554 20882412 882412 17202 20882412 2000 08 05 01 22 45 794 beso oomen ese m T Sel phase sta delta arid orid date and time tres td ares ad slow sres sd per dsnr 82412 2000 08 05 01 14 32 549 uz for os o N e E A Fed Esel OE E E E FIGURE 143 ARRIVAL INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 5 ARRIVAL AREA MIDDLE AREA OF ALPHALIST Field Definition Sel Indicates if the arrival is selected If pressed the arrival is selected phase Phase name sta Station on which the arrival is observed delta Great circle distance between station and origin deg arid Arrival identifier orid Origin identifier This number will change each time the event interacts with the database that is each time it is saved or discarded date and time Date and time that the signal is recorded at the station tres The time residual from the theoretical arrival time s td Indicates whether arrival time is a defining feature for
2. FIGURE 121 HYDROQC SHOWING PHASES ARE BLOCKED Hydro HydroQCMap The HydroQCMap menu option provides the same display and warning message as the HydroQC option but it also displays a map showing the travel paths of all associated hydroacoustic phases The travel path is drawn as a great circle line between station and event Figure 122 shows a travel path which does not appear to be blocked If the path is blocked it is drawn in red otherwise it is drawn in green The map background can be used to verify HydroQC s predictions To use HydroQCMap 1 Select an event 2 If hydroacoustic phases are associated to the event choose Hydro gt HydroQCMap HydroQCMap returns a message indicating either that no blocked paths were found or that one or more paths are blocked Simultaneously Map is launched which displays the paths for all associated hydroacoustic phases 3 Review the HydroQC message and the Map display to verify HydroQC s assessment Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV File Edit View Options Analyst Tools FIGURE 122 EXAMPLE TRAVEL PATH DISPLAYED IN MAP Hydro Hydro Path Blocked The Hydro Path Blocked menu option is similar to the HydroQC option However instead of checking for blockage for associated hydroacoustic phases the Hydro Path Blocked tool allows you to check for
3. FIGURE 173 FILTER DISPLAY IN XFKDISPLAY Clear The Clear function in the XfkDisplay toolbar removes all arrivals from the XfkDisplay main window and dismisses all FK plot windows To clear arrivals 1 With arrivals in the XfkDisplay click Clear in the Xfk toolbar All arrival data are removed from XfkDisplay Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures MAP PROCEDURES Map is a two dimensional interactive graphical display of the earth that you can use to visualize the location of events and contributing stations Map displays the oceans and major land masses at a default scale of 1 20 million Map provides a number of different display features including a display of the location of all the events currently under analysis in ARS or a drawing of the travel paths for individ ual phases You can limit the view to certain geographic areas display all the his torical events from high or low seismicity areas or select specialized maps on which to work You can display latitude and longitude as a grid for reference and adjust the color to distinguish the features Map Window Layout and Organization Figure 174 shows the Map display with its default settings The land mass appears in a brown color shaded for topography and the ocean and other bodies of water appear in blue shaded for depth Map is displayed at a scale of 1
4. 1 Phase shifting in the frequency domain is analogous to time shifting waveforms and is computationally more efficient The time shift must remain small relative to the waveform duration converted into the fre quency domain Such is the case with the small differences in arrival times across the elements of an array Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 3 C stations measure particle motion or signal amplitude along three orthogonal axes A station specific signal velocity is used to derive slowness from the mea sured incidence angle Each grid point in the XfkDisplay plot represents a different incidence angle The grid points in the neighborhood of the incidence angle of maximum 3 C amplitude have the highest signal power and show up as a peak on the plot The position of the peak represents the direction of the greatest rectilin earity and so it is applicable where the signal s particle motion is parallel to its direc tion of propagation such as for P waves Ideally each signal detected by an array would generate one sharp peak in the FK plot leaving little ambiguity about where the signal energy is concentrated and making the azimuth and slowness easy to interpret However in practice analysts often have to investigate further to pinpoint the correct azimuth and slowness val ues for the arrival In addition to theoretical limit
5. 281 File menu SpectraPlot 293 Compute 293 File menu XfkDisplay Exit 210 filter adding filter to list 111 displaying parameters 136 editing filter list 108 viewing and applying filter list 106 Fusion menu 174 Expand Channel 176 Expand Station 178 Select Station by Distance 175 Show Best Channels 175 Unexpand Channel 177 Unexpand Station 178 G global env 340 Go Regional 150 Go Teleseismic 150 H HAE processing description 261 hardware environment 14 HART 4 261 adjusting azimuths 271 parameters display 264 plot parameter fields 269 sending data to ARS 272 starting up 164 waveform display 268 window layout 262 275 Help button 27 hot keys 179 Hydro Arrival Group 261 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Hydro menu 151 Add Hydro Arrival Remarks 162 Align Hydro on T 153 Align Selected on T 153 DFX Hydro Features 155 Display Hydro Arrival Group 162 Hydro Bars Off 154 Hydro Path Blocked 159 HydroQC 157 HydroQCMap 158 Hydro Time Bars On 153 Map Hydro Path Blocked 161 Select All Hydro Channels 161 Send HART 164 Show Hydro Channels 152 Unshow Hydro Channels 152 IADR 4 248 configuration 360 request status 257 status pop up menu 260 Infra menu 165 Align Infra on 166 Select all Infra Channels 166 Show Infra Channels 165 Unshow Infra Channels 166 inventory database accounts 12 database tables 12
6. All option removes all information from the defined graph series in PolariPlot The graph is erased leaving blank plots Edit Redraw The Redraw option refreshes the graph area By selecting Redraw PolariPlot and its associated graphs are redrawn View Menu The View menu shown in Figure 227 allows you to change the way that data are displayed in PolariPlot or to change its display properties Display Zoom gt Enlarge Plots Compact Plots Coordinates Component Amplitude Azimuth Azimuth LR Short Incidence Planarity Long Incidence Rectilinearity Horizontal Vertical Radial Transverse Radial Component Transverse Component Normal Component Display Coordinates Sample Coordinates Draw Grid Draw Sub Grid Grid Help Hide Grids Help Not Available FIGURE 227 POLARIPLOT VIEW MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 287 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures View Display The View Display option brings up a list of graph types that can be selected for display as shown on the left side of Figure 228 A description of the available graph types is presented in Table 21 on page 274 You can choose to display one or more graphs by selecting the Display box beside each desired graph type Click Done to display the selection of graphs By default amplitude azimuth and recti linearity are display
7. CWL Interval Length 2 and Overlap Another smoothing method the Cooley Welch Lewis CWL method estimates sections of the overall spectrum then averages them together The scroll bars pro vide options to control the length of each segment and the overlap of the seg ments as they are averaged together Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures DMAN PROCEDURES dman is a tool that monitors interprocess communication messages sent between ARS and its associated tools dman s primary responsibility is to make sure that all applications to which messages are sent are running For example working within ARS you can display the location of an event in the Map application by using the ARS Tools option to send the data to Map Without further action by you Map starts and displays the data In the background dman monitors the message from ARS to Map detects that Map was not currently running and starts Map so it can respond to the message In addition to monitoring message traffic dman also pro vides a window which displays the run state and message queue size for each application From within this window you can manually start and stop applications and clear application message queues Message queues on each analyst workstation are maintained by the Tuxedo inter process communication framework see IDC6 5 2R
8. Smajax Major axis on error ellipse km Sminax Minor axis on error ellipse km Sdepth Standard error on depth km Iterations Number of iterations required before converging on a location Error Reserved presently not implemented Three solutions are presented in the Locator dialogue box The top solution is the surface solution where the location is forced to the surface of the earth The depth will always read 0 km The middle solution is the free depth solution where if enough information exists to support it a solution with hypocentral depth is calcu lated Note the standard error on depth which in a poor free depth solution is often larger than the depth itself The third solution is calculated by the Automatic Processing software and is presented as a reference This solution may also be used to fix the depth If you are certain of the location or depth you may force the loca tion or depth by typing this information in the bottom part of the Locator dialogue box This information is updated in the third or fixed depth solution and you can force its use by selecting this location as the preferred solution Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Only one solution is the preferred solution One solution has the smallest error associated with it and is automatically selected by ARS You can tell which so
9. an object Enter Edit Que ries A query entry dialogue window is displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Enter a query in the Enter Edit queries field for origin for example where mb 4 0 3 Choose Edit Select Query to execute that query You can enter com plex queries in the edit fields All origins with mb 4 0 are plotted Objects are always plotted in red Edit gt Remove All Objects The Remove All Objects option clears the Map display Any drawn objects such as events and stations that are not part of the standard Map background upon startup are removed To remove plotted objects 1 Choose Edit gt Remove All Objects The Map display is cleared to show the standard Map background Edit gt Edit Selected Objects The Edit Selected Objects option contains the functions that allow you to store remove and recall selected objects plotted on the Map display as shown in Figure 178 Edit View Options Analyst Tools Object Database Query Remove All Objects Edit Selected Objects gt store Selected Objects Recall Stored Objects Deselect Objects Remove Selected Objects FIGURE 178 EDIT SELECTED OBJECTS OPTIONS IN MAP Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instruct
10. Ascon Co Ph unr P Ad Ph Rn Ph Bm Ph APh UnAl SBD SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICH Loc Rej QC Utz Align on default phase FIGURE 21 QUICK TIP DESCRIBING TOOL BAR ALPH FUNCTION FIGURE 22 QUICK TIP DISPLAYING ORID arid 28844041 FIGURE 23 QUICK TIP DISPLAYING ARID Popup Menus Popup menus also provide additional information about event channel or arrival objects and provide easy access to functions specific to the object By right clicking on the event channel or arrival you are provided with a list of menu items that you can select directly from the popup menu For example if you select a popup menu on a channel functions commonly applied to channels such as fil Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV tering or zooming appear If you select a popup menu for an event you can access information about each arrival associated to the event without having to search for them Figures 24 through 26 show example popup menus FIGURE 24 CHANNEL POPUP MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FIGURE 25 EVENT POPUP MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2
11. Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 2 Choose Type Point Coordinates The point coordinates are printed in the Scheme window but are not cleared from the display 3 Choose Options Clear Points All points and the line attached to the mouse are removed Analyst Tools Menu The Analyst Tools menu shown in Figure 192 is used to send data from Map to ARS Analyst Tools Send ARS Selected Send ARS Selected Origins ZAS FIGURE 192 ANALYST TOOLS MENU Analyst Tools Send ARS Selected The Send ARS Selected option sends a message to ARS requesting that arrivals ori gins and origerrs selected in Map be added to the ARS selection list That is objects selected in Map will become selected in ARS To send selected Map objects to ARS 1 Select arrivals origins in Map by left clicking on the objects The objects turn black when selected 2 Choose Analyst Tools Send ARS Selected All arrivals and origins selected in Map become selected in ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Analyst Tools Send ARS Selected Origins ZAS This option is more comprehensive than the previous ZAS stands for zoom align and sort Map sends a similar message to ARS contain
12. NUM Number of defining phases in the magnitude calculation The preferred solution or the solution that will be saved to the database is the same as the preferred solution highlighted in the Locator Dialogue Box You have the option of disabling the calculation of one of the magnitudes To do this click either the mb ave or ml ppn toggle beside the appropriate magnitude label The second part of the Magnitude Dialogue Box is the log of past magnitude com putations for the selected event Figure 153 It contains the same fields as the cur rent solution part of the Magnitude Dialogue Box This area is not interactive and cannot be used to replace a current solution S 422 oos 5 aoa ox 2 E EE E E oS FiGURE 153 PAsT MAGNITUDES LOGGED MAGNITUDE DiALOGUE Box Additional functions are provided in a button toolbar located at the bottom of the Magnitude Dialogue Box as shown in Figure 154 Table 12 describes the functions Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Magnitude Arrivals Controls Help FIGURE 154 FUNCTIONS IN MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX TABLE 12 MAGNITUDE DiALOGUE FUNCTIONS Function Description Hide Hides Magnitude Dialogue Box Magnitude Calculates new magnitude Arrivals Displays arrivals and their station mag
13. Operational Procedures V FIGURE 26 ARRIVAL POPUP MENU Toolbar Button Functions For accessibility frequently used menu functions are provided on the ARS toolbar as shown in Figure 27 These functions modify the waveform display modify arriv als or call associated tools Toolbar buttons are displayed directly above the wave form display Table 2 provides a list of the toolbar options A detailed description of the functions follows Table 2 Asc On Co Ph Uftr Ph Ad Ph Rn Ph Bm Ph AIPh UnAI SBD SBU Th O F K Beam SICh Ele Loc QC Ufrz Sav FIGURE 27 ARS TOOLBAR TABLE 2 ARS TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS Tool Description Asc On select associated phases Co Ph disassociate coda phases Uftr unfilter channel s Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE2 ARS TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS CONTINUED Tool Description Ph P default phase Ad Ph add phase Rn Ph rename phase Bm Ph beam phase AIPh align on default phase UnAl unalign phase SBD sort by distance SBU sort by user defined order Th display theoretical arrival time Tho undisplay theoretical arrivals F K analyze azimuth and slowness using XfkDisplay Beam beam channel s SICh select channe Ele select element Loc locate event Rej reject event QC perform q
14. Raise Window When Made Active Allow Primary Windows On Top Show Contents During Move Window Icons Use Icon Box Place On Workspace OK Cancel FIGURE 254 TvPICAL STYLE MANAGER WINDOW SETTINGS At Login Resume current session Return to Home session Ask me at Logout Logout Confirmation Dialog On Off Set Home Session OK Cancel Hel p FIGURE 255 TYPICAL STYLE MANAGER STARTUP SETTINGS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures CDE Configuration Notes The Help menus on the CDE toolbar provide instructions for the interactive CDE customization utilities However the file configuration structure contained in the dt directory tree is poorly documented This section summarizes this structure and provides documentation not available elsewhere When a new analyst logs into the CDE windowing system a default dt direc tory structure is created for them Performing a directory listing 1s in this directory then yields C appmanager help sessionlogs tmp Desktop errorlog icons sessions types Trash errorlog old palettes startlog wsmenu Of these appmanager help tmp Desktop icons Trash and palettes are empty The directory types only contains two empty subdirecto ries p dynamic and p dynamic1 one directory for each display on a dual
15. Tools XfkDisplay on page 143 Time n Makes time a nondefining feature for all arrivals Az Slo n Makes azimuth and slowness nondefining features for all arrivals Locate Calculates an event location and the time of event AlphaList Hide and Undisplay All buttons the window menu option Close and the window minimize or iconify box do not provide the same functionality The Hide button and the window Close menu option both remove AlphaList from the dis play but do not release its contents This is very similar to iconifying a window The window still exists but is only displayed as an icon box The button Hide just hides the window The Undisplay All option releases AlphaList contents If you use Undisplay All to undisplay AlphaList then change the objects selected in the ARS window and redisplay AlphaList you will get a new AlphaList displaying the newly selected objects If you close AlphaList with any of the other methods redisplaying brings back the original AlphaList with the originally selected objects Therefore use Hide when you will want to get back to the same AlphaList and use Undisplay All when you want to display a new set of selections in AlphaList Locator Dialogue Box The Locator dialogue box is displayed whenever a location is computed for an event A location is successfully computed when enough defining features from associated arrivals exist to converge on an event location and time Location and magnitude comp
16. When the quality check is complete a popup text window appears on top of the ARS window This popup window provides the results of the quality check as shown in Figure 48 Events must meet a minimum num ber of weighting criteria to be published in the REB The criteria are defined in IDC5 2 1 Criteria are translated into points in ARS For example a time defining phase is assigned 1 point The QC output indi cates whether an event has sufficient points to be properly saved to the database for inclusion in the REB The QC output flags most errors including residual errors improper defining parameters and so forth You must fix these errors before saving the event The QC provides warnings only it does not prevent ARS from saving the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 48 EXAMPLE OF QC OUTPUT FROM EVENT Ufrz Unfreeze event Occasionally you may change your opinion of an event Additional data may become available after you have saved an event or you may want to reverse a previous decision or make a questionable phase non defining You cannot change an event that is in the frozen or saved state you must first unfreeze the event to make changes The Ufrz toolbar button unfreezes an event To unfreeze a saved event 1 Select the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Ma
17. headed workstation The directory wsmenu contains a subdirectory for each menu on the CDE toolbar By default these subdirectories are Applications Files Help Links Tools Cards Folders Hosts Mail These directories contain the executable dummy files for each of the icon buttons in the pull up menus The term dummy file is used because executing the file from the command line only displays the message Common Desktop Environment CDE action Invoke using the File Manager The files act as dummy place holders named for each menu s actions The term action is used in the CDE documentation to refer collectively to the set of files that generate the functionality seen when clicking the CDE icon buttons These notes follow that convention The c directory contains startup scripts for the window manager While modify ing these scripts offers an alternative method of customization they have not been used for the customization described here Instead the customization method Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures used was to manually create files similar to those produced as a result of using the CDE customization utilities provided through the CDE toolbar If you were to use the CDE customization utilities to create an action the following files would be created
18. login ARS history ARS load Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o Chapter 1 Introduction Database Tables affiliation ampdescript arrival detection dseisindex hydro arr group instrument mapcolor mappoint netmag overlaydisc request sensor sitechan wfdisc Database Accounts STATIC SEL3 IDCX LEB MAP IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions allocate hour amplitude assoc discard event hydro assoc interval mapdisc msgdisc origerr parrival seisgrid site stamag wftag amp3c apma colordisc dseisgrid event control hydro features lastid mapover na value origin remark seisindex siteaux timestamp Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction V Temporary Database Tables ims ARS wfdisc tmp id ims ARS arrival tmp id ims ARS amplitude tmp id ims ARS tmp id ims ARS in origin tmp id ims ARS out origin tmp id ims ARS origerr tmp id ims ARS out origerr tmp id gt ims ARS in assoc tmp id ims ARS out assoc tmp id gt ims ARS arrival tmp id ims ARS amplitude tmp id ims ARS tmp id ims ARS amp3c tmp id ims ARS detection tmp id ims ARS wfdisc tmp id ims ARS wftag tmp id ims ARS assoc tmp id gt ims ARS hydro fea
19. 00 00 04 2 128 00 08 01 67 36 00 16 13 20 168 00 24 26 60 112 00 39 13 2 84 00 43 09 38 118 1 21520 21521 21922 21526 _ 21525 21528 FiGURE 12 ARS EVENT LisT Quick tips on the event objects see Quick tips on page 37 display the origin identification number orid The terms event and origin are often used synony mously even in ARS menus Generally analysts refine events to determine the most accurate origin In the course of event refinement several different origins may be computed This document will use the term event to refer to the objects that analysts work with and will use the term origin to refer to the result of an event s location computation To select an event click the square box beside the event To select additional events press the shift key while clicking the additional events If you select an event without pressing the shift key all other events are unselected To view addi tional events use the scroll bar below the list to scroll left or right through all events in the time window Events are labeled in different colors depending on their status Table 1 explains the color scheme Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 1 EVENT COLORS Event Color Explanation blue The event has not been modified since it was last located Chapter 2 purple T
20. 1 distance Source to seismometer sep arations of 20 degrees or more 2 event Recorded at distances where the first P and S waves from shallow events have traveled paths through the mantle core theoretical arrival Point where an arrival is expected to appear on a waveform based on an event s location and depth Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions time series Time ordered sequence of data samples Typically a waveform or derived from waveforms transient signal Packet of energy of finite duration that stands out from the background ambient noise trigger 1 Action a database should take when some database related event occurs 2 Object used in DFX to indicate a potential transient signal for a given beam Triggers for a set of beams are collected to form detections tuxshell Process in the Distributed Processing CSCI used to execute and manage appli cations See IPC U uncertainty Estimate of the deviation from the true mean for the parameter or variable of interest unfreeze Allowing a saved event to be reanalyzed by removing it from the final database UNIX Trade name of the operating system used by the Sun workstations Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Glossary V W waveform Time domain signal data from a sensor the voltage output where the v
21. 1 Click on one of the highlighted stations in WEAssess with the right mouse button A pop up menu called Map Selected appears as shown in Figure 204 Move the cursor onto this menu option and select it Map is launched and displays two sets of stations as shown in Figure 205 The stations displayed in black represent stations already loaded into ARS that contain associated arrivals The stations displayed in red represent stations highlighted WEAssess which is ready to be requested The travel paths between event and station are also dis played Additional selections in WEAssess must be present to show up in Map Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 205 MAP LAUNCHED FROM WEASSESS Select Requested Stations The Select Requested Stations button initiates a request from the selected stations Based on the event s current location a waveform time segment surrounding a theoretical P arrival time is requested Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To initiate the request for auxiliary data 1 After selecting the desired stations click Select Requested Stations A request is made via the Message Subsystem for data from the high lighted stations The WEAssess window disappears An iconified
22. 28 29 30 31 33 33 33 34 34 35 37 38 38 38 39 40 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 26 ARRIVAL POPUP MENU 41 FIGURE 27 ARS TOOLBAR 41 FiGURE 28 SELECT ASSOCIATED PHASES 43 FIGURE 29 SELECT CODA PHASES 45 FiGURE 30 UNFILTER 46 FIGURE 31 SET DEFAULT PHASE BUTTON 47 FIGURE 32 SELECT PHASE DIALOGUE BOX 47 FIGURE 33 SET DEFAULT PHASE BUTTON SHOWING PHASE PCP 48 FIGURE 34 ANALYST ADDED PHASE 48 FIGURE 35 RENAMED PHASE 49 FIGURE 36 TEMPORARY BEAM CHANNEL 51 FIGURE 37 SORT BY DISTANCE FUNCTION 53 FIGURE 38 SORT BY USER DEFINED ORDER 54 FIGURE 39 DISPLAYING THEORETICAL ARRIVAL TIMES 55 FIGURE 40 CHANNEL COMPONENTS SELECTION BOX 57 FIGURE 41 CHANNEL SELECTION DIALOGUE BOX 59 FIGURE 42 LOCATOR DIALOGUE 59 FIGURE 43 ASSOCIATED ARRIVALS DIALOGUE BOX 60 FIGURE 44 MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX 61 FIGURE 45 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS DIALOGUE BOX 62 FIGURE 46 REASONS FOR REJECTING EVENT 64 FIGURE 47 REJECTED EVENT 65 FIGURE 48 EXAMPLE OF QC OUTPUT FROM EVENT 66 FIGURE 49 UNFROZEN EVENT 67 FIGURE 50 SAVED EVENT 68 FIGURE 51 FILE MENU 68 FIGURE 52 UNFREEZE SUBMENU 71 FIGURE 53 REJECT ORIGIN SUBMENU 73 FIGURE 54 EXAMPLE REASON FOR REJECTING EVENT 74 FIGURE 55 ARS PROMPT WHEN EXITING SESSION 75 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 56 FIGURE 57 FIGURE 58 FIGURE 59 FIGURE 60 FIGURE 61 FIGURE 62 FIGURE 63 FIGURE 64 FIGURE 65 FIGURE 66 F
23. All horizontal channels are removed from the ARS display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Seismic Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals The Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals menu option invokes the following default list of theoretical arrival times if the list was not modified by the Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals option Pn Pg Sn Lg and Rg To show regional theoretical arrivals 1 If preferred first use Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals 2 Select an event to be analyzed regionally 3 Choose Seismic Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals Regional theoretical arrivals are placed at their predicted arrival times on the waveform display Theoretical arrival times are based on the event s current location 4 If you update the location remove the theoretical arrivals from the dis play by choosing View Remove Theoreticals or by selecting ThO from the toolbar then redisplay them to update the arrival times for the new location Seismic Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals The Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals menu option invokes the following default list if the list was not modified by the Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arriv als option P pP sP PP PKP S and LQ 1 If preferred first use Define Teleseismic Theor
24. Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To scan a region 1 Choose Scan Scan By Region You need not select an event or channel A dialogue box appears prompting you to select a region of the earth as shown in Figure 129 2 Select a region then click Done ARS displays only channels from stations for the region selected FIGURE 129 REGION SELECTION DIALOGUE BOX Scan Select Unassoc Arrivals During scanning you may want to analyze groups of unassociated arrivals to search for evidence that some of them originate from the saved events and there fore should be associated Examples include inspecting unassociated arrivals in XfkDisplay or AlphaList The Select Unassoc Arrivals menu option selects all unassociated arrivals drawn in red from all channels in the displayed time win dow This includes channels that are scrolled vertically off the display Associated arrivals and arrivals in adjacent time windows remain unselected This option does not unselect arrivals already selected at the time of its use Figure 130 shows the results of using this option Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 11 20883536 _ 20883553 20882967 20882968 E 15 32 31 48 144 15 48 47 20 126 16 02 40 53 111 16 08 55 601 150 16 15 FIGURE 130 S
25. Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Aftershock The Aftershock function signals that abbreviated analysis has been performed on the selected time period Abbreviated analysis is performed in response to a large number of aftershock events resulting from a main shock Assuming a complete analysis was performed on the main event abbreviated analysis may be performed on all aftershocks to avoid delays in bulletin production To signal that the Aftershock pass is complete 1 Select the hours in which abbreviated aftershock analysis was performed Click on each hour consecutively with the left mouse button Hours must be selected consecutively for Aftershock to function Selected hours turn green 2 Click the Aftershock button Your name appears in the Aftershock column for the selected hours ARSscan ARSscan is the first function in the group of general function buttons After a time block has been allocated see Allocate on page 318 ARSscan is used to create an ARS load file specific to the allocated selected time block ARS uses the ARS 1oad file to set its database read parameters ARS load contains the allo cated date start time and time interval to be analyzed and an optimized list of sta tions and channels for the waveform data in that time period ARS displays the channels in this list after it reads the database ARS load is written in your home directory If ARSscan is not run on the cur
26. Environmental Processing Data Atmospheric Transport FIGURE 1 IDC SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION HIERARCHY Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2007 v Chapter 1 Introduction IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions SpectraPlot SpectraPlot provides the power spectrum of a waveform segment Anomalous Event Qualifier AEQ AEQ provides a statistical probability that an event is anomalous based on historical data Interactive Auxiliary Data Request Tool IADR IADR allows the analyst to request additional waveform data from auxil iary stations Hydroacoustic Azimuth Review Tool HART HART allows for interactive analysis of hydroacoustic azimuths PolariPlot PolariPlot is a polarization analysis and display tool Interactive Detection and Feature Extraction DFX DFX calculates features such as amplitude and period from seismic or hydroacoustic signals States Parties IDC databases Data import Data export Station m Network E Interactive Post analysis Processing Processing Analysis Processing FIGURE 2 IDC PROCESSING FLOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Introduction Figure 3 shows a simplified interactive processing flow model In this model an analysis session is started through the analyst log application In analyst log a time win
27. M Submit T Submit Submit BETIS Submit Submit i Submit Ig Submit Submit Results to ARS FiGURE 221 POLARIPLOT DisPLAY SUBMIT DiALOG BOX To submit parameter information to ARS 1 Select the Submit box beside each desired parameter Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 View gt Display on page 288 for the dia v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Choose File Submit to ARS The selected parameters are sent to ARS 3 Click Done to undisplay the dialogue box File Compute If you have made adjustments to parameters affecting the display either through menu functions or via the modifiable settings in the window area above the graphs use the Compute option to generate new graph traces that incorporate the new settings File Print The Print option prints selected PolariPlot output to the default printer The Print submenu options allow you to print individual polarization parameters all currently displayed graphs or all available graphs File Quit The Quit function exits PolariPlot Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 222 provides options to modify the data displayed in the PolariPlot graphs Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Filter Fi
28. Operational Procedures ARS was designed to display waveforms from all three time series technologies seismic hydroacoustic and infrasonic to allow for an integrated analysis of each event The travel times for signal energy differ depending on technology that is on the medium through which it propagates with seismic waves traveling the fastest hydroacoustic waves traveling somewhat slower and infrasonic waves traveling considerably slower still addition to the waveform time window which you initially specified ARS loads an additional 20 minutes of seismic data an addi tional 1 5 hours of hydroacoustic data and an additional 5 hours of infrasonic data This additional data allows the energy from events occurring near the end of the time window to reach more distant stations and still be viewable in the ARS waveform display Waveform Labels Waveform labels are displayed to the left of their associated waveforms A number of different channel types may be displayed vertical components horizontal com ponents or beamed channels The name of the channel is the combination of the abbreviation of the station name and the abbreviation of the channel component For example in Figure 13 the channel name is MJAR cb representing the coherent beam channel at station MJAR Matsushiro Japan The great circle distance from the station to the event location in degrees is dis played beneath the channel name The station to event az
29. Velocity Slowness ps733 fj FixSlowness Seaz 5 FIGURE 215 AzZIMUTH MODIFICATIONS BY ANALYST Sending Data to ARS To send reviewed data to ARS from HART choose Send ARS under the HART File menu as shown in Figure 216 The azimuth currently displayed in the Hydro Params box will be assigned to the arrivals in ARS ARS updates its internal copies of the arrival and hydro arr group tables When the associated arrivals are saved with the event the new information will be recorded in the database Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 0 005764052 737504244 FIGURE 216 HART FILE MENU In a two station case where two azimuths are computed one azimuth is assigned to the azimuth field for one of the station s arrivals and the second azimuth is assigned to the second station s arrival If this is a defining phase for location com putation in ARS only one arrival in the hydroacoustic arrival group should have any fields defining In the two station case this is the arrival with the preferred azi muth When there is only one azimuth that is all arrivals in the hydroacoustic arrival group have the same azimuth make the arrival with the highest snr defining The hydroacoustic arrival group functionality was added to ARS to facilitate the use of HART Several ARS limitations are related to using hy
30. normally four hours At this time scale waveforms are shown only as straight lines where data are present You will need to zoom in to see actual waveforms Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures start time 1998 05 30 00 00 00 duration 14000 network IDC database jars 70 ars 70054815 Done Cancel FiGURE 6 ARS READ WINDOW When started ARS displays the status of the Tuxedo interprocess communication system which ARS uses for communicating with the other analysis tools If Tuxedo is running ARS reports this with the message shown in Figure 7 11 gt Connected to Tuxedo agent 1 class ARS FiGURE 7 ARS IPC STATUS MESSAGE By default the first session is run as Tuxedo agent 1 All applications launched as part of this session then communicate with ARS using Tuxedo agent 1 If a second ARS session is launched while the first session is still running it is connected to Tux edo through agent 2 All tools launched through this second session communicate using agent 2 Put simply agents can be considered as communication channels through which tools belonging to the same session communicate Tuxedo agents ensure that the correct tool communicates with the correct ARS If Tuxedo is not available or has been disabled ARS is unable to communicate with any of its asso cia
31. origin identifier This number will change each time the event inter acts with the database for example each time it is saved or discarded evid event identifier This number will remain associated to the event no matter how many times it is altered or saved and unfrozen lat Latitude of the event deg lon Longitude of the event deg depth Depth of the event km sdepth Standard error of depth km date and time Date and time of the event mb Body wave magnitude of the event ms Surface wave magnitude of the event ml Local magnitude of the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Chapter 2 TABLE 4 EVENT FIELDS OF ALPHALIST CONTINUED Field Definition majax Major axis of the error elipsoid km minax Minor axis of the error elipsoid km strike The azimuth of the major axis of the error elipsoid deg from North sdobs Standard deviation of the observation Arrival Information in AlphaList Figure 143 shows the arrivals area of AlphaList window The columns present the features that define an arrival such as its phase time azimuth slowness and residuals Table 5 describes each field in the arrivals area gums mm mus L 39 71 20882412 43 99 ur 7 2000 08 05 01 21 48 728 2000 08 05 01 18 03 459 1
32. rectangle around the region of interest key key Indicates simultaneous key strokes Hold down the first key and press the second key control e Hold down the control key and press the letter e menu submenu Choose submenu from menu File Print Choose Print from the File menu press Press a key or sequence of keys Press the enter key or hold down the left mouse button pull down A list of options related to a Choose a year from the Date pull up or menu The list appears for as pull down menu pull right menu long as you press on the related menu screen monitor Hardware display monitor The left screen displays the Common Desktop Environ ment CDE menu select Highlight or click on data Select the text to be copied Select a waveform toggle Turn a particular mode on or off Use the Line Style toggle but by clicking on a button or key ton to switch between grid modes window Application s Graphical User The ARS window includes an Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Interface GUI event list IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides a general description of the software and includes the fol lowing topics m Software Overview a Functionality Inventory w Environment and States of Operation Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001
33. security and maintenance Chapter 3 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to identify and correct common problems related to the software Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures This chapter describes how to install configure and validate the soft ware m References This section lists the sources cited in this document m Glossary This section defines the terms abbreviations and acronyms used in this document m Index This section lists topics and features provided in this document along with page numbers for reference Conventions This document uses a variety of conventions which are described in the following tables Table shows the conventions for data flow diagrams Table Il lists typo graphical conventions Table describes the conventions used in instructions for using the keyboard commands and menus Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions TABLE 1 DATA FLOW SYMBOLS About this Document W Description Symbol pore external source or sink of data D disk store Db database store p control flow nn data flow 1 Symbols in this table are based on Gane Sarson conventions Gan79 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 W About this Document IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions TABLE Il TYP
34. the user identifier and agent is the Tuxedo session specifier dman finds the applica tion icons for its user interface in the directory CMS CONFIG system specs env process dt icons These pathnames are specified in its par file dman does not use X resources or access the database Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 364 May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 analyst log Installation and Configuration Procedures The analyst log application is implemented in the public domain Tcl Tk and is located in CMS SCRIPTS bin analyst log analyst log is started from the CDE toolbar by the CMS SCRIPTS bin start script analyst log does not take command line arguments but is programmed to access the par file CMS CONFIG app config interactive analyst log analyst log par which in turn accesses the files CMS CONFIG system specs process par CMS CONFIG system specs interactive par In the course of running analyst log executes the following scripts CMS SCRIPTS bin rebqc CMS SCRIPTS bin ARSscan CMS SCRIPTS bin today CMS HOME contrib bin mon dd CMS HOME contrib bin qcmap The only database table analyst log accesses is LEB allocate hour analyst log accesses the icon file CMS CONFIG app config interactive analyst log analyst log ppm It does not use X resources INITIATING OPERATIONS Before initiating the Interactive Analysis software verify that the followi
35. while pressing the letter a The hot key sequences are labeled on those ARS menu items assigned hot keys TABLE 3 ARS Hor KEY FUNCTIONS Key Action ctrl a Display AlphaList with selected event arrivals and channels ctrl b Display AlphaList with selected event and all associated arrivals and selected channels ctrl c Compress the waveform display unzoom by a factor of two ctrl d Disassociate the sole selected phase ctrl e Expand the waveform display zoom by a factor of one half ctrl f Display the popup filter box ctrl g Align on the selected theoretical phase select from the popup phase list box ctrl h Display onset termination bars for selected arrivals ctrl i Add an arrival to the sole selected channel selected from the popup phase list box Shift waveforms the Waveform window to the left by 25 show earlier time ctrl k Shift waveforms in Waveform window to the right by 25 show later time ctrl l Locate the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 Operational Procedures IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions TABLE 3 ARS Hor KEY FUNCTIONS CONTINUED Key Action ctrl n Rename the selected arrival using phase names from the popup box ctrl o Zoom on origin window size varies ctrl p Select all channels ctrl q Select all associated arrivals
36. you will observe some latency with these tools ARS is typically used to display waveform data from a large number of stations ARS tends to slow briefly when waveform data are manipulated Larger processing latencies include aligning arrivals sorting channels adding additional channels and beaming although you can select an option for beaming that runs as a back ground process Try to analyze one technology at a time Because the bulk of events that are built by the automatic system are seismic seismic data are dis played most of the time Hydroacoustic waveforms are recorded at a much higher sampling rate than the other technologies Infrasonic analysis requires that chan nels from each recording station at a site be displayed This can slow the respon siveness of the ARS display You may wish to display waveforms from these technologies at the end of an event s analysis and undisplay them when not in use instead of sorting all three technologies together for each event ARS provides functions to switch focus from one S H I technology to the next ARS and its tools are robust A failure ARS crash is not expected with any fre quency A normal rate of failure might be one ARS crash per analyst per week A rate higher than this should be investigated if the cause is unknown especially if a pattern emerges To protect against data loss in the event of a failure data from your session are automatically stored in UNIX binary files each t
37. 253 254 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 204 SELECTED OPTION IN WEASSESS 255 FIGURE 205 LAUNCHED FROM WEASSESS 256 FIGURE 206 USER NAME LEVEL IN IADR STATUS WINDOW 258 FIGURE 207 IADR FOLDER LEVELS IN IADR STATUS WINDOW 259 FIGURE 208 IADR POP UP OPTIONS 260 FIGURE 209 HART 262 FIGURE 210 F STATISTIC ANNULUS 263 FIGURE 211 HYDROACOUSTIC PARAMETERS DISPLAY 265 FIGURE 212 HART WAVEFORM DISPLAY 267 FIGURE 213 HYDROACOUSTIC AZIMUTH PLOT PARAMETERS 269 FIGURE 214 COLOR BAR PARAMETERS 270 FIGURE 215 AZIMUTH MODIFICATIONS BY ANALYST 272 FIGURE 216 HART FILE MENU 273 FIGURE 217 POLARIPLOT WINDOW 276 FIGURE 218 POLARIPLOT PARAMETER DISPLAY 277 FIGURE 219 POLARIPLOT DEFAULT DISPLAY GRAPHS 278 FIGURE 220 POLARIPLOT FILE MENU 280 FIGURE 221 POLARIPLOT DISPLAY SUBMIT DIALOG BOX 281 FIGURE 222 EDIT MENU 283 FIGURE 223 FILTER SUBMENU 283 FIGURE 224 POLARIPLOT FILTER DIALOGUE BOX 284 FIGURE 225 ROTATION MODE DIALOGUE BOX 285 FIGURE 226 SET SUBMENU OPTIONS 286 FIGURE 227 POLARIPLOT VIEW MENU 287 FIGURE 228 POLARIPLOT GRAPH DISPLAY OPTIONS 288 FIGURE 229 VIEW gt ZOOM SUBMENU 289 FIGURE 230 COORDINATES DISPLAY OPTIONS 290 FIGURE 231 THREE GRID STYLES AVAILABLE FOR DISPLAY IN POLARIPLOT 291 FIGURE 232 SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY WITH LINEAR FREQUENCY 292 FIGURE 233 SPECTRAPLOT FILE MENU 293 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 234 FIGURE 235
38. 302 Queued messages may also be monitored through dman If you experience a sudden failure of an application shows the status of the tool and the number of messages left in the queue If unprocessed messages are left in the application s queue dman provides a convenient method of restarting the application to process the remaining messages This avoids adding an additional message to process which happens when relaunching the applica tion from ARS ARS warnings which contain both status and error states are displayed in the mes sage window in ARS All warning messages output from ARS are displayed here Only the most recent message is displayed ARS automatically scrolls as messages are generated To view previous messages scroll using the scroll bar to the left of the message window INTERPRETING ERROR MESSAGES Because ARS and its associated tools contain over 200 individual functions it is dif ficult to describe all the status messages that could result from operator errors database problems interprocess communications errors unexpected system downtime and software issues However a number of the more common mes sages appearing in the ARS message window are explained in this section Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 3 Troubleshooting Message align channels error computing travel time for 01 52 with phase PKh
39. 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To display a hydroacoustic arrival group 1 Select a hydroacoustic arrival belonging to a hydro arrival group 2 Choose Hydro Display Hydro Arrival Group All hydroacoustic arrivals belonging to the selected arrival s hydro arrival group are selected Hydro Send HART The Hydroacoustic Azimuth Review Tool HART is an interactive tool that comple ments the Automatic Processing software in estimating hydroacoustic azimuth The Send HART menu option allows you to review and edit azimuths calculated by the Automatic Processing software To use HART 1 Select one arrival from a hydro arrival group Hydro Display Hydro Arrival Group on page 162 describes how to identify a hydro arrival group 2 Filter the waveform data using one of the eight hydroacoustic frequency bands choosing the one that displays the highest snr 3 Perform regular analysis on the hydroacoustic arrivals see Hydro gt DFX Hydro Features on page 155 4 Zoom out to compress the waveform display so that at least 8 10 min utes of waveform data are displayed on either side of the arrival group 5 Make certain that only one of the arrivals in the hydro arrival group is selected then choose Hydro Send HART HART displays all the waveforms in the hydro arrival group on the left part of the HART display and the azimuth annul
40. ARS The better the event s location solution in ARS the more this azimuth can be relied on as a guide Yellow Analyst selected azimuth Clicking directly within the annulus selects the position of the yellow radial bar The yellow bar initially points to the point of maximum correlation Figure 211 shows the hydroacoustic parameters display located below the annulus The parameters display provides a quantitative representation of what appears in the annulus The color scheme is similar to the azimuth bars in the annulus Blue values calculated by automatic processing not modifiable Yellow values selected in HART Purple values related to the selected event in ARS Green Cursor Params box values calculated while slowness is fixed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V AZ j m Auto Az2 Velocity mA 22 Slowness Stat Velocity 450 FStat sikim l Fix Slowness FIGURE 211 HYDROACOUSTIC PARAMETERS DISPLAY Table 18 describes the parameters in the Hydro Params box TABLE 18 HYDRO PARAMS FEATURE Box Parameter Description Cursor Az Azimuth of the cursor as it moves around the annulus deg Params Velocity Velocity of the cursor as it moves around the annulus nor mally fixed unchanging at 1 485 km s Slowness Slowness of
41. Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures been saved you must first unfreeze the event The Unfreeze Origins menu option unfreezes an event and its associated arrivals Only after the event is unfrozen can you make changes relocate and save the event To unfreeze origins 1 Select the saved event that you want to modify 2 Choose File Unfreeze Unfreeze Origins The event which was labeled green while it was in the saved state now turns blue All of the arrivals also become unfrozen and turn blue The event is now ready for modifications 3 Modify the event as necessary 4 Save or discard the event after reanalysis All SEL3 Standard Event List events should be either in a saved or discarded state at the end of your analysis session or the changes will be lost File Unfreeze Unfreeze Arrivals The Unfreeze Arrivals menu option allows you to unfreeze specific arrivals You can only unfreeze an arrival if it is not associated to an event If an arrival is associated to an event that is saved you must unfreeze the entire event To unfreeze arrivals 1 Select the unassociated saved arrival 2 Choose File Unfreeze Unfreeze Arrivals The individual arrival turns blue and can now be modified If the arrival is associated to a saved event ARS provides a warning that you must first unfreeze the entire
42. Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FiGURE 116 LisT OF SEISMIC ARRIVAL REMARKS Seismic Go Teleseismic The Go Teleseismic menu option performs a sequence of operations It zooms to display all the arrivals associated to an event in one screen It aligns on P phase and sorts the stations by distance from the event To use the Go Teleseismic operations 1 Select an event to be analyzed at teleseismic distances 2 Choose Seismic Go Teleseismic ARS aligns on the P phase sorts the stations by distance from the event and finally compresses or zooms the waveform display so that all arrivals for the event are displayed horizontally on one screen Seismic Go Regional The Go Regional menu option performs a sequence of operations It zooms to dis play all arrivals associated to an event in one screen It aligns on the Pn phase and sorts the stations by distance from the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures To use the Go Regional operations 1 Select an event to be analyzed at regional distances 2 Choose Seismic Go Regional ARS aligns on the Pn phase sorts the stations by distance from the event and compresses or zooms the waveform display so that all arrivals associ ated fo
43. CDE menu item The start hart server script is also run each time dman is started by analyst log to verify that HART is running The ARS and HART applications communicate via sockets and must use the same port number to initiate communications The start hart server script spec ifies this port number for HART and the ARS par file see the ARS section above specifies it for ARS The HART man page contains more information on specifying port number The HART application normally never terminates even when the analyst logs out It must be stopped using the UNIX kill command in a shell window When the start hart server script launches HART it specifies the par file cMs coNFIG Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures app config interactive HART HART par The start hart server script redirects HART s output to the log file LOGDIR HART machine hart 1log where machine is the host machine running HART PolariPlot PolariPlot uses a public domain widget creation library WCL which allows defini tion of much of its GUI in X resource files The default X resource file CMS HOME X11 app defaults PolariPlot is extensive This file uses WCL syntax and is required for operation There is no IDC site specific X resource cus tomization file PolariPlot does not use a parameter file or
44. CMS HOME scheme siod scm CMS HOME scheme general scm CMS HOME scheme libpar scm CMS HOME scheme math scm CMS HOME scheme Mapdefault scm CMS HOME scheme Mapgc scm Mapinit CMS CONFIG app config interactive Map Mapconfig scm CMS CONFIG app config interactive Map overlay scm CMS CONFIG app config interactive Map IDC MAP scm CMS CONFIG app config interactive Map Map Analyst Tools scm The first group of files provides the fundamental Scheme functionality common to all the IDC applications that use Scheme The Mapdefault scm file provides Map with the bulk of its Scheme functionality The Mapgc scm file defines graphic con texts for Map These files are maintained by Map developers and should not be modified The IDC implementation does not use a Mapsite scm file but this file is searched for in the CMS directory and would be loaded after Mapgc scm if found Next Map searches for a Mapinit file in the analyst s home directory and loads this file The mkCMsSuser script installs a default Mapinit file which loads Mapconfig scm overlay scm IDC MAP scm and Map Analyst Tools scm These files provide IDC custom functionality Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures The Map application uses fonts from the directory cMs HOME X11 Map xgk
45. CMSS config earth specs MAG mdf idc mdf defs CMSS config earth specs MAG mdf idc mdf defs CMSS config earth specs MAG tlsf idc tlsf defs CMSS config earth specs MAG tlsf idc tlsf defs CMSS config earth specs SASC sasc CMSS config earth specs TT vmsf ars defs CMSS config earth specs TT vmsf ims defs CMSS config station specs par CMSS config system specs DFX par CMSS config system specs app resources ARS CMSS config system specs app resources Map CMSS config system specs app resources SpectraPlot CMSS config system specs app resources XfkDisplay CMSS config system specs automatic par CMSS config system specs env analyst dt CMSS config system specs env default CMSS config system specs env global env CMSS config system specs env process dt icons CMSS config system specs env terminfo CMSS config system specs interactive par CMSS config system specs process par CMSS config system specs shared par CMSS contrib bin mon dd CMSS contrib bin qcmap CMSS jlib HART jar CMSS jlib IADR jar CMSS jlib ipc jar CMSS jlib libHART compute so CMSS jlib libjipc so CMSS jlib util jar CMSS scheme ARSdefault scm CMSS scheme Mapdefault scm CMSS scheme Mapgc scm CMSS scheme general scm CMSS scheme intrinsic scm CMSS scheme libpar scm CMSS scheme math scm CMSS scheme siod scm CMSS scripts bin ARSscan CMSS scripts bin a
46. DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 174 FIGURE 175 FIGURE 176 FIGURE 177 FIGURE 178 FIGURE 179 FIGURE 180 FIGURE 181 FIGURE 182 FIGURE 183 FIGURE 184 FIGURE 185 FIGURE 186 FIGURE 187 FIGURE 188 FIGURE 189 FIGURE 190 FIGURE 191 FIGURE 192 FiGURE 193 FIGURE 194 FIGURE 195 FIGURE 196 FIGURE 197 FIGURE 198 FIGURE 199 FiGURE 200 FiGURE 201 FiGURE 202 FiGURE 203 DEFAULT MAP DISPLAY FILE MENU IN MAP EDIT MENU MAP OBJECT DATABASE QUERY OPTIONS EDIT SELECTED OBJECTS OPTIONS IN MAP EDIT LAYERS OPTIONS IN MAP ViEW MENU IN MAP ViEW OBJECTS OPTION IN MAP ViEW SELECTED OBJECTS OPTION IN MAP MAP OUTLINES OPTIONS IN MAP MAP OUTLINES AVAILABLE IN MAP View MAPS OPTIONS IN MAP LisT OF MAP VIEWS AVAILABLE IN MAP ZOOMED IMAGE OVERLAYS AVAILABLE IN MAP MAP DiSPLAY OVERLAYS MAP MOUSE POINTER COORDINATES OPTIONS MENU IN MAP MAP ANALYST TOOLS MENU ANOMALOUS EVENT QUALIFIER AEQ AEQ ANOMALOUS OUTPUT AEQ MAGNITUDE OUTPUT AEQ Low SEISMICITY AREAS OUTPUT AEQ DEEP OUTPUT AEQ Low SEISMICITY AT DEPTH OUTPUT GENERATING DATA REQUEST FROM ARS WAVEEXPERT ASSESS WEASSESS TOOL LIST OF STATIONS WEAssESS COLUMN SORTING OPTIONS BLOCK OF SELECTED STATIONS NON CONTINUOUS SELECTION OF STATIONS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 226 227 228 228 229 230 231 232 232 233 234 235 236 238 239 240 241 242 243 245 245 246 246 246 247 249 250 251
47. EXECUTABLE FILES This section provides background on the location and composition of the execut able files that make up the Interactive Analysis software Executable application files are generally located in the directory CMS HOME bin with executable shell scripts located in CMS SCRIPTS bin The PATH environment variable as defined in an analyst s cshrc file includes these directories When executed many of the applications are assembled from multiple files In addition to the com piled code located in the bin directory the loader will link dynamic code libraries such as the C or Motif runtime libraries The dd command can be used to list the paths to all the dynamic libraries required by an application For example execut ing Idd on the PIDC 7 0 ARS application yields the following list libF77 s0 4 gt opt SUNWspro lib libF77 s0 4 libM77 s0 2 gt opt SUNWspro lib libM77 s0o 2 libXm so 4 gt usr dt lib libXm so 4 libXmu so 4 gt usr openwin lib libXmu so 4 libXt so 4 gt usr openwin lib libXt so 4 libXext so 0 gt usr openwin lib libXext so 0 libX11 so 4 gt usr openwin lib libX11 so 4 libtux so 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libtux so 60 libbuft so 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libbuft so 60 libtux2 so 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libtux2 so 60 libfml so 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libfml so 60 libfm132 s0 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libfml32 s0 60 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual
48. FIGURE 128 FIGURE 129 FIGURE 130 FIGURE 131 FIGURE 132 FIGURE 133 FIGURE 134 FIGURE 135 FIGURE 136 FIGURE 137 FIGURE 138 FIGURE 139 FIGURE 140 FIGURE 141 FIGURE 142 FIGURE 143 FIGURE 144 DFX PROCESSING DIALOGUE BOX LIST OF SEISMIC ARRIVAL REMARKS HYDRO MENU ONSET TERMINATION BARS AROUND HYDROACOUSTIC SIGNAL ANALYST ADJUSTED ONSET TERMINATION BARS HYDROQC SHOWING NO BLOCKED PATHS HYDROQC SHOWING PHASES ARE BLOCKED EXAMPLE TRAVEL PATH DISPLAYED IN MAP PREDICTED BLOCKAGE List OF REMARKS QUICK TIP FOR ARRIVAL THAT BELONGS TO HYDRO ARRIVAL GROUP INFRA MENU SCANNING MENU SCAN BY REGION QUICK TIP REGION SELECTION DIALOGUE BOX SELECTED UNASSOCIATED ARRIVALS QUICK TIP FOR CREATE ORIGIN amp LOCATE NEW ORIGIN CREATED BY CREATE ORIGIN amp LOCATE NEW EVENT IN ALPHALIST SELECTION BEFORE NEXT UNASSOC ARRIVAL SELECTION AFTER NEXT UNASSOC ARRIVAL ADD NEXT amp PREV BUTTONS FUSION MENU LIST OF STATIONS TO REDISPLAY EXPAND CHANNEL DisPLAYS ONE SELECTED CHANNEL EXPAND STATION DisPLAY ALPHALIST EVENT INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST ARRIVAL INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST CHANNEL INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 146 150 152 154 154 157 158 159 160 162 163 165 167 167 168 169 170 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 181 182 183 185 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 145 ALPHALIST TOOLBAR BUTTONS 186 FIGURE 146 LOCATOR DIA
49. Figure 40 3 Select a channel type from the list of components then click Done ARS displays all traces belonging to the selected channel type The chan nel s appear sorted by distance from the event usually along with the other components of that station They appear as unfiltered traces but are aligned on the default phase These added channels remain displayed for the duration of the ARS session or until you remove them manually see View gt Remove Channels on page 113 Ele Element The Ele toolbar button allows you to select and display individual elements of a station To select an element 1 Select a channel 2 Select Ele from the ARS toolbar 3 Select a channel from the list of elements as shown in Figure 41 then click Done ARS displays the element The channel is sorted by distance to the event usually along with the other elements of the selected station s channels It appears as an unfiltered trace but is aligned on the default phase Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V SelectorDialog FIGURE 41 CHANNEL SELECTION DIALOGUE BOX Loc Locate The Locate toolbar button computes a location using the arrival time azimuth and slowness of the associated arrivals see IDC5 2 1 ARS uses a grid point conver gence algorithm to compute a location then displays a Location dial
50. Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Operational Procedures Chapter 2 TABLE 13 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS BOX FIELDS CONTINUED Field Description D N This interactive field indicates whether the arrival is magnitude defining or nondefining If pressed the arrival is magnitude defining If not pressed the arrival is not magnitude defining If you change the defining state in this field the M A field changes to indicate that this field was set manually and this field becomes fixed for the next location calculation D E This field indicates whether the station magnitude calculation is detection based or event based Station Station at which the arrival was observed Phase Phase name Amptype X Amplitude type Most commonly displayed amptypes are A5 2 for stations at teleseismic distances and SBSNR for stations at regional distances These amptypes are described in the ampdescript table Delta Distance of the station to the event deg S Station magnitude calculated for the surface solution F Station magnitude calculated for the free depth solution R Station magnitude calculated for the fixed depth solution mb av Magnitude residual for my the difference between station magnitude and the network averaged body wave magnitude my mlppn Magnitude residual for mlppn the difference between station magnitude and the network averaged local magnitude mlppn Sort by Options for displaying arrival inf
51. May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions event Unique source of seismic hydroacoustic or infrasonic wave energy that is limited in both time and space event definition criteria Rules that specify the minimum number and type of defining phases or stations that are required to define an event evid Event identifier f k Frequency versus wavenumber k anal ysis that maps phase power from an array as a function of azimuth and slow ness f k beam Coherent beam steered to the azimuth and slowness of the maximum peak in an f k spectrum f k spectrum Result of a data transformation from the time space domain to the frequency wavenumber domain Useful in deter mining the direction and slowness of an arriving phase failure Inability of a system or component to perform its required functions within specified performance requirements Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Glossary V false event Term used to describe events that are not real or have been built by associating noise or nonseismic detections features Various measurements of a waveform segment used to characterize a detec tion H HAG Acronym for Hydroacoustic Arrival Group used in hydroacoustic processing hydroacoustic Pertaining to sound in the ocean iconify Minimize an application display window so that only a recognizable graphic sym bol or icon occupies space on the dis
52. Menu 129 Tools Menu 138 Seismic Menu 145 Hydro Menu 151 Infra Menu 165 Scan Menu 167 Fusion Menu 174 Hot Keys in ARS 179 AlphaList 180 Locator Dialogue Box 187 Magnitude Dialogue Box 194 DESCRIPTIONS OF ADDITIONAL ANALYST TOOLS 201 XFKDISPLAY PROCEDURES 201 XfkDisplay Window Layout and Organization 202 FK plot 203 Main Menu Functions 210 File Menu 210 Edit Menu 211 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION View Menu Toolbar MAP PROCEDURES Map Window Layout and Organization File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Options Menu Analyst Tools Menu ANOMALOUS EVENT QUALIFIER AEQ PROCEDURES AEQ Window Layout and Organization AEQ Procedures Summary AEQ Menus INTERACTIVE AUXILIARY DATA REQUEST IADR PROCEDURES Requesting Data and WEAssess Map Selected Stations Select Requested Stations Viewing Request Status and IADR Status Window Pop up Menu HYDROACOUSTIC AZIMUTH REVIEW TOOL HART PROCEDURES HART Window Layout and Organization Making Azimuth Adjustments Sending Data to ARS POLARIPLOT PROCEDURES PolariPlot Window Layout and Organization PolariPlot Menus File Menu Edit Menu View Menu SPECTRAPLOT PROCEDURES SpectraPlot Window Layout and Organization File Menu Edit Menu Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 219 221 225 225 226 227 231 241 243 244 244 247 247 248 248 254 256 257 260 261 262
53. On The filter parameters currently applied to each waveform are displayed No information appears if the trace is not filtered Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual eo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Options gt Filter Parameters gt Filter Parameters Off To turn off filter parameters 1 If filter parameters are displayed choose Options gt Filter Parameters gt Filter Parameters Off The filter information disappears from all channels as shown in Figure 108 FIGURE 108 FILTER PARAMETERS TURNED OFF Options gt Scale Types Although normally undisplayed you can display the waveform scaling resize option currently in effect The Scale Types options are shown in Figure 109 With this option enabled ARS displays one of two messages auto or resize depend ing on whether waveform auto scaling is currently enabled Resize indicates auto scaling has been disabled by the Waveforms Resize Mouse option The Scale Types message is shown on the far right of the displayed waveform often with the filter parameters message as shown in Figure 110 FIGURE 109 SCALE TYPE DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER OPTIONS MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FIGURE 110 SCALE DISPLAY TURNED ON Options gt Scale Types
54. Open The Open option opens a dialogue box from which you can select a graph series for display Graph series are created through the New option To open a dialogue box 1 Click on the desired series in the Graph field and click OK The selected series is displayed in PolariPlot and replaces the one cur rently displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions File Save to ARS Chapter 2 Operational Procedures The Save to ARS option sends parameter information to ARS After you choose this option PolariPlot displays a dialogue box as shown in Figure 221 This dia logue box contains all the polarization parameters available either to be displayed or to be sent to ARS Parameter information is calculated for all graph types whether displayed or not and therefore can be sent to ARS independently of their display status See Figure 228 and logue s display functionality Component Amplitude Azimuth Azimuth LR Short Incidence Planarity Long Incidence Display Display Rectilinearity Radial Transverse Ratio Radial Component Transverse Component Display Normal Component Display Slowness Time Done Display MAE Display Display Display Display Horizontal Vertical Ratio Display Display Display INE vl Submit Submit I M Submit
55. P ASAR 2000 08 12 15 58 12 3 0 189 5 2 4 11 9 0 5 2 0 8 5 3 amp 1 Arrival table contains no entries e FIGURE 157 MAIN XFKDISPLAY WINDOW TABLE 14 XrkDisPLAY FIELDS Field Description selection Arrivals can be selected or deselected When an arrival is selected a checkbox checkmark appears When an arrival is not selected the checkmark is not present To select or deselect click once with the left mouse button arid Arrival identifier fktype Reference name for recipe parameter set default is station name phase Phase name sta Station being used time Arrival time cfreq Center frequency Hz Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 14 XFKDISPLAY FIELDS CONTINUED Field Description azimuth Observed station to event azimuth deg east of north delaz Azimuth uncertainty deg slow Slowness s deg inverse of velocity delslo Slowness uncertainty s deg bandw Band width Hz fstat Degree of signal coherence across the array fkqual Fk quality Error and warning messages appear at the bottom of the main XfkDisplay window The small bell icon on the bottom right of the window controls sound from the tool To turn the alert beeps off click directly on the bell A vertical line will be drawn through the bell To turn the beep back on click it again F
56. PIU IER CM10 sz 02 52 CM11 sz CM03 SZ CM12 sz CM04 sz vi 13 52 CM05 SZ 14 52 06 52 AL 15 52 CM07 SZ 16 52 CM08 sz CM17 sz 09 52 CM18 sz ly Cancel f Naas 1 FIGURE 168 CHANNEL LIST IN XFKDISPLAY WITH ALL CHANNELS SELECTED To remove one or more channels from XfkDisplay processing for the current analy sis session 1 Choose Edit gt Site Select A station selection window similar to Figure 166_on page 213 is dis played 2 Select the desired station A list of channels for that station is displayed as shown in Figure 168 By default all channels are selected as indicated by the check mark beside each channel 3 To deselect one or more channels click the check To reselect a channel click the checkbox again 4 To apply the channel selection changes click Apply To ignore changes click Cancel The deselected channels are excluded from XfkDisplay processing for the rest of the current analysis session Any beaming and azimuth slowness computations are processed without data from the deselected channels Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures Edit Send Arrival s to ARS If you have made changes to the output of XfkDisplay and have computed azi muth and slowness values that are to be used in ARS for a
57. SYSTEM ALWAYS MAKE CHANGES JUDICIOUSLY AND PROVIDE A WAY TO ROLL BACK IF RESULTS ARE NOT WHAT YOU EXPECT Changing Look and Feel The Interactive Analysis Subsystem applications are Motif X window based appli cations When an X application starts it searches for and interprets a number of resource files to alter its default appearance X resource files are text files which contain a list of parameter name value pairs Changing a named parameter s value in a resource file overrides the parameter s default value For example the xde faults file provided with the PIDC system contains a line specifying ARS Back ground grey85 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures This command tells the ARS application to use the color grey85 for its background color Other parameter values specify the fonts window sizes and even the menu contents for the applications Up to three resource files may contribute to an inter active application s X resources The Xdefaults file is located in the user s home directory and is the first file searched The app defaults file is named after the appli cation for example ARS is located in the directory specified in the user s environ ment variable XUSERFILESEARCHPATH For the Interactive Analysis Subsystem this file is maintained by the software developers and provides the minimum resour
58. Status FIGURE 111 TOOLS MENU Tools gt AEQ The AEQ Anomalous Event Qualifier menu option launches the AEQ tool After analyzing an event you may want to run AEQ which provides a probability that the event is anomalous based on a statistical analysis of historical data see Anomalous Event Qualifier AEQ Procedures on page 244 To use the AEQ tool 1 Select an event 2 Choose Tools AEQ If not already active AEQ launches It is configured to display on the screen opposite the main ARS display The selected event is analyzed and the results are displayed See Anomalous Event Qualifier AEQ Proce dures on page 244 for interpretation of results AEQ runs until you stop it You can send a new event to at any time Tools Beam Array Beamforming is a process of enhancing coherent signals relative to background noise by delaying and summing array station channel data to emphasize energy arriving at the array from a particular direction such as a theoretical event location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Beaming is performed by the DFX application IDC7 1 1 The Beam Array menu option initiates interactive recall processing to have DFX form beamed data for the selected station around the selected theoretical arrival time oriented toward the selected
59. Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures Using the CDE utilities is convenient for individual use but is very time consuming for a system administrator attempting to configure a number of analyst s login accounts To expedite configuration and ensure standardization the mkCMsSuser script installs these files from the config tree creating all the new actions in one operation The Applications menu icon button has been replaced with the analyst log icon button on the CDE front panel to make it the most accessable To accomplish this an additional file has been added by the mkCMs amp Suser script to dt types fp dynamic This file is called Applicat1 fp and looks like CONTROL Applications TYPE icon CONTAINER TYPE SUBPANEL CONTAINER NAME PersAppsSubpanel DELETE True This control file provides an override to the system default specifying that the Applications icon on the PersAppsSubpanel should be deleted It will be replaced by the AnalystLog 1 pm icon A pull up menu s icon can be promoted to the front panel manually by clicking on the menu icon with the right mouse button and selecting Promote to Front Panel Be sure to save the analyst s session after doing this so the changes become per manent The term session refers to all the windows and applications running in the analysts CDE
60. Toggles between a logarithmic and a linear x axis display an example linear plot display is shown in Figure 232 and a log plot in Figure 236 Grid Draw Grid Displays grid lines superimposed on the spectral display Draw SubGrid Displays a more detailed grid than the Draw Grid option Hide Grids Undisplays the grid display Coordinates Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Display Coordinates Displays the coordinates of the cursor on the graph The coordinates change as the cursor is moved around the display Sample Coordinates Displays the coordinates represented by the cur sor s position when the left mouse button is clicked Off Turns off the coordinates display v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures TABLE 25 ViEW MENU FUNCTIONS CONTINUED Header Function Sub function Description Smoothing No of Bins Changes the smoothing units to number of bins Hertz Changes the smoothing units to number of Hertz Line Style Dashed Displays the plotted spectra as a dashed line Solid Displays the plotted spectra as a solid line Legend IRAMb 1998 05 30 0054 5 2 Pts 114 FIGURE 236 SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY WITH LOG FREQUENCY Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Ope
61. UTERE Send to ARS calculate Fk Display Fk Select 11 Deselect All Beam FIGURE 162 MENU AND TOOLBAR OPTIONS IN XFKDISPLAY File Menu The File menu provides one option Exit as shown in Figure 163 FiGURE 163 FiLE MENU IN XFKDISPLAY File Exit To exit XfkDisplay 1 Choose File Exit The XfkDisplay program exits Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Edit Menu The Edit menu provides options to edit parameter settings and manipulate data objects Figure 164 Stations Parameters Calculate Site Select Send Arrival s to ARS Copy Arrival s Delete Arrival s FIGURE 164 EDIT MENU IN XFKDISPLAY Edit Stations The Stations option allows you to edit station specific parameters used by XfkDis play to compute azimuth and slowness System defaults for these parameter values are specified in parameter files which XfkDisplay reads on startup The XfkDisplay man page provides details on all station parameters that you can set interactively Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 D IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures esa To edit station specific parameters Station List 1 Choose Edit gt Stations A list of stations is displayed as shown in Figure 165 2 Select the station
62. User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To kill all applications at once 1 Choose Options gt Kill All in dman dman prompts you to confirm the operation by displaying the message Kill all Applications and Quit dman as shown in Figure 243 2 Click OK to continue Click Cancel to abort the operation and keep the applications running dman sends terminate commands to applications in the session The icons for all running applications turn orange and then gray as each exits When the last application has terminated dman exits Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures messages Map messages xfkDisplay messages dman Confirm gt Killall Applications and Quit Cancel messages i messages messages i messages FIGURE 243 EXITING ANALYSIS SESSION ANALYST_LOG PROCEDURES analyst_log is the first tool used to begin an analysis session and the last tool used to complete an analysis session analyst_log is used to reserve a time block for anal ysis to create a parameter file that ARS will access to load data to launch ARS for data analysis to run quality checks at the end of an analysis session and to signal that an analysis session has been completed which triggers
63. V W station list 250 station sorting 252 WaveExpert 248 WERequest 248 waveform adjusting display offset 33 aligning 51 X aligning by time 52 aligning hydroacoustic on T phase 153 XfkDisplay 2 7 201 aligning on infrasonic arrivals 166 configuration 358 align on associated phases 104 starting up 143 align on theoretical arrival time 103 startup 56 display area 31 tabular output 207 displaying 130 toolbar functions 210 displaying all channels 112 displaying best channels 175 displaying hydroacoustic 152 displaying hydroacoustic features 155 displaying infrasonic 165 zooming 35 displaying regional 150 displaying scale 137 displaying teleseismic 150 duplicating 115 expanding 176 reading 68 removing channels from display 113 resizing 131 scaling 32 selecting all hydroacoustic channels 161 selecting all infrasonic 166 shifting display 123 showing horizontal components 147 sorting 115 sorting by distance 52 sorting by user defined order 53 unaligning 105 unfiltering 45 108 unzooming 121 zooming 35 118 WEAssess 248 Cancel 257 selecting stations with Map 254 Select Requested Stations 256 Z Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001
64. an arbitrary remark To add arbitrary remarks on selected events 1 Select and analyze an event 2 If the event requires a non standard remark choose Edit Remarks Add Arbitrary Remarks on Selected A text editing box with a cursor appears as shown in Figure 77 Enter a non standard comment then select Done Caution CAREFUL TO HAVE ONLY ONE OBJECT SELECTED WHEN ADDING A REMARK IF YOU SELECT ARRIVALS WITH THE EVENT THE REMARK IS ATTACHED TO EACH OF THE SELECTED ARRIVALS IF THE REMARK WAS INTENDED TO APPLY ONLY TO A CERTAIN ARRIVAL DE SELECT THE EVENT AS WELL AS ALL OTHER ARRIVALS TO DESELECT AN EVENT PRESS THE SHIFT KEY WHILE CLICKING ON THE EVENT GENERALLY IF OTHER OBJECTS ARE SELECTED WHILE YOU ARE ADDING REMARKS THE REMARK IS ATTACHED TO EACH OF THESE OBJECTS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 77 TEXT EDITING BOX FOR NON STANDARD REMARKS Edit gt Remarks gt Show Remarks on Selected The Show Remarks on Selected menu option displays the added remarks An example remarks window is shown in Figure 78 To show remarks on selected events 1 Select an event 2 Choose Edit gt Remarks gt Show Remarks on Selected A list of all associated arrivals and the origin identifier is displayed with any remarks appearing directly under the relevant object s If only on
65. and Configuration Procedures C Shell Environment Each time an analyst logs in or starts a new terminal emulator window such as xterm the interactive shell references a file in the analyst s home directory named cshrc C SHell Run Configuration file the leading dot makes the file invisible in normal listings Among other things cshrc defines a number of environment variables which both the shell and the applications it executes reference For example the PATH variable holds a list of directories where the shell looks to find the applications the analyst asks it to run The cshrc installed by mkCMsuser ref erences the file 5 5 CONFIG system specs env global env to set a num ber of environment variables critical for use of the Interactive Analysis software A partial list of these environment variables is shown in Table 31 A number of other environment variables are defined by global env either for internal use by the applications or for other non interactive uses TABLE 31 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES USED BY INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE Variable Name Description HOME Pathname of analyst s home directory CMS RELEASE Current IDC software version CMS HOME Pathname of base of IDC file tree CMS CONFIG Pathname of base of IDC configuration data tree CMS SCRIPTS Pathname to executable shell scripts ORACLE HOME Pathname of ORACLE software product ORACLE SID Current ORAC
66. and Delete Origin ARS automatically disassociates the phases and deletes the origin from the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS screen ARS does not prompt you to confirm the deletion Edit gt AlphaList AlphaList menu option displays event arrival and station data in a tabular format You may need to access AlphaList often during analysis For a complete description of AlphaList window see AlphaList on page 180 AlphaList option provides two submenu options for accessing AlphaList as shown in Figure 74 Remarks ShowwithAssoclated Ctrl b FIGURE 74 ALPHALIST DISPLAY OPTIONS Edit AlphaList Show with Selected The Show with Selected menu option displays AlphaList with all selected events arrivals and stations By selecting or unselecting objects in the main ARS window you control what is displayed in AlphaList To display AlphaList with selected events arrivals and stations 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more arrivals to be displayed with AlphaList 3 Select a station if desired 4 If no arrivals or stations are desired deselect all arrivals and stations by clicking on an empty space in the waveform display 5 Choose Edit AlphaList Show with Selected AlphaList window with the selected event and any selected arrivals or stations is displayed in front of the ARS waveform display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC
67. and installs these files in the analyst s dt tree To perform the installation 1 Login as the analyst 2 If mkCMsSuser is run for a new analyst set the following environment variables setenv CMS CONFIG cmss config setenv CMS MODE analysis setenv PATH cmss scripts bin PATH rehash 3 Running mkCMsuser without arguments will print out an explanation of its argument list Typically you should use the following command line mkCMSuser mode analysis Xclobber DTclobber lt level gt saveto oldconfig dt where mode specifies an analyst setup Xclobber specifies installing the general login environment DTclobber specifies installing the CDE envi ronment and saveto provides a directory name for saving the current CDE environment s dt tree The DTclobber level specifies the level of files to replace If no level is specified then the script replaces the entire dt directory structure If level is set to fponly that is DTclob ber fponly then only files related to the front panel display are removed Generally leaving level unspecified for a complete re installa tion is recommended 4 Immediately after running the script completely exit CDE to the initial login window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration V Procedures 5 After logout wait 30 seconds for the system hard disk files to update from
68. applications The CDE configuration for an individual analyst resides in their home directory in a hidden dt subdirectory The dt subdirectory is the root of a directory tree whose contents are described in CDE Configuration Notes on page 345 When an analyst logs into Solaris 7 for the first time a new dt directory tree is created This default configuration is fairly empty because most of the configuration comes from system level defaults To customize the CDE environment the mkCMSuser script adds icon and action files to the dt tree The analyst may also customize their CDE environments interactively by using the utilities and instructions accessi ble through the CDE toolbar Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures Analyst Environment Installation To avoid having to interactively customize each analyst s CDE configuration two sets of customization files are provided in the config tree These are located in the CMS CONFIG system specs env directories analysis dt pro cess dt mkCMsSuser script is used to install an individual analyst s CDE con figuration along with the general login shell environment configuration including the cshrc file mentioned above Running the mkCMSuser script copies files from the analysis dt directory tree customizes some path information
69. at the top This result is illustrated in Figure 201 The arrow pointing up means stations are sorted from lowest delta closest station at the top to highest delta furthest sta tion at the bottom Pointing down means stations are sorted from highest to low est Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v Chapter 2 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures WaveExpert Assess Origin 20892079 Fe Site Probability fon ime ae 8 6 11 22 68 13 78 14 89 166 56 284 36 31 93 22 06 46 09 279 89 21 67 299 24 7317 34 44 95 17 02 25 56 315 57 61 66 12 98 68 73 62 11 31 43 199 36 33 7 316 94 338 22 40 29 326 1 144 78 285 34 8313 FIGURE 200 WAVEEXPERT ASSESS WEASSESS TOOL LIST OF STATIONS TABLE 16 WEASSESS COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS Header Description Type Type of station network affiliation for example the CUR_AUX network Station Name Station name Probability Probability of detection based on a combination of station background noise attenuation curves and distance Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 16 WEAssESS COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS CONTINUED Header De
70. by XfkDisplay developers Configuration of XfkDisplay is primarily through the parameters set in its par file and the configuration data files that are referenced XfkDisplay provides an exten sive set of configuration and tuning parameters These are described in the XfkDis play man page XfkDisplay 1 The dman application specifies the par file CMS CONFIG app config interactive XfkDisplay XfkDisplay par when it starts XfkDisplay This file in turn references the following par files CMS CONFIG app config interactive XfkDisplay XfkDisplay par CMS CONFIG system specs process par CMS CONFIG system specs shared par CMS CONFIG system specs interactive par CMS CONFIG app config interactive XfkDisplay arrays par CMS CONFIG app config interactive XfkDisplay recipes par CMS CONFIG earth specs TT vmsf ims defs XfkDisplay does not write a log file but writes error messages to a shell window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Map Installation and Configuration Procedures The Map application uses an architecture similar to ARS and provides for customi zation using X resources and Scheme The default Map menu assignments are defined in cMs HOME X1ll app defaults Map with IDC customization defined in CMS CONFIG system specs app resources Map The Map Scheme configuration is defined by the following files CMS HOME scheme intrinsic scm
71. coda to main phases Although coda arrivals are often asso ciated to an event by the Automatic Processing software you may want to disas sociate them to remove clutter from the display and AlphaList Figure 29 shows an example where only coda phases are selected To disassociate a coda phase 1 Select an event Be certain that no other arrivals are selected prior to selecting Co Ph or they will also be disassociated from the event 2 Select Co Ph from the ARS toolbar All associated coda phases are added to the selection list and then all selected arrivals are disassociated Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV FIGURE 29 SELECT CODA PHASES Uftr Unfilter Channel s The Uftr toolbar button unfilters one or more channels in the waveform display Unfiltering redisplays the waveform in its raw waveform state without any filter applied to it Figure 30 shows the Uftr button applied to three selected channels Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 30 UNFILTER To unfilter a channel s 1 Select a channel by clicking directly in the channel display to the left of the waveform To select multiple channels press the shift key while selecting channels
72. depth FIGURE 193 ANOMALOUS EVENT QUALIFIER AEQ Figure 194 shows the summary output line of AEQ A 0 00 value means that the event is not anomalous A 1 00 value means that the event is extremely anomalous for the event location A high value might mean that the area is tectonically inac tive and therefore events should seldom occur there Or it may mean that the computed depth is extremely unusual or from a plate tectonic standpoint improbable for that area If you see a high value in the summary line and are con fident of your analysis consult with a lead analyst In general you may wish to dis cuss results that are greater than 0 30 or if results are not flagged solely on the basis of a high magnitude results greater than 0 20 FIGURE 194 AEQ ANOMALOUS OUTPUT The assessments of individual attributes of the event are located beneath the over all summary line Figure 195 presents the high magnitude attribute Only exces sively high magnitudes are flagged here low magnitudes are not flagged A 0 00 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures means that nothing unusual was found concerning the magnitude of the event As the number becomes larger the magnitude is assessed as being more and more unusual for the area with 1 00 being very unusual 0 00 High magnitude FIGURE 195 AEQ MAGNITUDE OUTPUT
73. detect a signal from the selected event are displayed sorted by distance from the event Waveforms are filtered and aligned on the arrival time of theoretical P phase Stations that are not likely to detect a signal are removed from the ARS display Fusion gt Select Station by Distance After using Show Best Channels or other options that remove channels from the ARS display you may wish to redisplay channels The Select Station by Distance menu option displays all stations not currently displayed along with their distance from the event in degrees and allows you to redisplay them To add stations to the ARS display 1 Select an origin then choose Fusion gt Select Station by Distance A list of stations not currently displayed appears as shown in Figure 138 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Select one or more stations then click Done All channels that are normally displayed for the selected stations are dis played The stations are sorted by distance from the selected event 102 05 105 45 108 03 111 67 12408 12527 FIGURE 138 LIST OF STATIONS TO REDISPLAY Fusion Expand Channel To look at more detail in a waveform you may choose to view a single waveform The Expand Channel menu option removes all channels from the ARS display except for the sole se
74. discarded the event the date that the event was discarded and the reason s it was discarded File gt Exit The Exit menu option terminates the ARS session To exit the session 1 Choose File gt Exit ARS may give one of two warnings If no modifications have been made or all modifications have been saved ARS confirms the action to exit with the message Exit ARS as shown in Figure 55 2 Click Confirm to exit the session or Cancel to return to the current ses sion If modifications to arrivals or events have been made and not saved ARS provides a confirmation window with a list of all the modifications zi QuestionDialog popup FIGURE 55 ARS PROMPT WHEN EXITING SESSION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Edit Menu The Edit menu contains options that edit events and arrivals as shown in Figure 56 These menu functions may be applied to data belonging to any of the three time series technologies Technology specific functions are accessed through the Seismic Hydro or Infra menus All Origins Select P All Channels Rename Associated Arrivals Retime Associate Ly Rename sole Selected to Disassociate Rename All Selected to Add Arrival Delete Arrival Retime Arrival Undefine time az amp slow L
75. environment when they log into their workstations A session file is saved in the dt sessions directory A default session is provided in the analyst dt sessions config directory in the config tree which provides several terminal emulator windows at CDE startup Saving a session replaces this file with one that specifies all applications running at the time the session is saved Therefore a ses sion should be saved with only those running applications that should be automat ically started at each CDE login The home session is saved using the Style Manager Startup window options Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures The dt sessions directory also contains a home subdirectory which contains three files dt resources dt session and dt settings Reasonable defaults for these are installed by mkCMSuser from the analyst dt directory the con fig tree The dt resources file specifies a number of X resources for the CDE window including its color layout The default color layout is Desert dp and its specification file is installed in the dt palettes directory The dt session file specifies a default session and the dt settings file specifies some startup and shut down options These options should override the Style Manager Window and Startup defaults noted above but this should be verified
76. event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V File Reject Origin ARS provides several submenu options for handling rejected or discarded events Figure 53 Discarded events are events that you have determined are not valid either because of false association or because the event criteria for saving have not been met Discarded events are put in the discard table and do not move to the REB FIGURE 53 REJECT ORIGIN SUBMENU File Reject Origin Reject The Reject Origin Reject menu option is the same function as Rej on the ARS toolbar and rejects an event by adding it to the discard table To reject an event 1 Select and analyze an event 2 After determining that the event is not valid choose File Reject Origin Reject to discard the event ARS displays a list of selectable reasons for why the event should be rejected see Figure 46 on page 64 3 Select one or more reasons then click Done The event ID analyst ID and rejection reasons are added to the discard table The event label turns brown to indicate that it has been discarded and will not become part of the published bulletin Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures File Reject Origin Un Reject The U
77. files 9 temporary database tables 13 IPC 5 L LEB account access 329 loading data 20 21 Locator Dialog Box 187 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 constraint controls area 190 functions toolbar 191 arrival popup window 191 Controls 193 solutions area 188 solutions history area 190 log files configuration 354 purging 329 M magnitude computing 59 Magnitude Dialogue Box 194 functions toolbar Arrivals 197 Controls 200 man pages iii Map 3 7 225 configuration 359 Scheme interface 328 starting up 140 menu use 26 message area 36 mkCMsSuser 339 357 mon dd 324 mouse actions 26 msconflict 326 O objects deselecting all 35 Options menu 129 Arrival Bars 135 Arrival Bars Off 136 Arrival Bars On 135 Filter Parameters 136 Filter Parameters Off 137 Filter Parameters On 136 v Index Phase Labels 134 Phase Labels Off 134 Phase Labels On 134 Scale Types 137 Scale Types Off 138 Scale Types On 138 Waveforms 130 Waveforms Off 131 Waveforms On 131 Waveforms Resize Auto 132 Waveforms Resize Mouse 131 Waveforms Resize Pick 133 Options menu Map 241 origin adding 91 creating new 170 deleting 92 deleting those with associated arrivals 94 deleting those with no associated arrivals 93 reasons for rejecting 74 rejecting 64 73 remove created 171 selecting all 77 unfreezing 71 unrejecting 74 P performance characteristics 7 period measuring 34 phas
78. in Figure 231 selects the style of grid that is superimposed on the current graphs FIGURE 231 THREE GRID STYLES AVAILABLE FOR DISPLAY IN POLARIPLOT View Grid Draw Grid The Draw Grid option draws a reference grid on the current graph The grid is composed of three vertical lines for reference This is the default grid in PolariPlot View Grid Draw Sub Grid The Draw Sub Grid option draws a more dense grid than the default grid View Grid Hide Grids The Hide Grids option removes all displayed grids from the current graphs SPECTRAPLOT PROCEDURES SpectraPlot is a tool that calculates and displays a waveform segment s spectrum The spectrum is defined as the power density in dB expressed over the frequency range of the sampled waveform This tool is often used to identify the peak or dominant frequency of a signal or for comparing an arrival s signal to background noise by using a waveform segment just ahead of the signal s onset or to find regions of high snr to optimize filtering for viewing or FK analysis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures SpectraPlot Window Layout and Organization The SpectraPlot display is shown in Figure 232 Legend 3 1998 05 30 000405 2 Pts 114 FIGURE 232 SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY WITH LINEAR FREQUENCY SpectraPlot
79. locates the new event using the newly associated arrivals AlphaList seen in Figure 133 locator and magnitude dialogue boxes are updated with the new information The event information in the event scrolling list is also updated FiGURE 132 NEW ORIGIN CREATED BY CREATE ORIGIN amp LOCATE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV AlphaList Hide Undisplay All Undisplay Resize Help Default Map AEG FK Time n Az Slo n Locate FIGURE 133 NEW EVENT IN ALPHALIST Scan gt Un Create Origin Locate After the analysis process leading up to Create Origin amp Locate you may want to return to the baseline scanning setup The Un Create Origin Locate menu option undoes the result of Create Origin amp Locate and related analysis by restoring the time window unaligning channels deselecting all origins restoring waveform height to 45 pixels and displaying all detection fk beams To un do the result of the Create Origin amp Locate option 1 Choose Scan gt Un Create Origin Locate The time window is restored to the display state before Create Origin amp Locate was used The waveforms become unaligned for example aligned on absolute time all origins become unselected the waveform display height is returned to 45 pixels and all detection beams fkb beams are displayed Interactive
80. map high seismicity areas and latitude longitude grids To remove overlays reselect 1 Choose View gt Overlays 2 Unselect those overlays that are no longer needed FIGURE 189 DISPLAY OVERLAYS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual D May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Pointer Coords The Pointer Coords option displays a dialogue box that provides continuous lati tude and longitude data based on the mouse s position on the Map Figure 190 If the right mouse button is used to select a point the dialogue box displays addi tional information Further mouse movement now causes the display of distance azimuth and back azimuth between the selected point and the current mouse cur sor position See the Options menu discussed next for further information on selected points 58 235 30 805 1 Dismiss FIGURE 190 MAP MOUSE POINTER COORDINATES To view pointer coordinates 1 Choose View gt Pointer Coords A dialogue box which continuously updates the mouse cursor position in units of latitude and longitude is displayed Options Menu The Options menu shown in Figure 191 provides options related to using selected points Click the right mouse button to mark a point on the displayed map in red A dynamic line connects the current mouse position to the selected point Right click again to mark a new point and move the o
81. motion as a function of time Horizontal Vertical Ratio Horizontal to vertical power Radial Transverse Ratio Ratio of the radial to transverse component amplitudes Radial Component Amplitude of the signal in the direction of the current event azimuth Transverse Component Amplitude of the signal in the horizontal direction perpen dicular to the current event azimuth Normal Component Amplitude of the signal in the direction normal to the cur rent event incidence angle 1 Algorithms are provided in IDC5 2 1 See Tools gt PolariPlot on page 141 for instructions on launching PolariPlot PolariPlot Window Layout and Organization Figure 217 shows the PolariPlot window with three of the selectable traces described in the previous section Menu items appear at the top of the window parameter values appear above the graphs and the graphs appear below Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Instructions Technical Chapter 2 W Operational Procedures 5 n File Edit View g 695 12 m j O Station ISTKA 031 82 2500 Parameter Value Overlap FIGURE 217 POLARIPLOT WINDOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technic
82. period are removed from the ARS display View Copy Channels The Copy Channels menu option make copies of waveforms to display The new channel can be selected filtered or scaled independently of the original which is especially useful for comparing waveforms using different filter bands To copy channels 1 Select a single channel 2 Choose View Copy Channels The channels are copied and displayed directly underneath the selected channel View Sort Channels The Sort submenu has several options for ordering the display of channels as shown in Figure 92 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 92 SORT SUBMENU UNDER VIEW View Sort Channels Sort Alphabetically For certain types of analysis it may be easiest to view the channels sorted alphabet ically Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To sort alphabetically 1 Choose View gt Sort Channels gt Sort Alphabetically You need not select an event or channel ARS redisplays the channels in alphabetical order as shown in Figure 93 FIGURE 93 CHANNELS SORTED ALPHABETICALLY View gt Sort Channels gt Sort by Distance The Sort by Distance menu option sorts chann
83. preferred azimuth slowness values from the FK plot window to the main XfkDisplay window replacing the original preferred values selected by XfkDisplay From there the values can be sent to ARS To apply new values 1 Select an azimuth slowness point by clicking within the FK plot The values for this point are displayed in the right column of the FK plot window 2 To transfer the values to the main XfkDisplay click Apply The arrival s attributes are updated in the main XfkDisplay window The last two buttons restore the correct aspect ratio of the FK plot after you manu ally resize the window The FK plot will likely become skewed when resizing The Square Width button resizes the width to fit the height and the Square Height button resizes the height to fit the width To resize the width of the FK plot window to fit the height 1 Resize the FK window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures 2 If the phase velocity rings become skewed click Square Width The window width adjusts to a correct aspect ratio for the current height The phase velocity rings become circles again Main Menu Functions The main menus and toolbar options allow you to modify to XfkDisplay results and to allow XfkDisplay to interact with ARS see Figure 162 XtkDisplay File Edit View SE TSS ZTE GSES SY SS TII
84. s km and s deg s right column Slowness at signal peak s km and s deg v left column Velocity at cursor position km s v right column Velocity at signal peak km s az left column Azimuth at cursor position deg az right column Azimuth at signal peak deg The left column in the FK plot window updates in response to mouse movement in the FK plot area To update in this manner 1 Move the cursor within the FK plot The values in the left column change to reflect the position of the cursor in the azimuth slowness FK plot area If you suspect that XfkDisplay has misidentified the correct peak for example due to spatial aliasing high noise or a mixed event select another peak Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Select an azimuth slowness point by clicking within the FK plot The values for this point are transferred to the right column of the numerical display on the plot replacing the XfkDisplay preferred result The bottom part of the FK plot window provides buttons for functions relevant to the FK plot Figure 161 Done Apply Square Width Square Height FIGURE 161 FUNCTION BUTTONS IN PLOT WINDOW The Done button removes the FK plot window from the display The tabular list entry for the arrival remains in the main XfkDisplay window The Apply button transfers the
85. the IDC from the receipt of communications to the final automated processed data before ana lyst review 2 Sequence of IDC pro cesses controlled by the DACS that either produce a specific product such as a Standard Event Llst or perform a general task such as station processing PKP phase Seismic compressional wave that travels from the event to the station as a com pressional wave through the crust man tle and outer core polarity Direction of first motion on a seismo gram either up compression or down dilatation or relaxation Glossary polarity reversal Occurrence of depth phase waveforms that are mirror images of the initial P type phases polarization Form of three component analysis used to derive azimuth and slowness informa tion from non array stations polarization analysis Analysis to determine the propagation vector that describes particle motion Used at seismic 3 C stations pop up Small window that contains selectable objects such as filter settings primary phase First arriving phase recorded at a 5 station primary seismic IMS seismic station s or data that is are part of the detection network primary stations Stations that make up the primary seis mic network of the IMS Primary stations send data continuously to the IDC probability of detection Probability estimate that an arrival from a given event will be detected at a sta tion given the locat
86. the cursor as it moves around the annulus nor mally fixed unchanging s km FStat F statistic of the section of the annulus to which the cursor is pointed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o Chapter 2 Operational Procedures IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions TABLE 18 HYDRO PARAMS FEATURE CONTINUED Box Parameter Description Hydro Auto Az Azimuth calculated by the automatic processing deg Params Auto Az2 Second azimuth calculated by the automatic processing for a two station case deg 21 Analyst selected azimuth based on yellow bar the annulus deg Az2 For two station case the derived second possible azimuth based on the first selected azimuth deg FStat F statistic of analyst selected azimuth Velocity Velocity inverse of slowness normally fixed at 1 485 km s Slowness s km Slowness corresponding to the length of analyst selected yellow azimuth bar normally fixed dependent on Fix button Fix Slowness When selected slowness remains fixed The length of the yel low azimuth bar does not change when you reposition it When deselected slowness is recalculated each time you select a new azimuth depending on the length of the yellow azimuth bar Seaz Station to event azimuth based on a selected event in ARS deg reset Resets the azimuth and slow
87. the selected phase s theoretical arrival time The theoreticals displayed are based on the event s current location and origin time and on standard travel time curves for the phase To display the theoretical arrival time 1 Select an event 2 Select channel s on which theoretical phases should be displayed 3 Select Th from the ARS toolbar A list of phases is displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V 4 Select one phase for which theoreticals should be displayed The arrival s theoretical arrival time is displayed on the selected chan nel s If waveforms are aligned on the theoretical phase theoreticals appear vertically aligned in the middle of the waveform display as shown in Figure 39 5 I Sz z Iz i n FIGURE 39 DISPLAYING THEORETICAL ARRIVAL TIMES Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Th O Theoretical Times Off The Th O toolbar button removes theoretical arrival times to avoid clutter After selecting a new event or updating an event location displayed theoreticals are no longer current and should be removed To remove theoretical arrival times 1 Select Th O from the ARS toolb
88. time scale The absolute time difference between the two markers labeled 112 171 is displayed at the bottom of the time bar Use mouse drag actions to move the markers horizontally on the time scale Use t7 when adjusting an existing arrival s time or to mark a time to add a new arrival see Edit Retime on page 82 and Edit Add Arrival on page 86 Use t1 and t2 to mark a subset of the current display for zooming in or magnifying the waveform view Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To zoom 1 Click on the t bar with the left mouse button Press the mouse button while dragging it along the bottom of the screen in a horizontal motion to the desired time A vertical line appears This line runs up through the entire ARS wave form display and moves with the dragging motion This line helps you track where the t1 bar is relative to the data 2 When you are satisfied with the position of the t1 bar release the mouse button 3 Perform the same actions with the t2 bar 4 Select the zoom function use control z or choose Edit Zoom The waveform display zooms to the time window defined by t1 and t2 To determine the time difference between two arrivals 1 Click the t7 bar with the left mouse button Press the mouse button while dragging horizontally along the bottom of the scr
89. waveform trace Turning off the waveform trace replaces it with a horizontal line where data exist You can use this option to make scrolling faster Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual eo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms On The Waveforms On option draws waveforms on all channels To display waveforms 1 Choose Options Waveforms Waveforms On Waveforms for all channels are displayed Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms Off The Waveforms Off option turns off drawing actual waveforms and replaces them with a horizontal line on each channel Figure 102 Horizontal lines are drawn only where data are available to indicate the presence or absence of data in the channel To turn off waveforms 1 Choose Options Waveforms Waveforms Off The waveforms disappear and are replaced by horizontal lines on each channel P 10 2 5 3BP causa FIGURE 102 WAVEFORM TRACE TURNED OFF Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms Resize Mouse As you horizontally scroll the waveform display ARS automatically rescales the waveforms to fit inside the designated space for each channel However occasion ally this is not desirable A large noise spike may exist on a channel when ARS scales the channel to accommodate this spike normal amplitude variation may be difficult to distinguish You may also wish to keep the wa
90. window called WERequest appears This window displays error messages related to the request You need not monitor this window Cancel The Cancel exits the WEAssess program without requesting data from any highlighted stations Viewing Request Status and IADR The ADR status tool provides an interface where the amount of data that has been returned for auxiliary data requests can be monitored When requested data are received they can be transferred to ARS for display via the ADR status tool The status tool is launched from ARS To view the status of ongoing requests 1 In ARS choose Tools Request Auxiliary Data Show Request Status see Tools Request Auxiliary Data Show Request Status on page 144 The ADR status tool consisting of a GUI and an iconified client window launches The ADR status tool displays a list of all auxiliary data requests made for the time period allocated in ARS as shown in Figure 206 This includes requests made by the automatic processing system for the SEL1 and SEL2 pipeline as well as interac tive requests at the top of the ADR status tool display A folder symbol with the requestor s name is shown The name shown is the requestor s login user name This folder contains all requests made by that requestor Each requestor has their own folder se11 and 12 are listed as separate requestors and show which aux iliary stations data have already been requested for the allocated time
91. 0 IPC 353 log files 354 Map 359 PolariPlot 362 queue 353 SpectraPlot 362 XfkDisplay 358 conventions typographical vi user instructions vi COTS software 339 crash recovering 69 cshrc 340 D database 351 dataday monitoring 324 data flow symbols v default phase setting 47 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions depth phase selecting all associated 79 selecting associated 151 deselecting all objects 35 DFX 4 configuration 362 Scheme interface 328 starting up 146 display organization 23 dman 5 clearing message queue 309 configuration 364 initializing 304 message queue 307 Options menu 304 procedures 302 starting applications manually 305 status window 303 stopping analysis 310 stopping applications 306 use for monitoring 332 E Edit menu 76 Add Arrival 86 Add Origin 91 AlphaList 95 Show with Associated 96 Show with Selected 95 Associate 85 Delete Arrivals 87 Delete Origin 92 Delete Unassociated Origins 93 Disassociate and Delete Origin 94 Disassociate 86 Locate 89 Locate Event 89 Reset to Default 90 Remarks 96 Add Arbitrary Remarks on Selected 97 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Index Add Remarks by Category 99 Delete Object Remarks 101 Edit Object Remarks 101 Show Remarks on Selected 98 Rename 79 Rename All Selected to 81 Rename sole Se
92. 0 COLOR PARAMETERS Box Parameter Explanation Color Bar Minimum Minimum f statistic values currently displayed in Parameters the HART annulus modifiable Maximum Maximum f statistic values currently displayed in the HART annulus modifiable Outliers Transparent outlier values from the annulus display these values turn transparent in the annulus ring Apply Applies the values set in the color plot Cancel Hides the parameter window Making Azimuth Adjustments To produce the waveform alignment change shown in Figure 215 the azimuth has been modified by clicking directly within the annulus The annulus represents the slowness plane and clicking directly on it records a selected azimuth from the x y axis origin slowness or distance from the axis origin is often fixed The yellow azi muth bar points to the selected azimuth in a blue area of low signal correlation The waveforms have shifted out of alignment relative to each other as compared to the alignment shown in Figure 212 The general goal in adjusting azimuth is to enhance alignment of the waveforms by selecting azimuths pointing to red areas of high signal correlation in the annulus The selected azimuth is recorded in the Hydro Az Params box and can be transferred to ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures wp e FStat
93. 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Scan Menu Scanning is the interactive analysis procedure used for scrolling through the wave form data to search for events missed by the Automatic Processing software The Scan menu options shown in Figure 127 help automate parts of this process Historically scanning has been an entirely manual process The Scan menu contains functions that either set up the ARS display for scanning or perform two or more functions at a time to speed up the scanning process Scan Scan by Region Select Unassoc Arrivals Create Origin and Locate Un Create Origin Locate Next Unassoc Arrival Previous Unassoc Arrival Add Next amp Prev Buttons FiGURE 127 SCANNING MENU Several of the Scan and Fusion menu options combine two or more functions into a single action If you have difficulty remembering what functions the options per form use the option s quick tip which provides a brief summary see Quick tips on page 37 for usage and Figure 21 for an example Scan Scan By Region You typically review one geographic region of the earth at a time while scanning for missed events The Scan By Region menu option allows you to bring up data from stations in or near the region you want to scan Figure 128 isplay list of regions to be scanned FiGURE 128 SCAN BY REGION QUICK TIP Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001
94. 1 In dt types fp dynamic an action p file is created This file defines a control for the front panel A control in this case is an icon but ton The file defines a name for the control for example ARS its loca tion its icon file base name and the name of a dummy file these names are generally the same for example ARS and the p file would be named ARS1 fp See the dtfpfile 4 man page for complete file format instructions The ARS7 fp file looks like CONTROL ARS TYPE file CONTAINER TYPE SUBPANEL CONTAINER NAME PersAppsSubpanel POSITION HINTS last ICON ARS FILE NAME HOME dt menu_items ARS The FILE_NAME entry specifies the full path to the dummy file mkCM Suser adds the directory menu_items to the analyst s dt tree and installs all dummy files there HOME is replaced with the analyst s home direc tory path when installed by mkCMsSuser 2 Aset of icon files is added to the dt icons directory All files will have the same base name for example ARS The two that are actually used ARS m pm and ARS 1 pm for the medium and large sizes The medium size is used in the pull up menus and the large size is used if the button is promoted to the front panel Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures 3 A dummy file is placed by default in the analyst s home di
95. 14 TABLE 15 TABLE 16 TABLE 17 TABLE 18 TABLE 19 TABLE 20 TABLE 21 TABLE 22 DATA FLOW SYMBOLS TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS CONVENTIONS FOR USER INSTRUCTIONS EVENT COLORS ARS TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS ARS Hor KEY FUNCTIONS EVENT FIELDS OF ALPHALIST ARRIVAL AREA MIDDLE AREA OF ALPHALIST CHANNEL AREA OF ALPHALIST TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS IN ALPHALIST FIELDS IN SOLUTIONS AREA OF LOCATOR BOX FUNCTION BUTTONS IN LOCATOR DIALOGUE BOX LOCATION ARRIVAL INFORMATION FIELDS CURRENT MAGNITUDE PART IN MAGNITUDE MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX FUNCTIONS MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS BOX FIELDS XFKDISPLAY FIELDS FK PLOT TABULAR OUTPUT WEAssESS COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS IADR COLUMNS HYDRO PARAMS FEATURE PLOT PARAMETERS COLOR PARAMETERS TRACES AVAILABLE IN POLARIPLOT POLARIPLOT ACTIVE SERIES FIELDS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 vi vi 31 41 179 182 184 185 186 189 191 192 196 197 198 202 208 250 258 265 270 271 274 277 IDC DOCUMENTATION TABLE 23 FiLE MENU FUNCTIONS 293 TABLE 24 EDIT MENU FUNCTIONS 295 TABLE 25 View MENU FUNCTIONS 297 TABLE 26 DMAN COLOR SCHEME 304 TABLE 27 OPTIONS MENU 305 TABLE 28 FEATURES IN TOP SECTION OF ANALYST LOG 315 TABLE 29 TIME ALLOCATION SECTION OF ANALYST LOG 316 TABLE 30 COTS AND PD SOFTWARE FOR INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE 339 TABLE 31 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES USED BY INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE 340 TABLE 32 EXAMPLE INTERACTIVE V
96. 2 interactive Auxiiary Data Request _ Request Status Delta C IADR 1t gault 6496 gt Evid 292890 2 43 19 292913 8096 1008 22 0 ATTU be 100 ATTU bn 100 ATTU bz 100 1CTA EN 55 m FITZ 00 54 4 I INK 1008 57 9 e Pro 1008 543 Q Evid 293557 22 70 EN 576 EN pJ DLBC 0 sss 100 146 1 ocu 624 I7 JKA 88 751 NU 009 736 JNU be 10096 JNU bn 10096 JNU bz 10096 CJ NEW BA s7 9 p GG 792 EN 6 4 m 9196 sel2 10096 FIGURE 207 IADR FOLDER LEVELS IN IADR STATUS WINDOW To view individual ADR status levels 1 Click the left mouse button once on a folder symbol in the ADR status tool The folder expands or unexpands depending on its current status 2 Click Close at the bottom of the screen The ADR status window is dismissed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o Chapter 2 Operational Procedures IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Status Window Pop up Menu In the ADR status tool two pop up menu options are available for each channel level folder as shown in Figure 208 The Show Selected option transfers data for the highlighted station into ARS for display The Map Selected option displays the highlighted station on the Map display gt J
97. 20 million with historical events plotted in small dots The red dots in this figure indicate shallow seismicity A black color has been used to plot an event and its error ellipse see Tools Map on page 140 for selecting the colors of objects sent from ARS In Figure 174 Map is automatically centered on the location of the event that was sent from ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures File Edit View Options Analyst Tools FiGURE 174 DEFAULT MAP DISPLAY The following sections describe interactive features of Map File Menu The File menu provides two options New Database and the Exit option as shown in Figure 175 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures File New Database Exit FiGURE 175 FiLE MENU IN MAP File New Database The New Database option allows you to manually connect to a different database On startup Map connects to the database specified in the environment variable Map DATABASE The startup database provides map specific initialization data To make some of the database queries provided under the Edit menu you must connect to a different database because the database referenced in Map DATABASE does not con
98. 271 272 274 275 279 279 282 287 291 292 293 294 IDC DOCUMENTATION View Menu 296 Main Window Parameters and Controls 299 m DMAN PROCEDURES 302 Initializing dman 304 Options Menu 304 Starting Applications Manually 305 Stopping Applications in dman 306 Message Queue in dman 307 Stopping Analysis through dman 310 m ANALYST LOG PROCEDURES 312 Allocation Window 313 Function Buttons 317 QC 325 Summary of Procedures for Completing a Bulletin 326 m ADVANCED PROCEDURES 327 Changing Look and Feel 327 Adding Functionality 328 m MAINTENANCE 329 m SECURITY 329 Chapter 3 Troubleshooting 331 m MONITORING 332 m INTERPRETING ERROR MESSAGES 332 Error Recovery 334 m REPORTING PROBLEMS 335 Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures 337 m PREPARATION 338 Obtaining Released Software 338 Hardware Mapping 338 m THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PACKAGES 339 wm UNIX SYSTEM AND COMMON DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT 339 C Shell Environment 340 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Common Desktop Environment Analyst Environment Installation CDE Configuration Notes EXECUTABLE FILES CONFIGURATION DATA FILES DATABASE TUXEDO FILES Queue Configuration Log Files Tuxedo Events and dman APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION ARS XfkDisplay Map AEQ IADR HART PolariPlot SpectraPlot Detection and Feature Extraction DFX dman analyst log INITIATING OPERATIONS VALIDATING IN
99. 4 Remove Selected Channels 114 Shift 123 Shift Left 2595 124 Shift Left 50 125 Shift Right 2596 124 Shift Right 5096 125 Sort Channels 115 Sort Alphabetically 116 Sort by Distance 117 Theoretical Phases 125 Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals 128 Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals 129 Remove Theoreticals 128 Theoreticals on All 127 Theoreticals on Selected 126 Unzoom 121 Compress Window by 2 123 Compress Window by 8 123 Unzoom All 122 Unzoom to Previous Window 122 Zoom 118 Expand Window by 2 120 Expand Window by 8 120 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Zoom on Arrival 120 Zoom on Origin 121 Zoom t1 t2 119 View menu Map Map Outlines Show Map Outlines 233 Show Selected Map 235 Unshow Map Outlines 234 View Maps Change Map 235 stack operations 236 View menu Map 231 Change Colors 238 Map Outlines 233 Overlays 239 Pointer Coords 241 View Maps 235 View Objects 231 View Selected Objects 232 Zoom 237 View menu PolariPlot Coordinates Display Coordinates 290 Sample Coordinates 290 Grid Draw Grid 291 Draw Sub Grid 291 Hide Grids 291 View menu PolariPlot 287 Compact Plots 290 Coordinates 290 Display 288 Enlarge Plot 290 Grid 291 Zoom 289 View menu SpectraPlot 296 View menu XfkDisplay 219 Display Fk 220 Update Display 220 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Index
100. A text window with rebqc output appears Typically you will want to return to your analysis session and make changes based on the findings of rebqc 3 When finished reviewing the rebqc output click OK The rebqc window disappears Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 322 May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V rebqc jdate 2000236 hour 0 duration 3 2000238 Aug 25 09 43 03 EDT Fri Number of events JDATE LEB SEL3 DISCARDED ADDED 2000236 11 4 0 General Event and Arrival Checks eek Events with weighted count less than 4 5 Events yet to be saved or discarded Check for stations not in IDC lt 8 defining Primary seismic and acoustic stations Check for defining associated phases at NONE Check for associated phases at NONE Check for defining azimuth or slowness at bad stations NONE Arrival attributes incorrectly made defining Phases at unused stations NAO NBO NB2 NC2 NC3 NC4 MBC Phases in wrong order at same station Phases not found in ARS phase list Duplicated Arrivals Large events with defining azimuth and slowness Undefined azimuth and slowness from small events Defining azimuth slowness without defining time Defining slowness with defining time Defining azimuth or slowness from unreliable stations NRIS PDY ZAL Defining arrival residuals in excess of allowed limits P type time OK bu
101. ALIDATION TEST 366 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions About this Document This chapter describes the organization and content of the document and includes the following topics Purpose Scope Audience Related Information a Using this Document Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions About this Document PURPOSE This document describes how to use the Interactive Analysis Subsystem of the International Data Centre IDC This software is part of the Time Series Analysis computer software component CSC of the Interactive Processing Computer Soft ware Configuration Item CSCI SCOPE The manual includes instructions for setting up the software using its features and basic troubleshooting This document does not describe the software s design or requirements Some of these topics are described in sources cited in Related Infor mation AUDIENCE This document is intended for first time or occasional users of the software How ever more experienced users may find certain sections useful as a reference The word you in this document refers to an analyst of seismic hydroacoustic infra sonic S H I data RELATED INFORMATION The following documents complement this document m Database Schema IDC5 1 1Rev2 Configuration of PIDC Databa
102. ARS If you do not save an event before exiting the ARS session any changes made to the event during that session are lost Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures _ 20868110 20868640 120868130 1 22 10 21 24 122 22 20 39 3 126 22 28 47 171156 FIGURE 50 SAVED EVENT ARS Menus The ARS menus are organized by function Related functions are grouped File Menu The File menu lists functions that read write or affect data saved in the database The ARS File menu is shown in Figure 51 Read Read Recovery Data Write Recovery Data Unfreeze Origins Unfreeze Arrivals Save Event Unfreeze Reject Reject Origin gt i UnReject Exit Show Reason FIGURE 51 FILE MENU File Read The Read menu option is usually the first option that you choose in an ARS session Read displays a dialogue box through which you can specify the date and time the duration the network and the database account of the data to be read Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To specify data to be read 1 With a new ARS session choose File Read ARS displays a dialogue box with the date and time interval of requested data the network and the da
103. Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Qo IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Scan Next Unassoc Arrival The Next Unassoc Arrival menu option selects and displays the closest unassoci ated arrival occurring later in time to the currently selected arrival which becomes unselected The display is scrolled as necessary to center the newly selected arrival You have two options with this function If a station is selected the Next Unassoc Arrival option selects only the next arrival on that station Without a selected sta tion Next Unassoc Arrival selects the next unassociated arrival from all stations Figures 134 and 135 demonstrate the results of using Next Unassoc Arrival The selection shifts from the N phase in Figure 134 to the P phase in Figure 135 To display the next unassociated arrival 1 Select an unassociated arrival 2 Choose Scan Next Unassoc Arrival The next unassociated arrival occurring later in time is selected The ARS waveform display scrolls forward to center the newly selected arrival The name and station of the selected arrival are displayed in the ARS message window FIGURE 134 SELECTION BEFORE NEXT UNASSOC ARRIVAL Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV FIGURE 135 SELECTION AFTER NEXT UNASSOC ARRIVAL Sc
104. Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions View gt Overlays Overlays Primary Seismic Auxiliary Seismic Hydroacoustic Infrasonic cities mines noress mines spot mines Lat Lon Grid High Seismicity Moderate Seismicity High Deep Seismicity Moderate Deep Seismicity PDE Mb 4 0 1980 1989 FIGURE 188 OVERLAYS AVAILABLE IN MAP To display overlays superimposed on the current Map display 1 Choose View gt Overlays Chapter 2 Operational Procedures Overlays are an important feature of Map They allow you to superimpose features on the current display to provide more information than provided by the default map Figure 188 shows the overlays that are available They include such features as a latitude longitude grid high or low seismicity displays and station locations A list of Overlays available in Map is displayed in a dialogue box 2 Select one or more overlays by clicking in the boxes beside the desired item As they are selected Map displays the overlays in front of the current map background When you have finished selecting overlays click Dismiss in the dialogue box Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Figure 189 provides an example of two overlays superimposed on a global
105. DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Edit AlphaList Show with Associated You often may use AlphaList to look at the information related to an event The Show with Associated menu option displays AlphaList and all arrivals associated to any selected events whether selected or not All other selected objects are also displayed 1 Select an event 2 Choose Edit AlphaList Show with Associated AlphaList window with all phases associated to the selected event is dis played in front of the ARS waveform display Edit Remarks You can add remarks to events or arrivals for annotation or clarification The Remarks submenu provides a number of options for using remarks as shown in Figure 75 FIGURE 75 REMARKS SUBMENU When remarks are added to an event the letter R appears beside the event label as shown in Figure 76 If the comment is deleted the R is removed Added remarks appear with the event in the REB Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WW 20868640 R 22 20 28 3 126 FIGURE 76 EVENT WITH REMARKS Edit gt Remarks gt Add Arbitrary Remarks on Selected If the list of standard remarks provided under the Add Remarks by Category menu option is insufficient you can choose the Add Arbitrary Remarks on Selected menu option to type
106. Distance Sort to Top Zoom t1 t2 Expand Window by 2 Expand Window by 8 Zoom on Arrival Zoom on Origin Unzoom to Previous Window Unzoom All Compress Window by 2 Compress Window by 8 Shift Left 25 gt Shift Right 25 Shift Left 50 Shift Right 50 Theoreticals on Selected Theoreticals on All Remove Theoreticals Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals FIGURE 81 ARS ViEW MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V View Align Channels The Align Channels submenu provides the alignment options shown in Figure 82 FIGURE 82 ALIGN SUBMENU UNDER VIEW MENU View gt Align Channels gt Align Theoretical You can align the waveforms on the theoretical arrival time of a selected phase The theoretical arrival time is based on the current event location To align waveforms on theoretical arrival time 1 Select an event 2 Choose View gt Align Channels gt Align Theoretical A phase selection list appears 3 Select the phase on which to align then click Done The waveforms realign on the theoretical arrival time of the selected phase The theoretical arrival time is positioned in the middle of the ARS screen Figure 83 shows waveforms aligned on theoretical P with the theoretical ar
107. ELECTED UNASSOCIATED ARRIVALS To select unassociated arrivals 1 Zoom into an appropriate time window containing the desired unassoci ated arrivals of interest 2 Choose Scan Select Unassoc Arrivals All unassociated arrivals in the time window are selected and become highlighted Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Scan Create Origin amp Locate The Create Origin amp Locate menu option performs a sequence of tasks It creates a new event places the new event on the event scroll bar associates and displays all selected arrivals and locates the new event using the newly associated arrivals Figure 131 shows the quick tip for this option Create tmp origin assoc selected arrivals locate FIGURE 131 QUICK TIP FOR CREATE ORIGIN amp LOCATE To create an origin and locate the new event 1 Select the arrivals to be associated to the new event 2 Choose Scan Create Origin amp Locate A new event is created with a unique evid event identification and orid origin identification and placed at the end of the event scrolling list in the ARS window as shown in Figure 132 If the selected arrivals are already associated to another event they are disassociated from the old event and associated to the new event Create Origin amp Locate also
108. ELK Show Selected C FRE Map Selected FIGURE 208 IADR POP UP OPTIONS To Map station locations 1 2 Select the stations using the left mouse button To display the pop up menu click once with the right mouse button any where in the highlighted area Choose Map Selected Map displays the highlighted stations To display received auxiliary data in ARS 1 2 Select the applicable stations using the left mouse button To display the pop up menus click once with the right mouse button anywhere in the highlighted area Select Show Selected The waveform data for the selected stations is transferred to ARS The received channels are displayed sorted by distance from the event and aligned on the default phase Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures HYDROACOUSTIC AZIMUTH REVIEW TOOL HART PROCEDURES HART is an interactive hydroacoustic tool designed to aid in determining the direc tion a hydroacoustic signal is arriving from HART works with data from hydroa coustic station groups and analyzes the passage of a signal through the group A hydroacoustic station group consists of several hydrophone stations within a local ized geographic region By convention their station names all start with the same prefix For example all the Ascension Island stations belong to one hydroacousti
109. ES Tuxedo is a COTS application framework for distributed application control used to manage the automatic pipeline processing of IDC data A lighter weight configura tion of this framework is used on each analyst workstation to facilitate communi cation between applications The distributed application control system DACS is documented in IDC6 5 2RevO 1 and contains a chapter dedicated to interactive processing A high level overview of Tuxedo and DACS is presented here to pro vide a context for interprocess communication IPC within the Interactive Analysis software The primary task of Tuxedo in the interactive environment on an analyst worksta tion is to maintain a set of message queues for the posting of messages between applications Currently queues are configured for thirteen applications Because each workstation can support three concurrent analysis sessions there are 39 queues one for each session application Queue Configuration Queues are configured by the script CMS SCRIPTS bin crInteractive which is both a configuration file defining the queues and an installation shell script that builds and installs the workstation s runtime configuration file During installa tion crinteractive translates the TUXDIR config scripts templates ubb analysis templ into each workstation s human readable var tuxedo rel analysis config ubb and binary var tuxedo rel analysis config tuxconfig configuration files To add or re
110. FIGURE 236 FIGURE 237 FIGURE 238 FIGURE 239 FIGURE 240 FIGURE 241 FIGURE 242 FIGURE 243 FIGURE 244 FIGURE 245 FIGURE 246 FIGURE 247 FIGURE 248 FIGURE 249 FIGURE 250 FIGURE 251 FIGURE 252 FIGURE 253 FIGURE 254 FIGURE 255 FIGURE 256 FIGURE 257 SPECTRAPLOT EDIT MENU SPECTRAPLOT ViEW MENU SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY WITH LOG FREQUENCY SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY OF UNSMOOTHED SPECTRA SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY OF SMOOTHED SPECTRA DMAN STATUS WINDOW DMAN STATUS WINDOW WITH AEQ APPLICATION LAUNCHED DMAN MESSAGE QUEUE FLUSHING XFKDISPLAY S MESSAGE QUEUE EXITING ANALYSIS SESSION ANALYST_LOG CONTROL WINDOW ALLOCATION WINDOW ALLOCATION WINDOW DATE AND TIME SECTION UNALLOCATED TIME BLOCK ALLOCATED ANALYZED AND SCANNED TIME BLOCK FUNCTIONS IN ANALYST_LOG GRAPHIC ARS BUTTON REBQC MESSAGE OUTPUT FROM ANALYST_LOG QC WiNbow TYPICAL STYLE MANAGER WINDOW SETTINGS TvPICAL STYLE MANAGER STARTUP SETTINGS INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS DATABASE ACCESS ANALYST VIEW OF ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 294 296 298 300 301 303 306 308 310 312 313 314 315 316 317 317 322 323 324 344 344 352 356 IDC DOCUMENTATION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual TABLES TABLE I TABLE Il TABLE III TABLE 1 TABLE 2 TABLE 3 TABLE 4 TABLE 5 TABLE 6 TABLE 7 TABLE 8 TABLE 9 TABLE 10 TABLE 11 TABLE 12 TABLE 13 TABLE
111. Figure 196 shows the low seismicity areas output This indicates how active the seismicity is in the calculated location region A 0 00 indicates that the event has occurred in an active seismic area producing many natural events and therefore is not unusual The maximum value 1 00 means that the event is located in an his torically very low seismic activity area However a 1 00 may not necessarily trigger a high value in the summary line if the low seismicity area is assessed as a reason able location for a natural event For example few events may occur along a par ticular tectonic plate boundary but if one does it is assessed as being reasonable Therefore the summary line will still indicate that the event is not anomalous overall 1 00 Low seismicity areas FIGURE 196 AEQ Low SEISMICITY AREAS OUTPUT The Deep attribute output is displayed below the low seismicity areas as shown in Figure 197 This output indicates that the event is deep An output of 0 00 Deep means that the event was calculated to have occurred at the surface while 1 00 Deep means that the event was deep FiGURE 197 AEQ DEEP OUTPUT Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The last line in the AEQ output displays the low seismicity at depth as shown in Figure 198 This value indicates that the calculated depth is anomalous for the region If the calcula
112. GURE 88 FILTER EDITING DIALOGUE BOX 109 FIGURE 89 FILTER TYPES 110 FIGURE 90 LIST OF CHANNELS 113 FIGURE 91 REMOVE CHANNELS SUBMENU 114 FIGURE 92 SORT SUBMENU UNDER VIEW 116 FIGURE 93 CHANNELS SORTED ALPHABETICALLY 117 FIGURE 94 CHANNELS SORTED BY DISTANCE TO EVENT 118 FIGURE 95 ZOOM SUBMENU UNDER ViEW MENU 119 FIGURE 96 UNZOOM OPTIONS UNDER ViEW MENU 121 FIGURE 97 SHIFT OPTIONS UNDER ViEW MENU 124 FIGURE 98 THEORETICAL PHASE DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER VIEW MENU 126 FIGURE 99 P PHASE THEORETICAL ARRIVAL DISPLAYED ON STATION TXAR 127 FIGURE100 ARS OPTIONS MENU 130 FIGURE 101 NORMAL ARS DISPLAY 130 FIGURE 102 WAVEFORM TRACE TURNED OFF 131 FIGURE 103 WAVEFORM HEIGHT SELECTION 133 FIGURE 104 PHASE LABEL TOGGLES UNDER OPTIONS MENU 134 FIGURE 105 PHASE LABELS TURNED OFF 135 FIGURE 106 ARRIVAL BAR DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER OPTIONS MENU 135 FIGURE 107 ARRIVAL BARS TURNED OFF 136 FIGURE 108 FILTER PARAMETERS TURNED OFF 137 FIGURE 109 SCALE TYPE DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER OPTIONS MENU 137 FIGURE 110 SCALE TYPE DISPLAY TURNED ON 138 FIGURE 111 TOOLS MENU 139 FIGURE 112 MAP SUBMENU 141 FIGURE 113 INTERACTIVE AUXILIARY DATA REQUEST OPTIONS UNDER TOOLS 143 FIGURE 114 SEISMIC MENU 145 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 115 FIGURE 116 FIGURE 117 FIGURE 118 FIGURE 119 FiGURE 120 FIGURE 121 FIGURE 122 FIGURE 123 FIGURE 124 FIGURE 125 FIGURE 126 FIGURE 127
113. IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v Chapter 4 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures libgp so 60 gt home tuxedo 6 5 lib libgp so 60 libgen so 1 gt usr lib libgen so 1 libsocket so 1 gt usr lib libsocket so 1 libnsl so 1 gt usr lib libnsl so 1 libelf so 1 gt usr lib libelf so 1 libm so 1 gt opt SUNWspro lib libm so 1 libdl so 1 gt usr lib libdl so 1 libsunmath so 1 gt opt SUNWspro lib libsunmath so 1 libc so 1 gt usr lib libc so 1 libSM so 6 gt usr openwin lib libSM so 6 libICE so 6 gt usr openwin lib libICE so 6 libmp so 2 gt usr lib libmp so 2 If an application fails to load because of a missing dynamic library you can use the Idd command to show where the loader expects to find it The applications may also look for X window resource files that define or custom ize their GUI The X defaults resource file location is specified by the XFILESEARCHPATH environment variable and for the Interactive Analysis soft ware it includes the path CMs HOME X11 app defaults The X customization resource file is specified by the XAPPLRESDIR environment variable and for the Interactive Analysis software it includes the path CMS CONFIG system specs app resources The X resource files located in these directories have the same name as the application At run time the X defaults resource is loaded first and the X customization resource file is loaded second
114. IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction SOFTWARE OVERVIEW Figure 1 shows the logical organization of the IDC software The Interactive Analy sis Subsystem is part of the Time series Analysis CSC which is one component of the Interactive Processing CSCI Figure 2 shows the processing flow of the IDC sys tem and the relationship of the Interactive Analysis Subsystem to other compo nents of the system The Interactive Analysis Subsystem is comprised of a number of applications that support interactive analysis of time series data The central application for interac tive analysis is the Analyst Review Station ARS which displays seismic hydroa coustic and infrasonic S H I waveform data and derived parameters Waveform data first undergo signal and event analysis during an automated processing phase An S H I analyst reviews and edits the output of this processing in ARS process 3 in Figure 2 The analyst then refines generated arrivals events and location hypotheses and adds new arrivals and events missed during the auto mated phase Modifications are saved to an output database A further stage of automated processing process 4 in Figure 2 follows analysis and the output is ready for quality review Lead analysts and other personnel use the interactive applications during quality review A bulletin is then published for States Parties to examine Besides ARS a number of associated tools are availa
115. IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV This window displays the following items Functions m Events Waveforms Waveform Labels Amplitude Scaling and Measurement Deselecting All Objects Time Bar Message Area Resizing Areas in the ARS Window m Quick tips Popup Menus Functions The top section of the ARS main window contains pull down menus and toolbar buttons as shown in Figure 11 A Help function at the top right provides a limited description of the available functionality The toolbar buttons provide shortcuts to functions commonly used during an analysis session Each menu option and button is described individually in Toolbar Button Functions on page 41 and ARS Menus on page 68 Asc On Co Ph Uftr Ph P Ad Ph Rn Ph Bm Ph AIPh UnAl SBD SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICH Loc FiGURE 11 ARS MENUS AND TOOLBAR BUTTONS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Events The event scrolling list is located below the ARS toolbar Figure 12 The list dis plays all events built by the Automatic Processing software and any events that you create during analysis Each event is identified by the event identification num ber evid the time of the event and the latitude longitude of the event
116. IGURE 67 FIGURE 68 FIGURE 69 FIGURE 70 FIGURE 71 FIGURE 72 FIGURE 73 FIGURE 74 FIGURE 75 FIGURE 76 FIGURE 77 FIGURE 78 FIGURE 79 FIGURE 80 FIGURE 81 FIGURE 82 FIGURE 83 FIGURE 84 ARS MENU SELECT OPTIONS UNDER EDIT MENU ARS DISPLAY WITH ALL CHANNELS SELECTED RENAME OPTIONS IN MENU PHASE LiST RETIME OPTIONS IN EDIT MENU ARRIVAL S ORIGINAL POSITION APPLY MIDDLE MOUSE BUTTON ON WAVEFORM APPLY LEFT MOUSE BUTTON ON T1 APPLY RETIME ARRIVAL MORE THAN 4 SECOND RETIME WARNING ALPHALIST AFTER APPLYING UNDEFINE AZ amp SLOW EDIT gt LOCATE SUBMENU ALPHALIST AFTER LOCATING ALPHALIST SHOWING DEFAULT LOCATION DELETE ORIGIN SUBMENU DELETE ORIGIN VERIFICATION MESSAGE ARS WARNING FOR ATTEMPTING TO DELETE EVENT WITH ASSOCIATED PHASES ALPHALIST DISPLAY OPTIONS REMARKS SUBMENU EVENT WITH REMARKS TEXT EDITING BOX FOR NON STANDARD REMARKS REMARK ON AN EVENT REMARK CATEGORIES STATIC REMARKS SELECTION DIALOGUE BOXES ARS View MENU ALIGN SUBMENU UNDER VIEW MENU WAVEFORMS ALIGNED ON THEORETICAL P PHASE VIEW gt ALIGN DESIGNATED Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 76 77 78 80 81 82 83 83 84 84 84 89 89 90 91 93 94 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 100 102 103 104 105 IDC DOCUMENTATION FIGURE 85 FiLTER OPTIONS UNDER ViEW MENU 106 FIGURE 86 ARS FILTER LIST 107 FIGURE 87 WAVEFORM WITH FILTER STATUS 108 FI
117. K plot When an arrival is sent from ARS to XfkDisplay a tabular entry of the arrival s attributes is added to the arrival list in the main XfkDisplay window A separate FK plot window is displayed with a graphical representation of the arrival s FK spec trum or incidence angle analysis for 3 C stations The FK plot window also con tains tabular arrival attributes Figure 158 shows the entire FK window and Figure 159 shows just the FK plot Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Qo IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Arid 209532 Fktype ARCES FIGURE 158 XFXDISPLAY FK PLOT WINDOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures North axes origin slowness 0 phase velocity ring theoretical event slowness area of maximum signal strength slowness axes FIGURE 159 GRAPHICAL SECTION PLOT The FK plot in Figure 159 is presented as a slowness plane The horizontal and ver tical axes represent the north south and east west components of slowness with North at the top of the plot Slowness decreases towards the middle of the display meaning that velocity increases and increases towards the edges of the display meaning that velocity decreases Circles of equal slowness radiate from the cen ter of the pl
118. KP aligning on origin time Description No valid travel times for this phase exist in ARS ARS is aligning the waveforms on origin time of the event Action No action is needed Be aware that data are not aligned on the selected phase as requested Message DFX experienced an abnormal exit Description Interactive DFX recall processing has failed for one or more specified arrivals Action You can try changing the filters For hydroacoustic data try chang ing the onset termination times Message SSSC corrections are not currently supported using no corrections Description This informational message states that Source Station Specific Cor rection SSSC travel time corrections will not be applied to the selected event Action No action is needed Message Unable to initialize interprocess communications some functions may be unavailable Description This message signals that the interprocess communication system Tuxedo is not running on the analyst machine Action Ask the processing engineer to restart Tuxedo on the analyst machine Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 3 Technical Instructions Troubleshooting Message Unable to update origin s location origin s loca tion is no longer current please re locate Description ARS will not save an event because it does not have a current loca tion Action Locate the event using
119. LE software version TUXHOME Pathname of Tuxedo software product TUXDIR TUXBASE Pathname of local Tuxedo configuration files QMCONFIG Pathname of Tuxedo s message queue configuration file ULOGPFX Tuxedo s log files names excluding extension TLOGPFX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration V Procedures TABLE 31 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES USED BY INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE CONTINUED Variable Name Description PATH List of pathnames to applications LD LIBRARY PATH List of pathnames to runtime libraries XFILESEARCHPATH List of pathnames to X resource files XAPPLRESDIR List of pathnames to site X resource files SCHEMEPATH Pathname to Scheme files JAVA HOME Pathname to Java runtime environment JLIB HOME Pathname to Java runtime libraries XGKSFontDir Pathname to fonts used by Map Map_DEFAULT_MAP Default map displayed by Map MAPDB Map specific database account Common Desktop Environment The CDE is the top layer of the Interactive Analysis software s GUI It adds to the X window and Motif graphics libraries a set of interactive window controls similar to those available on most personal computers The CDE desktop has been custom ized for use in the Interactive Analysis software by the addition of a toolbar button and menu these allow the analyst to conveniently start the
120. LOG Feature Description time Displays the current time using color to show database connection status green database connection is active time is updated yelow intermediate click the time to make analyst log active m blue analyst log is sleeping and database connection is inactive click to activate lt lt Scrolls the Allocation window back one week from the currently dis played dataday Scrolls the Allocation window back one dataday Day Displays Julian and regular date of current dataday this date field updates as you scroll through datadays gt Scrolls the Allocation window forward dataday gt gt Scrolls the Allocation window forward one week from the current dat aday QC Opens the QC window The allocation table in the middle of the Allocation window is used to reserve a time period for analysis and to signal completion of the various analysis milestones regular analysis scanning and aftershock analysis Table 29 describes the columns in the allocation table Allocated and completed hours are identified by the name of the analyst that reserved or completed an analysis step while unreserved or uncompleted hours are empty Figure 247 shows an unreserved time block in the Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures allocation table To rese
121. LOGUE BOX 188 FIGURE 147 CURRENT LOCATION DISPLAYED IN LOCATOR DIALOGUE 188 FIGURE 148 LOGGING PAST LOCATIONS FOR SELECTED EVENT IN LOCATOR DIALOGUE Box 190 FIGURE 149 LOCATION ARRIVAL INFORMATION 192 FiGURE 150 LOCATION CONTROLS Box 193 FIGURE 151 MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE 195 FIGURE 152 CURRENT MAGNITUDE IN MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE 195 FiGURE 153 PAST MAGNITUDES LOGGED IN MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX 196 FIGURE 154 FUNCTIONS IN MAGNITUDE DiALOGUE BOX 197 FIGURE 155 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS WINDOW 198 FiGURE 156 MAGNITUDE CONTROLS WINDOW 200 FiGURE 157 MAIN XFKDISPLAY WINDOW 202 FiGURE 158 XrxDisPLAY FK PLOT WINDOW 204 FIGURE 159 GRAPHICAL SECTION PLOT 205 FIGURE 160 NUMERICAL OUTPUT OF XFKDISPLAY 207 FIGURE 161 FUNCTION BUTTONS IN FK PLOT WINDOW 209 FIGURE 162 AND TOOLBAR OPTIONS IN XFKDISPLAY 210 FIGURE 163 FiLE MENU IN XFKDISPLAY 210 FIGURE 164 EDIT MENU IN XFKDISPLAY 211 FIGURE 165 STATION SELECTION WINDOW 212 FIGURE 166 STATION SPECIFIC PARAMETER WINDOW 213 FiGURE 167 RECIPE PARAMETER WINDOW 214 FIGURE 168 CHANNEL LIST IN XFKDISPLAY WITH ALL CHANNELS SELECTED 216 FIGURE 169 ARS ALPHALIST BEFORE XFKDISPLAY UPDATE 217 FiGURE 170 ARS ALPHALIST AFTER XFKDISPLAY UPDATE 217 FiGURE 171 XrkDisPLAY ViEW MENU 220 FiGURE 172 ARS AFTER FK IS RECEIVED FROM XFKDISPLAY 222 FIGURE 173 FILTER DISPLAY XFKDISPLAY 224 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC
122. MENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures information from the STATIC account and the arrival association and origin infor mation from the SEL3 account as input Waveform data are obtained from the UNIX file system The Map application additionally accesses a Map account for map related information All analyst results are written to the LEB account station information Db STATIC account arrivals associations origins Db SEL3 account detections waveform pointers Db IDCX account waveforms D UNIX file system Interactive map data Analysis Db MAP account arrivals associations origins Db LEB account FIGURE 256 INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS DATABASE ACCESS A detailed description of the configuration of the PIDC database is given in IDC5 1 3RevO 1 The database schema are described in IDC5 1 1Rev2 Within the Interactive Analysis software interprocess communication makes use of temporary database tables written in the LEB account The ARS application deletes the temporary tables it creates on exit It also deletes temporary tables more than a week old to remove temporary tables orphaned by abnormal application exits Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures TUXEDO FIL
123. OGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS Element Font Example database table bold affiliation database account CAPS IDCX msgdisc database attributes italics mb ave processes software units and analyst log libraries user defined arguments and action variables used in parameter par files or program com mand lines titles of documents Database Schema computer code and output courier info Parameter inetd 1 filenames directories and websites text that should be typed exactly as shown ARS par ps fu cds user name TABLE CONVENTIONS FOR USER INSTRUCTIONS Instruction Explanation Example choose Use keyboard shortcuts or click Choose File gt Print once with your left mouse button to select a menu option click Press and release the appropri Click Done ate mouse button to activate a graphic object on the screen display A general reference to a win Select one or more channels to dow or subsection of a window sorted to the top of the ARS display double click Click a mouse button twice Double click the icon to without moving the pointer reopen the program Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions About this Document V TABLE CONVENTIONS FOR USER INSTRUCTIONS CONTINUED Instruction Explanation Example drag Hold down the left mouse but Drag the pointer to draw ton while moving the pointer
124. Options menu Table 27 describes the functions in this menu Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 304 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 27 OPTIONS MENU Function Description Quit dman Exit dman A dialogue box appears to confirm before exiting Kill All Stops all application processes exits them and exits dman A dia logue box appears to confirm before exiting Query Queues Immediately updates the displayed message queue sizes for all applications Show Log Provides a limited history of actions performed and monitored by dman Hide Log If the dman log is displayed this option toggles to undisplay the log Starting Applications Manually You can initiate an application by sending a message through ARS or by starting the application manually through dman When a message is sent from ARS the application launches and processes the message when starting the application from dman the application launches and then waits for messages To manually start an application for example AEQ 1 Click on the AEQ application icon The icon turns yellow as it is initialized as shown in Figure 240 It then turns green when AEQ becomes ready to use dman uses UNIX system commands to launch applications It turns the icon yellow when it issues the system command dman turns the icon green when it receives notification from Tuxedo
125. STALLATION References Glossary Index Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 341 342 345 349 351 351 353 353 354 354 355 355 358 359 360 360 361 362 362 362 364 365 365 366 369 G1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual FIGURES FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 FIGURE 5 FIGURE 6 FIGURE 7 FIGURE 8 FIGURE 9 FIGURE 10 FIGURE 11 FIGURE 12 FIGURE 13 FIGURE 14 FIGURE 15 FIGURE 16 FIGURE 17 FIGURE 18 FIGURE 19 FIGURE 20 FIGURE 21 FIGURE 22 FIGURE 23 FIGURE 24 FIGURE 25 IDC SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION HIERARCHY IDC PROCESSING FLOW INTERACTIVE PROCESSING FLOW CDE MENU BAR SHOWING START ANALYST REVIEW ARS MAIN WINDOW AT STARTUP ARS READ WINDOW ARS IPC STATUS MESSAGE LEFT SCREEN DURING ANALYSIS SESSION RIGHT SCREEN DURING ANALYSIS SESSION Main ARS WINDOW ARS MENUS AND TOOLBAR BUTTONS ARS EVENT LIST ONE CHANNEL WAVEFORM TRACE WAVEFORM BEFORE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WAVEFORM AFTER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WAVEFORM AFTER OFFSET ADJUSTMENT VIEW SELECTED TIME AND AMPLITUDE COUNTS View PERIOD 2 AND CORRESPONDING AMPLITUDE TIME BAR IN ARS MESSAGE AREA IN ARS QUICK TIP DESCRIBING TOOL BAR ALPH FUNCTION QUICK TIP DISPLAYING ORID QUICK TIP DISPLAYING ARID CHANNEL POPUP MENU EVENT POPUP MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 21 22 22 24 25
126. Scheme and does not write a log file SpectraPlot SpectraPlot uses a public domain WCL which allows definition of much of its GUI in X resource files The default X resource file SCMs HOME X11 app defaults SpectraPlot is extensive and uses WCL syntax The IDC site specific X resource customization file CMS CONFIG system specs app resources SpectraPlot generally duplicates the app defaults SpectraPlot file with some deletions One of these files is required for operation SpectraPlot does not use a parameter file or Scheme and does not write a log file Detection and Feature Extraction DFX The DFX application provides a general purpose signal processing environment DFX uses par files and Scheme code to configure specific behavior The Interactive Analysis software uses DFX in three configurations to beam phases w calculate waveform attributes for seismic arrivals and calculate waveform attributes for hydroacoustic arrivals Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures DFX is launched as a background task in response to messages composed and sent from ARS Depending on the task to be performed ARS sends a message to one of three message queues BOTF RSEISMO or RHYDRO As described in Tuxedo Files on page 353 each queue has an associated tuxshell daemon which receives the messa
127. Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV ADVANCED PROCEDURES This section provides an introduction to customizing the applications of the Inter active Analysis Subsystem The Interactive Analysis Subsystem relies heavily on configuration files to tailor its appearance and functionality These files exist both at the system wide level in the CMS CONFIG directory tree and at the user level in each analyst s home directory The three main file types which can be custom ized to suit local needs are parameter files X resource files and Scheme files Parameter files provide the many repetitive parameters that each application uses during operation X resource files enhance or in many cases define the GUI for each application Scheme files provide local custom functionality Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures on page 337 provides details on the types and locations of each application s configuration files Each application s UNIX man page provides descriptions of command line parameters which alter the operation of individual applications Caution USE CAUTION WHEN ALTERING ANY CONFIGURATION FILE THE INTERACTIVE ANALY SIS SUBSYSTEM IS A COMPLEX AND INTERDEPENDENT SYSTEM WHICH HAS EVOLVED INTO ITS PRESENT ORGANIZATION OVER MANY YEARS OF USE IMPROPER MODIFICA TIONS CAN HAVE ADVERSE AND UNEXPECTED CONSEQUENCES THROUGHOUT THE
128. Technical Instructions IDC DOCUMENTATION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual ste TIS ie NI 7 UE rn S n acu ER H Fee N aT eS p ot amp Maia se mM oen May Approved for public release distribution unlimited Notice This document was published May 2001 by the Monitoring Systems Operation of Science Applications Inter national Corporation SAIC as part of the International Data Centre IDC Documentation Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was accurate at the time of publication However information is subject to change Contributors Ann Katherine Gault Science Applications International Corporation Jeffrey Nolten Science Applications International Corporation Trademarks BEA TUXEDO is a registered trademark of BEA Systems Inc Creator 3D Graphics is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Motif 2 1 is a registered trademark of The Open Group ORACLE is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation SAIC is a trademark of Science Applications International Corporation Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems SPARC is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems SQL Plus is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation Sun is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems UItraSPARC is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems UNIX is a registered tradema
129. Undo Last Retime Undefine az amp slow Reset Arrival Time Locate gt Add Origin Locate Event Delete Origin gt si Reset to Default AlphaList Remarks Delete Unassoc Origins Disassociate and Delete Origin Show with Selected Show with Associated Add Arbitrary Remarks on Selected Show Remarks on Selected Add Remarks by Category Edit Object Remarks Delete Object Remarks FIGURE 56 ARS EDIT MENU Edit gt Select The Select submenu provides shortcuts for selecting groups of objects instead of having to select each object individually These shortcuts are shown in Figure 57 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FIGURE 57 SELECT OPTIONS UNDER EDIT MENU Edit gt Select gt All Origins The All Origins menu option selects all origins for example to plot all event loca tions on a map or display an AlphaList to compare all locations To select all origins 1 Choose Edit gt Select gt All Origins All the origins in your allocated time period are selected The process for selecting all origins takes about 30 seconds but is considerably faster than individual manual selection 2 Apply other operations to the selected events Edit gt Select gt All Channels The Select All Channels menu option selects all channels that are displayed in the ARS w
130. User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Edit Calculate The Calculate option performs an azimuth slowness calculation on all selected sta tions This calculation updates the XfkDisplay output and has the same function as Calculate FK on the toolbar Calculate is automatically called each time a new arrival is sent from ARS To update the azimuth slowness calculation 1 In the XfkDisplay window make sure the arrival to be recomputed is selected see the Select option in Table 14 on page 202 If necessary adjust the filter or the parameter files see Filters on page 223 or the XfkDisplay option Edit Stations on page 211 and Edit Parame ters on page 213 2 Choose Edit Calculate XfkDisplay updates its calculation for the selected arrival Azimuth slow ness and F statistic are recomputed and all fields including residuals are adjusted accordingly Edit Site Select Occasionally you may notice bad data on a specific channel either by observing it in the waveform data or through station quality reports Bad data can distort the results of an XfkDisplay calculation You can remove one or more array station channels from the XfkDisplay processing Figure 168 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures s
131. User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To clear a message queue 1 Click directly on the application s queue size bar graph dman uses Tuxedo to delete the messages in the application queue so they will not be processed This is also known as flushing the queue 2 Using the left mouse button click directly on the application s queue size bar graph where the number of messages is displayed in dman dman presents a confirmation dialogue box as shown in Figure 242 prompting you to confirm the deletion of the messages 3 Click OK to delete the messages from the queue Select Cancel to abort the operation and retain the messages All messages are deleted from the application s message queue and they are no longer available for processing Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures messages XA messages messages messages B WEAssess ES messages B WERequest messages Lo messages FIGURE 242 FLUSHING XFKDISPLAY S MESSAGE QUEUE Stopping Analysis through dman To finish an analysis session you can stop each application through its own Exit menu option or you can terminate all applications through a single invocation of the dman Kill All option Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software
132. active Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures INTERACTIVE AUXILIARY DATA REQUEST IADR PROCEDURES IADR allows you to request additional auxiliary waveform data to supplement data already loaded into ARS for a particular event Auxiliary station data are different from continuous or so called primary station data in that they do not arrive at the IDC on a continuous basis Instead auxiliary data are requested from the recording station through the Message Subsystem see IDC3 4 1Rev2 and IDC7 4 2 when needed to improve event location The automatic system generally estimates what auxiliary data are required and makes requests accordingly In the course of analyzing an event the data from certain auxiliary stations which were not requested during automatic processing might contribute to event refine ment Also events built during scanning will not have had auxiliary data requested by the automatic system The ability to request additional auxiliary data during an analysis session is made available through ADR Requesting Data and WEAssess The WaveExpert application is used by the automatic system to make auxiliary data requests ADR uses two instances of WaveExpert to assist in requesting auxiliary data interactively WEAssess and WERequest WEAssess is launched automatically at the beginning of an analysis
133. age To turn the bell off select it using the left mouse button A line will appear drawn through the bell indicat ing that the sound has been turned off Resizing Areas in the ARS Window In the complete ARS window shown in Figure 10 on page 28 the menu and tool bar event list waveform time bar and message areas are separated by horizontal lines with a square tab toward their right ends You can resize these areas within the ARS window by using the left mouse button to drag the tabs up or down Dragging the line above the message area allows you to view more error mes sages but sacrifices the size of the waveform area in the process Quick tips Other interactive features of the ARS window are quick tips and popup menus This section describes quick tips popup menus are described in the next section Quick tips are descriptions of ARS functions and objects which appear when you hover the cursor over a function or object If you place the cursor over a toolbar button or menu option but not a submenu name a one line description of the Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures menu option or tool bar button s function appears If you place the cursor over a channel event or arrival object additional information about these objects appears Figures 21 through 23 show examples of quick tips
134. al Instructions Chapter 2 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Operational Procedures WV Figure 218 shows the parameter value display in PolariPlot The top section shows the station start time and end time of the time series sent from ARS The section immediately below it is known as the Active Series display which presents informa tion about the polarization calculations currently displayed in the traces below By moving the cursor over the graphs the Active Series section updates as the cursor moves to display the values represented by the current position of the cursor Table 22 describes the fields FiGURE 218 POLARIPLOT PARAMETER DISPLAY TABLE 22 POLARIPLOT ACTIVE SERIES FIELDS Field Description Series Current series or data being displayed By default Series 0 is created when data are first sent from ARS New series using different filters and settings can be created through the File New menu option Filter Filter used for data displayed in the graph unfiltered in Figure 218 Duration Duration between 0 00 and 60 s of the time windows used for polariza tion analysis Seconds Time x axis value of the cursor as it moves over the continuous trace Parameter Parameter y axis value represented by the cursor as it moves over the Value continuous trace Overlap Overlap between 0 00 and 100 percent of the time windows used for p
135. al Remarks Go Teleseismic Go Regional Select Associated Depth Phases FIGURE 114 SEISMIC MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Seismic DFX Seismic The DFX Seismic menu option allows you to run the DFX application interactively This application is first run during automatic processing DFX searches waveform data for signal to noise ratios exceeding a certain threshold at which point an arrival is created DFX then performs signal measurements on the waveform data in the vicinity of the arrival and records the results in the database The DFX Seismic option performs processing on arrivals that were added or refined during analysis Both XfkDisplay and DFX Seismic compute azimuth and slowness for an arrival however DFX Seismic also computes period and amplitude which are necessary to compute a station magnitude DFX will not replace an XfkDisplay result already transferred to ARS If many events occur close to the same time DFX Seismic results may be used to determine which arrival belongs to which event An anomalous amplitude value compared to other associated arrivals may indicate the arrival has been associated to the wrong event To launch DFX 1 Select an arrival 2 Choose Seismic gt DFX Seismic A processing dialogue box appears as shown in Figure 115 The ARS screen is loc
136. als 1 Select one or more events 2 Choose Edit Delete Origin Delete Unassociated Origins ARS presents a confirmation window with a list of the currently selected events as shown in Figure 72 Initially all events are selected but you can unselect or select individual events Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FiGURE 72 DELETE ORIGIN VERIFICATION MESSAGE 3 Verify that you are deleting the correct origin then click Done The event s disappear from the scroll bar If arrivals are still associated to an event when you click Done ARS does not delete the event and instead issues a warning as shown in Figure 73 3 Origin has associated detections Origin not removed FiGURE 73 ARS WARNING FOR ATTEMPTING TO DELETE EVENT WITH ASSOCIATED PHASES Edit gt Delete Origin gt Disassociate and Delete Origin The Disassociate and Delete Origin menu option allows you to delete an origin without first disassociating its arrivals Caution THIS OPTION DOES NOT PROVIDE ANY VERIFICATION WINDOW AND ACTS IMMEDI ATELY To disassociate and delete an origin 1 Select an event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 2 Choose Edit gt Delete Origin gt Disassociate
137. alysts who are allowed access to the operations database must belong to a certain UNIX group namely group analysts who are granted access to a file containing operations database passwords ARS automatically accesses this file when a session is started Without belonging to the proper group ARS users will not be allowed access to the operational database passwords However you can with the permission of the administrator of operations database passwords be granted access to other databases such as the archive database or other research or training database accounts Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 3 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to identify and correct problems related to the Interac tive Analysis Subsystem and includes the following topics Monitoring Interpreting Error Messages Reporting Problems Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Troubleshooting MONITORING The Interactive Analysis software provides two main methods for monitoring the status of ARS and all associated applications The most powerful monitoring tool is the dman status tool All analysis tools except HART are represented by icons in dman Each icon is color coded according to the application s operational status see dman Procedures on page
138. an gt Previous Unassoc Arrival The Previous Unassoc Arrival menu option selects and displays the closest unasso ciated arrival occurring earlier in time to the currently selected arrival which becomes unselected The display is scrolled as necessary to center the newly selected arrival You have two options with this function If a station is selected Previous Unassoc Arrival selects only the previous arrival on that station Without a selected station Previous Unassoc Arrival selects the previous unassociated arrival from all stations To display the previous unassociated arrival 1 Select an unassociated arrival 2 Choose Scan Previous Unassoc Arrival The unassociated arrival occurring earlier in time is selected The ARS dis play scrolls backwards to center the newly selected arrival The name and station of the selected arrival is displayed in the ARS message window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Scan Add Next amp Prev Buttons The Add Next amp Prev Buttons option allows you to add toolbar buttons for the Next Unassoc Arrival and Previous Unassoc Arrival options for easier access to these options while scanning To add Next and Prev toolbar buttons 1 Choose Scan Add Next amp Prev Buttons You need not select an event or channel Two new toolbar buttons Prev and Next appe
139. an dman par CMSS config app config distributed tuxshell interactive tuxshell queue par CMSS config app config interactive AEQ AEQ clp CMSS config app config interactive AEQ AEQ par CMSS config app config interactive ARS ARS par CMSS config app config interactive ARS IDC scm CMSS config app config interactive HART HART par CMSS config app config interactive IADR IADR par CMSS config app config interactive Map IDC MAP scm CMSS config app config interactive Map Map Analyst Tools scm CMSS config app config interactive Map Mapconfig scm CMSS config app config interactive Map overlay scm CMSS config app config interactive XfkDisplay XfkDisplay par CMSS config app config interactive XfkDisplay arrays par CMSS config app config interactive XfkDisplay recipes par CMSS config app config interactive analyst log analyst log par CMSS config app config interactive analyst log analyst log ppm 1 The shorthand notation CMSS is a UNIX environmental parameter that points to the root of the IDC software directory tree The symbol is a wildcard reference to all files or directories in that location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 1 Technical Instructions Introduction CMSS config earth specs BLK 050 CMSS config earth specs MAG atten atten CMSS config earth specs MAG atten slowamp P
140. analysis pass on the selected time block you can use the Analyze function to signal that your review is complete The comple tion is logged in the allocate hour table This function triggers post analysis pro cessing on the time block and notifies the lead analyst that the time block is available for quality control To signal that the standard analysis pass is complete 1 Select the hours analyzed in the Hour column by clicking on each hour consecutively with the left mouse button Hours must be selected consecutively for Analyze to function Selected hours turn green 2 Click the Analyze button Your name appears in the Analyze column for the selected hours Scan When a scan pass on the selected time block is complete you can use the Scan button to signal that this milestone is complete The completion is logged in the allocate hour table This function triggers post analysis processing on the time block and notifies the lead analyst that the time block is available for quality control To signal that the scan pass is complete 1 Select the hours scanned in the Hour column by clicking on each hour consecutively with the left mouse button Hours must be selected con secutively for Scan to function Selected hours turn green 2 Click the Scan button Your name appears in the Scan column for the selected hours Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION
141. and can override definitions made in the first file In the Interactive Analysis software this file is used for site specific customization Several of the applications include interpreted Scheme code and require Scheme libraries located in the path specified by the SCHEMEPATH environment variable which includes the cMs HOME scheme directory The ARS application also requires a ARSinit file located in the analyst s home directory A detailed and ARS oriented description of configuring Scheme is provided in IDC7 2 2 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures Several of the applications are implemented in Java Because Java applications must run in a Java runtime environment RE the executable file for these applications for example CMS HOME bin HART is actually an executable shell script that runs the JRE with the correct Java code The path for the JRE is specified in the environment variable HOME and the path to the Java code files is specified in the environment variable JLIB HOME Java applications do not use Scheme or X resources CONFIGURATION DATA FILES The Interactive Analysis software is dependent on configuration parameters con tained in hundreds of configuration data files These files are maintained in a con figuration directory tree config tree and are shared with other subsystem
142. and the added filter is created Each filter is applied in sequence to the selected waveform Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View gt Display All Channels The Display All Channels menu option displays a selection dialogue box that lists all channels available for display in ARS This option is most often used to add channels not already displayed The list of available channels is created from the network parameter specified in the File Read dialogue box The default network parameter is placed the ARS Load file by the ARSscan application at the request of the analyst log application ARSscan also creates an optimized list of display channels and places these in ARS Load ARS uses this list as its default display list both ensuring complete channel coverage for the current ARS session and relieving you from needing to frequently select display channels from the full list 1 Choose View Display All Channels You need not select an event or channel A channel selection dialogue containing a scrolling list of available chan nels and a list of available stations is displayed as shown in Figure 90 Currently displayed stations and channels are already selected so select ing additional channels adds to those currently displayed 2 To display additional channels first select the station f
143. anual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Edit 2 D Rotations The 2 D Rotations option is a toggle that switches between two and three dimensional rotations for computing polarization analysis When 2 D Rotations is enabled the incidence angle is not considered in the rotation You must choose File Compute to update the graphs Edit Set LineType or Line Style The Set submenu shown in Figure 226 allows you to change the graph display line type or line style formats FIGURE 226 SET SUBMENU OPTIONS The Set Line Type option allows you to change the line format in the graphs to one of lines default type data points impulse lines bar graphs combined lines and impulse lines or combined lines and data points The Set Line Style option allows you to change the graph line style to be a solid line default style a dotted line a dashed line or dot dash line Edit Clear The Clear submenu options allow you to remove selected information from the graphs or to undisplay the graphs entirely Edit Clear Selected The Clear Selected option undisplays the current active series graphs The graph areas remain blank Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Edit Clear AII The Clear
144. ar Channels do not have to be selected All theoretical phases are removed from the ARS display F K Analyze Azimuth and Slowness using XfkDisplay The F K toolbar button launches XfkDisplay This program allows you to visually interpret the station to event azimuth and slowness for an arrival To analyze azimuth and slowness using XfkDisplay 1 Select an arrival To select more than one arrival to send to XfkDisplay press the Shift key while selecting the arrivals one at a time 2 Select F K from the ARS toolbar XfkDisplay launches and you can now analyze the arrival s azimuth and slowness You can also return updated azimuth and slowness parameters to ARS See XfkDisplay Procedures on page 201 Beam Beam Channel Beamforming enhances coherent signals relative to background noise Signal energy arriving at individual elements of an array is time shifted and summed to emphasize energy arriving at the array from a particular direction such as a theo retical event location Beaming is performed by the DFX application IDC7 1 1 The Beam toolbar button initiates interactive recall processing to have DFX form beamed data for the selected station around the selected theoretical arrival time oriented toward the selected event The Beam function behaves the same as the function Bm Ph Beam Phase except it allows interactive phase selection and brings up a cancellable dialogue box during processing Interactive Analysis Su
145. ar at the right end of the toolbar as shown in Figure 136 You may now quickly access these but tons to move between unassociated arrivals Ase On Co Ph Ad Ph An Ph Bm Ph APH UnAl 580 SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICN Loc OC Ut Sav Prev New FIGURE 136 ADD NEXT amp PREV BUTTONS Scan gt Remove Next amp Prev Buttons When you are finished with the Next Next Unassoc Arrival and Prev Previous Unassoc Arrival toolbar buttons you can remove them from the toolbar to reduce clutter To remove Next and Prev toolbar buttons 1 If the Prev and Next buttons are displayed on the toolbar choose Scan gt Remove Next amp Prev Buttons The Prev and Next buttons are removed from the toolbar Fusion Menu The Fusion menu contains data and channel display options that apply to all three S H I data types as shown in Figure 137 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Show Best Channels Select Station by Distance Expand Channel Unexpand Channel Expand Station Unexpand Station FIGURE 137 FUSION MENU Fusion gt Show Best Channels The Show Best Channels menu option displays those stations that are most likely to detect a signal from an event based on probability of detection To show best channels 1 Select an event 2 Choose Fusion gt Show Best Channels Stations likely to
146. are User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures HART Window Layout and Organization Figure 209 shows the HART tool display The left side of the display shows the waveform envelopes belonging to the stations in the station group aligned on their points of maximum correlation The right side of the display shows the F statistic annulus The F statistic indicates the degree of correlation or similarity between the waveform segments Highest correlation within the waveform is rep resented in red Lowest correlation is represented in blue Three pointer bars radi ating out from the center of the annulus represent station to event azimuth based on the current location of the event in ARS purple the automatic processing esti mate of signal azimuth blue and the analyst reviewed estimate of azimuth yel low Parameter information such as azimuth and slowness from both the automatic processing and your review are displayed textually below the annulus Blue lowest contrast Red highest contrast j i i A d A VoM RAP adus T AI J FIGURE 209 HART Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Figure 210 shows a close up of the F st
147. ase Query Remove All Objects Edit Selected Objects Edit Layers FIGURE 179 EDIT LAYERS OPTIONS IN MAP Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures You can add layers by using the Edit Edit Layers Define Layer option The dialogue box allows you to add a named new layer on top of the current layer Anything drawn in Map is drawn on this layer and belongs to it Objects are always drawn and manipulated on the current layer To make another layer current choose the Edit Edit Layers Select Layer submenu option and enter the desired layer s name View Menu The View menu in Map provides display options including Zooming changing Map views and Map outlines as shown in Figure 180 Draw All Objects View Objects Undraw All Objects View Selected Objects Map Outlines View Maps Zoom Change Colors Overlays Pointer Coords Undraw Selected Objects Object Attributes Show Map Outlines Unshow Map Outlines Show Selected Map Change Map Pop Map Stack Roll Map Stack Type Map Stack Swap Map Stack Zoom FiGURE 180 ViEW MENU IN MAP View View Objects The View Objects submenu shown in Figure 181 provides options that undisplay and redisplay objects without permanently deleting them they remain present in Map memory To permanently delete objects use the opti
148. atically rescales the waveforms during scrolling This means that as you scroll vertically or horizontally the waveform height is adjusted to fit the maximum amplitude in the display space provided for each channel Enabling auto scaling applies to all channels Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms Resize Pick You can adjust the height of each channel s waveform display box To see more channels on the display use a smaller waveform display box to see more detail in individual channels increase the waveform height and show fewer channels Fig ure 103 shows the waveform height options The default channel height used by ARS at startup is 45 pixels FIGURE 103 WAVEFORM HEIGHT SELECTION To adjust the height of a waveform 1 Choose Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms Resize Pick 2 Select the desired waveform height Height is given in pixels The ARS screen refreshes and the waveform display area allocated to each channel changes to the height selected Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Options Phase Labels Phase labels contain the phase names assigned to each arrival They appear above the arrival bars within the waveform displa
149. ation ESDC Also if a numeric field contains then no data are available for that field Location Controls The Controls toolbar button displays a Location Controls window which allows you to specify some restrictions on the location calculation and output The win dow is shown in Figure 150 Location Controls I B E FIGURE 150 LOCATION CONTROLS BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The Travel Time Correction area of this window is not used by the IDC The Ignore Stations n n SD option instructs ARS to ignore stations at distances beyond a certain multiple of the standard deviation on the location By default this limit is turned off If enabled the default deviation limit is 3 0 The Preset Stations Only option is typically disabled This option limits the stations included in a location calculation to those listed in the Scheme cvar variable main tained C code and accessible by both C and Scheme variable ocator sub sta tions list The cvar variable locator sub stations only p controls the default setting of this field The cvar is set to false in ARSdefault scm and is not overridden in IDC scm By default only the Distance Variance Weighting option is enabled This option s Weighting toggle controls the usage of modeling weights Magnitude Dialogue B
150. ation spacing is much larger than a wavelength nm Nanometer Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions noise Incoherent natural or artificial perturba tions of the waveform trace caused by ice animals migrations cultural activity equipment malfunctions or interruption of satellite communication or ambient background movements nondefining Arrival attribute such as arrival time azi muth or slowness which is associated but not used in calculating the event s location or magnitude nondefining phase Associated phase for which features are not used in estimating the location and origin time of an S H I event O ORACLE Vendor of the database management system used at the PIDC and IDC orid Origin Identifier origin Hypothesized time and location of a seismic hydroacoustic or infrasonic event Any event may have many ori gins Characteristics such as magnitudes and error estimates may be associated with an origin Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Glossary V P period Average duration of one cycle of a phase in seconds per cycle phase Arrival that is identified based on its path through the earth phase name Name assigned to a seismic hydroa coustic or infrasonic arrival associated with a travel path PIDC Prototype International Data Centre pipeline 1 Flow of data at
151. ation test is successful generation of a REB for a complete data day Table 32 is an example of a basic Interactive Subsystem validation test TABLE 32 EXAMPLE INTERACTIVE VALIDATION TEST Application Validation Procedure analyst log Keep a log of problems observed in analyst og during normal usage Verify analyst log starts from CDE toolbar Allocate a time period and perform ARSscan Verify that three dman ARS sessions using different agents can be launched from analyst log Initiate recall processing after analyzing events in automatic event list Initiate recall processing after scanning dman Keep a log of problems observed in dman during normal usage Verify that dman can launch and terminate applications and track their messaging Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures TABLE 32 EXAMPLE INTERACTIVE VALIDATION TEST CONTINUED Application Validation Procedure ARS Keep a log of problems observed in ARS during normal usage Use ARS to display waveforms arrivals and origins from automatic processing Use ARS to modify arrivals reassociate phases and relocate and save events Use ARS to send messages to XfkDisplay Map AEQ SpectraPlot PolariPlot and DFX Run interactive DFX on six added depth phases Use ARS to display M parameters Use quic
152. ation times for the signal Changes that have been made interactively to the onset termination times are indicated by highlighted change bars as shown in Figure 119 To see signal onset termination times for an added arrival onset termination times must have been calculated using DFX Hydro Features FIGURE 119 ANALYST ADJUSTED ONSET TERMINATION BARS Hydro Hydro Bars Off The Hydro Bars Off option allows you to undisplay onset termination time bars when you are not using them Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To turn off hydroacoustic bars 1 Select a single arrival whose onset termination time bars are being dis played 2 Choose Hydro Hydro Bars Off The onset termination time bars disappear Hydro DFX Hydro Features The DFX application is first run during automatic processing DFX searches wave form data for signal to noise ratios exceeding a certain threshold at which point an arrival is created DFX then performs signal measurements on the waveform in the vicinity of the arrival and records the results in the database Different fre quency bands are used for hydroacoustic data than for seismic data Of the eight frequency bands used ARS displays the features calculated at the frequency band producing the highest snr Three hydroacoustic features can be interactively modified These are arriva
153. atistic annulus The slowness plane appears as a donut shape instead of a continuous plane as is used in XfkDisplay because it only covers phase velocities from 1 47 km s to 1 59 km s The length of the pointer bars represent slowness their ends pointing to the slowness value calcu lated for the displayed signal The colors within the annulus represent the F statis tic IDC5 2 1 for correlation between the waveform segments The higher the correlation between waveforms the greater the confidence that the signal energy in the waveforms of the station group originates from the same signal source and can be used to accurately determine the azimuth of the signal The color scale rep resenting F statistic is displayed in the color bar below the annulus FiGURE 210 HART F STATISTIC ANNULUS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The color coding for the three azimuth bars present in the HART annulus is as follows m Blue Azimuth calculated by HAE for the HAG during automatic processing You cannot modify this bar In the two station case where an azimuth cannot be uniquely determined HART chooses between the two equiva lent solutions based on the azimuth to the location of the event selected in ARS Purple Station to event azimuth You cannot modify this bar The purple azi muth points to the event selected in
154. atures double click the td ad or sd fields A d in a field means the feature is defining or contributes to the location n means the feature is non defining or does not contribute to a location To disassociate reassociate an arrival from to an event double click in the orid field for the arrival The field contents will toggle between a numeric origin identi fier and depending on whether the arrival is associated with an origin or not Generally fields that lack valid data are represented with a Channel Information in AlphaList Figure 144 shows the channel area of AlphaList The columns present the features related to a channel such as its station location and full name Table 6 describes each field in the channel area None of the channel fields are editable Sel sta chan lat lon elev type name p Tse Tesw est ee s ARcess array Norway Ei FIGURE 144 CHANNEL INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST TABLE 6 CHANNEL AREA OF ALPHALIST Field Definition Sel Indicates if channel is selected if pressed channel is selected sta Station code an acronym based on the station name chan Channel type lat Latitude of station deg lon Longitude of station deg Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 6 CHANNEL AREA OF ALPHALIST CONTINUED Field Definition ele
155. ay man page provides details on all recipe parameters that you can set interactively Changing the fktype parameter renames the recipe and the original name is lost If the Edit gt Stations fktype reference is not found the FK computation fails Also you cannot reset a recipe back to its original values Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To edit recipe parameters 1 Choose Edit Parameters A station selection window is displayed 2 Select the station whose recipe parameters require editing A parameter editing window opens as shown in Figure 167 3 Make changes to the values presented in this window then click Apply XfkDisplay uses the new parameters in its future calculations Any changes made to the recipe parameters are lost when XfkDisplay exits B J 9 ASAR band width 2 000000 2 050000 lag 18 400000 7 60 90 000000 0 300000 05 40 000000 10 18 500000 2155 55 10 000000 min sta nslow 75 7277 71 000000 22712 1 000000 power output il Apply Cancel FIGURE 167 RECIPE PARAMETER WINDOW Clicking Cancel disregards the changes When finished editing recipe parameters you can undisplay the stations selection list by clicking Dismiss at the bottom of the station selection list Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software
156. ay parameters first change the required parameters and then select Compute Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To recalculate the displayed spectrum 1 Choose an option from the Edit menu For example choose Edit Nor malize Nothing happens after Normalize is selected The screen updates only after Compute is selected The spectra normalizes with O dB as the high est decibel level in the window 2 Choose File Compute Edit Menu The Edit menu shown in Figure 234 provides options for editing the spectra s com putation The functions are described in Table 24 Power Amplitude Phase Spectrum Taper Demean Normalize dB Scale Parzen Inst Correction Hanning Units Hamming Clean Blackman Redraw Welch 10 Cosine None Remove Mean Linear Trend Displacement Velocity Acceleration FIGURE 234 SPECTRAPLOT EDIT MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 24 EDIT MENU FUNCTIONS Header Function Sub function Description Spectrum Power Displays the waveform s power spectrum Amplitude Displays the waveform s amplitude spectrum Phase Displays the waveform s phase spectrum Taper Parzen Computes spectrum usin
157. ble for specialized signal analy sis and signal feature extraction m XfkDisplay XfkDisplay is the azimuth and slowness determination tool Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions a Map Chapter 1 Introductio Map provides an interactive graphical display of the geographic aspects of S H I data IDC Software Automatic Interactive Distributed Data Data System Data for Processing Processing Processing Services Management Monitoring Software W Station W Time series gp Application B Continuous Data System Automatic Processing Analysis Services Data Archiving Monitoring Processing Subsystem Data Network Bulletin Process M Message Database Performance li Interactive Processing Monitoring Subsystem Libraries Monitoring Data and Control B Fost M Interactive gg Distributed Retrieve Database Distributed location Tools Processing Subsystem Tools Processing Processing Libraries Data B Event M Analysis Distributed Subscription B Configuration Data Screening Libraries Processing Subsystem Management Services Scripts Data ll lime series Bl Radionuclide Data Services Data Tools Analysis Utilities and Management Libraries Bl Time series Web Hi System Libraries Subsystem Monitoring Data Operational Authentication COTS Scripts Services Data Radionuclide
158. blockage to a hydrophone station before a phase is associated Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To use the Hydro Path Blocked tool 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more hydroacoustic stations for which you want to check blockage 3 Choose Hydro Hydro Path Blocked Hydro Path Blocked returns a message indicating either that no path blockage to the selected station s was found or that the station is likely to be blocked from the event as shown in Figure 123 FIGURE 123 PREDICTED BLOCKAGE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Hydro Map Hydro Path Blocked The Map Hydro Path Blocked menu option provides the same display and warning as the Hydro Path Blocked option but it also displays a Map showing the travel paths between selected stations and the event The travel path is drawn as a great circle line between station and event The path is drawn in red if blockage is pre dicted or green if not To use the Map Hydro Path Blocked tool 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more hydroacoustic stations for which you want to check blockage 3 Choose Hydro Map Hydro Path Blocked Map Hydro Path Blocked returns a message indicating either that no path blockage was found or tha
159. bserve how scale intervals on one graph correspond to intervals on the other graph The arrow in the top portion of Figure 219 shows an example of the crosshairs representing the cursor PolariPlot Menus PolariPlot has three menus File Edit and View that control the session display data and change settings A fourth menu Help is inactive File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 220 provides general application control options You can start or end a PolariPlot session print the PolariPlot window or send parameter data to ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Component Amplitude Azimuth New Azimuth LR Open Short Incidence Save to ARS Planarity Compute Long Incidence Print 5 Rectilinearity Quit Horizontal Vertical Radial Transverse Radial Component Transverse Component Normal Component All Displayed All FIGURE 220 POLARIPLOT FILE MENU File gt New The New menu option allows you to create a new series of data The new series is created using the filtering duration and overlap parameters currently set in PolariPlot these parameters should be set before you create a new series The series are named sequentially as Series 0 Series 1 Series 2 and so forth Series 0 is the first series created automatically when data are first sent from ARS File
160. bsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures To beam a channel 1 Select an event 2 Select either the fk beam or cb beam on an array station a cb derived channel is always returned You can select channels for more than one station to generate multiple beams 3 Select Beam from the ARS toolbar A list of phases appears 4 Select the phase on which to beam This determines the theoretical arrival time around which the beam inter val is created An ARS dialogue box appears during beam processing locking the ARS screen Beaming should take approximately 15 seconds after which time the ARS screen is released and the appropriate beam appears The beam is sorted by distance from the event and aligned on the theoretical arrival time of the selected phase SICh Select Channel ARS displays a default set of channels for each station The SICh toolbar button allows you to select additional channel components for display in ARS as shown in Figure 40 inem FiGURE 40 CHANNEL COMPONENTS SELECTION BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To select a channel 1 Select any channel in a station 2 Select SICh from the ARS toolbar A list of the station s components is displayed as shown in
161. c group namely the Ascension group Even though each hydrophone is processed as a separate station together they are treated as a collective unit for azimuthal processing in HART The HART tool is the interactive complement to the automatic Hydroacoustic Azi muth Estimator HAE processing HAE makes an estimate of the azimuth of an arrival during automatic processing prior to analyst review Like HART HAE uses the concept of a Hydro Arrival Group HAG A HAG is a set of arrivals occurring at stations in a hydroacoustic station group that are evaluated as originating from the same source The formation of a HAG by the automatic processing system follows specific rules hydroacoustic arrival group is made up of two or more arrivals wm All arrivals in HAG must belong to stations within the same station group m cannot have more than one arrival per station At most one arrival in HAG can be event defining Because the hydrophones stations within a station group in the International Monitoring System IMS can be placed at large distances from each other possi bly beyond the coherence length of many hydroacoustic signals the HART tool provides methods other than coherent waveform processing By default HART correlates the waveform envelopes recorded at each station within a group and based on highest correlation of these waveforms estimates a station to event azimuth Interactive Analysis Subsystem Softw
162. ces CMS CONFIG system specs shared par to obtain system level global parameter values Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures ARS writes a crash recovery file which is a binary copy of its internal data struc tures to the file specified by the environment variable ARS RECOVERY FILE The cshrc file installed the analyst s home directory by mkCMsSuser sets this vari able to tmp Suser recovery If the variable is not set then by default this file goes in the analyst s home directory If ARS crashes it writes a log file named ARS history to the analyst s home directory This file contains a history of the Scheme functions ARS executed up to the crash XfkDisplay The XfkDisplay application is primarily written in C and makes only limited use of Scheme for interpreting IPC messages Its menus and toolbar buttons are tied directly to C functions therefore it is much less customizable than ARS XfkDisplay uses a public domain widget creation library WCL which allows definition of much of its GUI in X resource files The default X resource file CMS HOME X11 app defaults XfkDisplay is extensive This file uses WCL syntax and is required for operation An IDC site specific X resource customization file CMS CONFIG system specs app resources XfkDisplay has been main tained
163. ces for a running application It is generally not modified at a site The third file is the app resources file This file is also named after the application and is located in the directory specified in the user s environment variable XAPPLRESDIR This file generally defines a site s look and feel Because it is the last file read the resources it defines take precedence over resource definitions in the other files For example the ARS app resources file re defines all the menus and toolbar buttons giving the IDC ARS a much different user interface than the minimal ARS A complete description of modifying X resources is beyond the scope of this user manual The series of X window manuals published by O Reilly amp Associates Inc is recommended Fer93 Hel94 Nye92a and Nye92b Adding Functionality A number of the applications ARS Map and DFX provide a Scheme user inter face The Scheme interface provides an interpreted software layer and an interac tive text window that is accessible while the interactive application runs The interpreted Scheme software provides the glue that connects actions in the graphical user interface to the compiled code The Scheme interface therefore pro vides a means of adding or customizing site specific functionality IDC7 2 2 pro vides an introduction to the ARS Scheme interface and a listing of all the available Scheme functions Another avenue for extending functionality in the Interactiv
164. ched by this second dman will commu nicate using agent 2 ARS After you set up your ARS load file using ARSscan and verify the correct session number you can click the graphic ARS button to start ARS and an interactive anal ysis session Figure 250 This button actually starts the dman application using the agent specified by the Session Number button dman then starts ARS and begins monitoring messages to start other applications when needed For step by step instructions for starting an ARS session see Software Startup on page 18 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FiGURE 250 GRAPHIC ARS BUTTON Run RebQC Review Event Bulletin Quality Check At the end of each analyzed time period you will use rebqc to check the database over this time period for possible errors or database conflicts created during the analysis session These data quality checks include checks for anomalous depths duplicate arrivals potential hydroacoustic blockage arrivals retimed more than 4 seconds and so forth Figure 251 provides an example of rebqc output To run a quality check on the allocated time period 1 Select the hours to be checked Click on each hour consecutively with the left mouse button Hours must be contiguous for rebqc to function Each selected hour turns green 2 Select RebQC
165. ctrl r Read data ctrl s Associate the selected phases to origin ctrl t Retime the selected arrival to the t1 marker ctrl u Unzoom to previous window display ctrl v Zoom on arrival ctrl w Zoom the waveform display by a factor of 8 ctrl x Compress the waveform display by a factor of 8 ctrl z Zoom using the t1 and t2 markers as zoom window limits Meta j Shift waveforms in the Waveform window to the left 50 Meta k Shift waveforms in the Waveform window to the right 50 Meta x Exit ARS AlphaList AlphaList subwindow is an important component of interactive analysis In a spreadsheet style format AlphaList displays the data attributes that define events arrivals and stations Some of these elements are editable from within AlphaList such as making arrival attributes defining or non defining AlphaList contains a toolbar which allows you to conveniently access some of the functionality avail able in the main ARS window Figure 141 shows the AlphaList display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions 2 Operational Procedures AlphaList 0882412 3 FIGURE 141 ALPHALIST You can use several methods to display AlphaList You can choose Edits gt AlphaList Show with Selected to display AlphaList with all objects selected in the main ARS window Or you can choose Edit gt AlphaList gt Show with Associated to dis play AlphaList wi
166. culation is constrained accordingly Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV The Output Generated options button is also contained in this part of the Locator Dialogue Box It specifies the level of annotation displayed in the ARS Scheme window Functions Area of Locator The bottom part of the Locator Dialogue Box contains a set of function buttons pertinent to performing a location Table 9 discusses the functions that are accessi ble through these buttons TABLE 9 FUNCTION BUTTONS IN LOCATOR DIALOGUE Function Description Hide Undisplays the Locator dialogue box Locate Calculates a location using the current set of defining data options and constraints Arrivals Displays arrival information in a popup window Controls Displays configurable locator parameters in a popup window Help Provides descriptions of functions provided in the Locator dialogue box Locator Arrivals Popup Window The Arrivals function in the Locator dialogue box displays a popup window with a list of all arrivals associated to the event and provides information on their defining and nondefining features as shown in Figure 149 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Location Arr
167. default list for teleseismic theoretical phases When Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals is selected ARS displays the theo retical phases in this list The list defined with this option remains in effect for the remainder of the analysis session or until it is redefined using this option Options Menu The Options menu provides options to enable or disable the display of certain components of the ARS waveform display as shown in Figure 100 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Waveforms Waveforms On Phase Labels Waveforms Off Arrival Bars Waveforms Resize Mouse Filter Parameters Waveforms Resize Auto Waveforms 300 Scale Types Waveforms Resize Pick b Waveforms 20 Phase Labels On Phase Labels Off Arrival Bars On Arrival Bars Off Filter Parameters On Filter Parameters Off Scale Types On Scale Types Off FIGURE 100 ARS OPTIONS MENU For reference Figure 101 shows the typically configured ARS waveform display with waveforms phase labels arrival bars and filter options all enabled and scale type disabled Figures 102 through 110 can be compared to this figure pe JENWive NIV NIS Yorn FIGURE 101 NORMAL ARS DISPLAY Options gt Waveforms The two Waveforms submenu options toggle the display of the
168. desired values Left dick on either side of the slider to jump by increments of 10 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Middle click on either side of the slider to position the slider at the clicked position Use the right and left arrow keyboard keys to increment or decre ment the least significant digit in the filter value for very fine tuning filter order or number of poles determine the steepness of the flanks of the passband Use the Poles slider to set up to an eighth order filter Use the option button to control the type of filter The choices are band pass low pass high pass and band reject filter as shown in Figure 89 The Filter Causality button provides the choice between causal and non causal filter Low Pass High Pass Band Rejected FIGURE 89 FILTER TYPES 3 When you have set all parameters click Done The edited filter is then available for use If the filter list is displayed at the time you edit the individual filters you must undisplay the filter list and redisplay it for the edits to take effect To undisplay the list and then redisplay it click Done or Cancel on the filter list then choose View gt Filter gt Show Filter List Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instruct
169. distance from an array It would deliver core phase signal energy essentially straight up to the array and the signal s wavefront would be detected nearly simultaneously at all station elements This would imply a very high apparent horizontal velocity the FK slowness would approach zero The signal energy peak in the FK plot would occur at the axes ori gin It follows that as the slowness approaches zero the azimuth becomes indeter minate For events located closer to the array the apparent horizontal velocity decreases and the slowness increases For a teleseismic P phase the signal energy peak would occur inside the 10 circle for a regional P phase it would occur between the 6 and 8 circles and a regional S phase peak would occur outside all circles For array stations XfkDisplay computes an FK spectrum power value for each grid point in the FK plot The power is computed by summing the complex valued spectra computed from each array element s waveform For each grid point the spectra have been phase shifted to account for that grid point s view of the geo graphical coordinates of the station s elements Each grid point can be thought of as a different test case in phase shifting the waveforms Grid points show the high est signal power when phase shifting yields the highest signal coherence among the array elements This shows up as a peak on the plot The azimuth of the peak represents the direction towards the incoming wavefront
170. dow for analysis is selected and the ARS application is started The time win dow parameters are written to the ARS Load data file in the analyst s home direc tory ARS reads the ARS 1oad file on startup and uses these parameters to constrain the data it reads and writes to the database ARS communicates with and starts the other interactive applications via messages relayed by dman and the interprocess communication system IPC IPC messages specify the permanent and temporary database tables used for the transfer of data between interactive applications FUNCTIONALITY The Interactive Analysis Subsystem is designed for analyst review of 5 wave form data and automated processing results comprised of events and arrivals The central component for analysis is the ARS application In ARS waveforms are dis played as horizontal time series traces with arrival times indicated by phase labeled vertical bars Event lists are displayed above the waveforms with preliminary esti mates of location and origin time The primary role of ARS and its associated tools is to allow you to interactively examine arrivals and their attributes as an aid in determining which arrivals should be associated as an event ARS and its tools are also useful for examining and if necessary modifying the specific characteristics of individual arrivals and for defining new arrivals or creating new events where these were missed by automated processing ARS interfaces with t
171. droacoustic arrival groups New hydroacoustic arrival groups cannot be created in ARS arrivals cannot be added to an existing hydroacoustic arrival group and all arrivals in a hydroacoustic arrival group must be associated with or disassociated from an event as a group If Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures one arrival belongs to the event and another does not the hydroacoustic arrival group is invalid and should be broken up by deleting in ARS the arrival not belonging to the event POLARIPLOT PROCEDURES PolariPlot is an interactive tool that displays polarization characteristics for 3 C seis mic stations whose channels are oriented orthogonally in north east and vertical directions Use of PolariPlot has largely been replaced by the similar 3 C analysis provided by XfkDisplay but PolariPlot provides a more detailed and controllable interface for polarization analysis as described in IDC5 2 1 By default PolariPlot performs an eigenvector analysis which rotates the coordinate axes to minimize the covariance between axes In effect this isolates and maximizes input energy onto each of the new orthogonal axes for example isolating the transverse and radial signal components On this rotated vector matrix derived products are com puted and displayable as shown in Table 21 PolariPlot also al
172. e aligning on default 51 displaying labels 134 displaying theoretical 125 renaming 180 PolariPlot 4 configuration 362 menus 279 procedures 274 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions starting up 141 popup menus 38 processing flow IDC 4 interactive analysis 6 public domain software 339 Q QC window 325 quality check 65 Quick tips 37 R rebdone 326 RebQC 322 rebqc 326 remarks adding arbitrary 97 adding by category 99 adding hydroacoustic 162 adding seismic 149 deleting 101 displaying 98 editing 101 S scaling waveforms 32 Scan menu 167 Add Next amp Prev Buttons 174 Create Origin amp Locate 170 Next Unassoc Arrival 172 Previous Unassoc Arrival 173 Remove Next amp Prev Buttons 174 Scan By Region 167 Select Unassoc Arrivals 168 Un Create Origin Locate 171 scanning Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions by region 167 Scheme ARS configuration 356 interface 328 window 27 Seismic menu 145 Add Seismic Arrival Remarks 149 DFX Seismic 146 Go Regional 150 Go Teleseismic 150 Remove Horizontals 147 Select Associated Depth Phases 151 Show Horizontals 147 Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals 148 Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals 148 shell window 27 Show Best Channels 175 shutdown 23 slowness making undefining 87 software environment 14 SpectraPlot 4 7 configuration 362 Cooley Welch Lewis smoothing 301 Freq
173. e arrival is selected only remarks for that arrival are displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV FIGURE 78 REMARK ON AN EVENT Edit gt Remarks gt Add Remarks by Category The Add Remarks by Category menu option displays a list of standard remark cat egories from which you typically can find an appropriate annotation To add remarks by category 1 Select and analyze an event 2 If the event requires a standard remark choose Edit Remarks Add Remarks by Category A list of remark categories appears as shown in Figure 79 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FiGURE 79 REMARK CATEGORIES 3 From the list select Event static remark A list of static remarks appears as shown in the left selection window in Figure 80 4 Select a remark from the list then click Done After a remark has been attached to an event an R appears with the event in the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS window Events Seismic Arrivals Hydro Arrivals SELECT SELECT SELECT Select remarks Select remarks Aftershock abbreviated analysis Weak signal LO CONF Low confidence time emergent LO CONF Location Low confidence phase ID LO CONF Depth Low confidence association Mul
174. e 337 provides further information about changing this configura tion Send to ARS Calculate Fk Display Fk Select All Deselect All arid fktype phase SelectorApplyDiak il SELECT Select filter parameters 90 60 3BPcausal 40 3BPcausal 80 3BPcausal 25 3BPcausal 20 3BPcausal 30 3BPcausal 07 20 3BPcausal 01 10 3BPcausal 001 01 3 BPcausal 002 0 05 3 BPcausal 005 02 3BPcausal 0 125 0 333 6 BR causal 0 125 0 333 3 BP causal 05 30 S3BPcausal 0 1 10 001 01 3 BPcausal EETITT sta time Three Four Beam Filters Clear delslo bandw fstat fkqual Fitters 5 Filter List ecfreq azimuth delaz slow 2 FIGURE 9 RIGHT SCREEN DURING ANALYSIS SESSION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Using Menus ARS and the other applications each contain a menu bar across the top of their window This menu bar contains one or more pull down menus A pull down or pull up pull right menu expands to show a list of options related to the menu There are two methods to open a main menu For the first method click once on the menu name with the left mouse button to reveal the menu and submenu options Then click the left mouse button on the menu or submenu option to select it The options remain open For the second method click on the main menu and drag t
175. e Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Follow the same procedures as with the Read option You are presented with a popup window containing the information that you requested 3 Review the data in the popup window then click Done ARS loads the data that you were working on before the crash The previous session is returned with any changes you made to arrivals parameter measurements such as DFX and XfkDisplay results and updated event locations The status of the events is preserved as either saved or discarded However the ARS functional state is not preserved from the previous session Such things as zoom level selected objects and applied filters are not retained Only updates to event and arrival characteristics are preserved File Write Recovery Data The Write Recovery Data menu option directs ARS to save the current session into UNIX binary file The binary file is read using the Read Recovery Data option ARS automatically saves recovery data during database access operations These operations include saving rejecting unfreezing or undiscarding an event This option allows you to manually save recovery data at your discretion for example when working on a large event You should not have to use this feature routinely because it is regularly invoked automatically To write recove
176. e Analysis Subsystem is through the use of scripting languages such as those provided by the C or Bourne shells or languages like or Tcl The ORACLE database provides an SQL Plus scripting language Several scripts for purging log files or temporary database Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures tables have been written using scripting languages The analyst log application provides a user interface interacts with the database and is written completely in Tcl Tk Commercial programming manuals for all of these scripting languages readily available MAINTENANCE System maintenance generally consists of purging log files and temporary database tables that build up over time wasting disk space On termination ARS purges the temporary database tables it has created after they are two weeks old As long as regular analysis is underway no more than two weeks worth of temporary data base tables should exist Other scripts for purging temporary tables may exist Check with your database administrator The Interactive Analyst software is configured to write log files to the same set of directories as the automated and distributed processing systems These files are purged regularly by scripts belonging to these subsystems SECURITY ARS provides some security to ensure that only analysts have access to the LEB account An
177. e Start Analyst Review button as described below Starting Regular Analysis To start an analysis session 1 Log to your computer workstation In the login window on your main display monitor enter your user name then press the Return key You are prompted to enter your password 2 Enter your password then press the Return key Your key strokes are not echoed displayed After accepting your password both computer screens initialize This takes a few moments The display shows an hour glass symbol while ini tialization is in progress 1 The login window offers a command line or login window in addition to CDE Make sure you use the CDE login Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 19 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 3 After initialization the CDE toolbar is located at the bottom of both display screens The fourth icon button from the left is the Start Analyst Review button shown here Click bras 4 In analyst log and referring to the analyst log Procedures on page 312 choose the Allocation option and select a time period for this button to start analyst log The analyst log application is displayed on your right screen analysis Next run the ARSscan option to update the ARS load file 5 When this process is complete click the large ARS graphic shown here at the bottom middle of the Allocation
178. e and return results to ARS as required Typically an analysis session begins with analyst log You use the analyst log appli cation to allocate a time period for analysis to specify the appropriate data for loading into ARS to launch ARS and to trigger certain post analysis processes Detailed procedures for analyst log ARS and the other applications are provided in subsequent sections The UNIX operating system automatically displays the CDE menu bar when you log onto your workstation To conveniently launch analyst log and start the analysis session the CDE menu bar at the bottom of the screen has been customized to include the Start Analyst Review menu button as shown in Fig ure 4 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V Four Five tram Ho 5 FIGURE 4 CDE MENU BAR SHOWING START ANALYST REVIEW In Figure 4 the tab on the CDE toolbar above the Start Analyst Review button pro vides access to a pull up menu which provides additional customized options This menu provides options to independently start the dman HART ARS and analyst log applications These menu options are provided as a convenience for special situations such as starting ARS independently of the rest of the Interactive Analysis Subsystem suite However the preferred approach for starting the soft ware during normal operations is with th
179. e event is selected the phase automat ically is associated to the event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Bm Ph Beam Phase Beamforming enhances coherent signals relative to background noise Signal energy arriving at individual elements of an array is time shifted and summed to emphasize energy arriving at the array from a particular direction such as a theo retical event location Beaming is performed by the DFX application IDC7 1 1 The Bm Ph button initiates interactive recall processing to have DFX form beamed data for the selected station around the selected arrival time oriented toward the selected event To create a beam for a selected phase type 1 Select an event 2 Select the fkb or cb beam channel of an array station 3 Select an arrival to set the phase and time for beaming You can select channels for more than one station to generate multiple beams 4 Select Bm Ph from the ARS toolbar A temporary derived origin beam channel is created The beam wave form spans several seconds before and after the selected arrival s theo retical arrival time based on the origin time and location Beaming by DFX takes several seconds and no dialogue box is displayed while the beam is being processed ARS is still active while beamforming occurs When the beam is returned the channels in ARS re sor
180. e it active again The background and foreground colors toggle indicating selected and deselected states 2 To recompute the new azimuth using only the remaining waveforms select Compute A new azimuth is be calculated Figure 213 and Table 19 describe the plot parameter fields in the HART tool Minimum Slowness Maximum Slowness Delta Slowness sikm Delta Azimuth os dco FIGURE 213 HYDROACOUSTIC AZIMUTH PLOT PARAMETERS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures TABLE 19 PLOT PARAMETERS Box Parameter Description Hydro Minimum Slowness Minimum slowness set in HART par file Azimuth Plot Parameters Maximum Slowness Maximum slowness set in HART par file Delta Slowness Slowness resolution set in HART par file Delta Azimuth Azimuth resolution set in HART par file Apply Sets the parameters in the HART tool Velocity Units Displays the above parameters in velocity units Cancel Hides the parameter window Figure 214 and Table 20 describe the color bar parameter fields in the HART tool Minim MuR 0 415 7 101 Outiers Transparent Cancel FIGURE 214 COLOR BAR PARAMETERS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 2
181. e last displayed map the current map is not saved Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 236 May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV on the stack The Roll option rolls the stack or replaces the current map with the map on the top of the stack and moves the current map to the end of the stack The Swap option exchanges the current map for the one on the top of the stack repeated use of this option toggles the display between two maps The Type Map Stack option lists the current map stack in the Scheme window View Zoom The Zoom option zooms into specific features in the currently displayed map To Zoom 1 With the middle mouse button click within the current Map display and while dragging the middle mouse button draw a rectangle around the area of the map you wish to enlarge Map displays an information box while the display is zooming into the selected region Map enlarges the selected area to fill the Map display as shown in Figure 187 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o9 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FiGURE 187 ZOOMED IMAGE View Change Colors Some maps can be displayed using different color themes Selecting the Change Colors option displays a list of selectable colors in addition to those already dis played Interactive
182. e location you may choose the Locate Event option immediately to compute a new location or you may choose to refine the event before locating When ARS has sufficient information it can successfully compute a new location To reset the event location to the default 1 Select an event 2 Choose Reset to Default The location for this event is reset to 999 00 S 999 00 W and no depth Edit Add Origin The Add Origin menu option creates a new event The new event initially has no origin time location or associated phases You can add phases and locate the event in a similar manner to other events under analysis You use Add Origin when you want to add an event to those events created by the Automatic Processing software This may occur for the following reasons including mixed events scan ning or experimentation You discover that arrivals originating from two or more events have been associated to a single event You need to create one or more new events to receive the arrivals not belonging to the original You can then analyze and independently locate each event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Scanning is a process where you scroll through the waveform data look ing for events missed by Automatic Processing During scanning you cre ate new events and associate added or previous
183. e remark choose Edit gt Remarks gt Show Remarks on Selected as described on page 98 FIGURE 124 LisT OF REMARKS Hydro gt Display Hydro Arrival Group After you have selected one hydroacoustic arrival of a group you can use the Dis play Hydro Arrival Group menu option to select all members of that group To determine if an individual arrival is a member of a hydro arrival group you can Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 1 view its quick tip see Quick tips on page 37 If the quick tip shows only the arid then the arrival is not part of a hydro arrival group If the quick tip shows azi muth information the name of the hydro arrival group and the number of arrivals in the group then it is part of a hydro arrival group An example of a quick tip for a hydro arrival group arrival is shown in Figure 125 Hydro arrival groups are eval uated by the Automatic Processing software to calculate a group azimuth You can examine and modify the group azimuth by using the Hydro Send HART menu option which is described in the next section Selecting all members of an hydro arrival group is useful during hydroacoustic analysis arid 2853056 jazi az2 258 51 HAGON T nharr 2 FIGURE 125 QUICK TIP FOR ARRIVAL THAT BELONGS TO HYDRO ARRIVAL GROUP Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC
184. e selected channels 1 Select one or more channels to be removed 2 Choose View Remove Channels Remove Selected Channels The selected channels disappear from the ARS display View gt Remove Channels gt Remove Derived Channels The Remove Derived Channels menu option removes copied or beamed channels created during the current analysis session Derived or temporary beam channels are usually created in an attempt to boost the signal to noise ratio in a waveform segment Beam channels created by the automatic system are not removed by this function To remove all derived channels 1 Choose View Remove Channels Remove Derived Channels All temporary channels are removed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Remove Channels Remove Blank Waveforms The Remove Blank Waveforms menu option reduces the clutter on your display by removing channels that do not contain waveform data for their allocated time period However as an analyst you should not have to use this option often because an optimized list of display channels is provided to ARS by ARSscan see analyst log Procedures on page 312 Empty channels are generally removed at this time To remove blank waveforms 1 Choose View Remove Channels Remove Blank Waveforms All channels not containing waveform data for the allocated time
185. each arrival To make azimuth and slowness undefining 1 Select an event Select Undefine az amp slow Azimuth and slowness become undefining parameters for all arrivals meaning that they will not contribute in the event location solution Time is kept as the sole defining parameter Figure 67 shows an AlphaList dis play after Undefine az amp slow has been applied leaving only arrival time parameters defining Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV AlphaList Undisplay All Undisplay Resize Help Default Map AEQ FK Time n Az Slo n Locate FIGURE 67 ALPHALIST AFTER APPLYING UNDEFINE AZ amp SLOW Edit Locate The Locate menu contains two submenu options as shown in Figure 68 FIGURE 68 EDIT LOCATE SUBMENU Edit Locate Locate Event The Locate Event menu option recomputes the location solution of the selected event This option also appears as tool buttons labeled Loc or Locate in various places in the ARS display Because accurate locations are an important goal you may locate an event many times during the course of analysis often after each sequence of modifications Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures To locate an event 1 Select an e
186. echnical Instructions W Operational Procedures An Ph Bm Ph UNA SBD SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICh Loe Ul FIGURE 33 SET DEFAULT PHASE BUTTON SHOWING PHASE PcP Ad Ph Add Phase The Ad Ph toolbar button adds a default phase to the selected channel s waveform at the time marked by t1 The added arrivals are assigned the default phase type and a negative arrival identifier as shown in Figure 34 Arrivals must be added one at a time FIGURE 34 ANALYST ADDED PHASE To add a phase 1 Position t1 at the desired arrival time 2 Select a channel Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 3 Select Ad Ph from the ARS toolbar An arrival is added to the selected channel and is given the default phase type If an event is selected the arrival is automatically associated to the event Rn Ph Rename Phase The Rn Ph toolbar button renames a phase to the default phase as shown in Fig ure 35 Ase On Co Ph Utr Ph PcP Ad RPh Em Ph 580 SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICH Ele Loc Sav FIGURE 35 RENAMED PHASE To rename a phase 1 Select one arrival you need not select an event 2 Select Rn Ph from the ARS toolbar The phase name changes to match the default phase name as shown on the default phase button If a singl
187. ed The right side of Figure 228 is described in File gt Save to ARS on page 281 Azimuth Azimuth LR Short Incidence Planarity Long Incidence Rectilinearity Horgontal Verlical Ratio Displa Radial Transverse Ratio Displa Radial Component M Disph Transverse Component Displa Normal Component FIGURE 228 POLARIPLOT GRAPH DISPLAY OPTIONS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V View Zoom The Zoom submenu shown in Figure 229 enables zooming on the selected graph type Component Amplitude Enlarge Plot Azimuth Compact Plots Azimuth LR Coordinates Short Incidence Grid Planarity Long Incidence Rectilinearity Horizontal Vertical Radial Transverse Radial Component Transverse Component Normal Component FIGURE 229 VIEW gt ZOOM SUBMENU To zoom into a sub section of the Component Amplitude graph for example 1 Choose View gt Zoom gt Component Amplitude 2 In the Component Amplitude graph use the left most button to click and drag a rectangle around the desired graph segment to enlarge Release the mouse button The enclosed graph segment in the Component Amplitude graph is redrawn to occupy the entire width of the graph area 3 Choose View gt Zoom gt Component Amplitude again to exit the zoom mode Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software U
188. edo that the application is no longer ready to receive messages Message Queue in dman When a message is sent from ARS to an application it is placed in the application s message queue The application then retrieves the message from its queue and processes it dman monitors the number of messages in queues for all applications in that session Message queue status is presented in the form of a bar graph that tracks changes to the number of messages in the application s queues The number of messages is also reported textually on top of the bar graph For example the XfkDisplay message queue in Figure 241 shows six unread messages Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Options messages E messages E xfkDisplay messages SpectraPlot messages PolariPlot messages messages WEAssess messages WERequest E messages messages FIGURE 241 DMAN MESSAGE QUEUE Normally messages travel so quickly from ARS through the queue to an application that it is difficult to follow individual messages let alone prevent their processing However dman does allow you to remove messages from individual application message queues This rare procedure is only needed if there are problems and the messages in the queue have become obsolete Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software
189. een until the vertical line that extends up through the ARS window overlaps with the desired arrival time Release the mouse button 2 Perform the same action with the t2 bar for the second arrival The It2 t1l output in the time window displays the absolute time differ ence between the two arrivals Message Area When ARS has performed an action requiring explanation or if an error or warning must be issued to the analyst a message is displayed at the bottom of the ARS screen Figure 20 shows an example of such a message In this example the analyst has attempted to retime an arrival more than 4 seconds from its original location This action breaks a rule programmed into ARS so an error message is sent to the window see Edit Retime on page 82 in the Edit menu As each message is Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual e May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures sent to the window ARS scrolls the message area to display the most recent mes sage A small scroll bar to the left of the message area allows you to see previous messages E 2 gt More than 4 seconds from in arrival time add new arrival n LE zn z COR UD 5 m SIS ERIIIR AP RPSPO AREA ISSR ITIITI FIGURE 20 MESSAGE AREA IN ARS An alarm bell indicator is located at the right of the message area default ARS launches with the alarm bell turned on The bell sounds when ARS reports a mess
190. els by distance to the selected event This sorting method is generally preferred for routine analysis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 117 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures IPLCA bz To sort by distance 25 272 19 1 Select an event 321220 LPAZIbz i 2 Choose View gt Sort Channels gt Sort by Distance You 1 dnot select channel iva CPUPIbz 2 need not select channels or arrivals VNDA bz The channels are sorted by distance to the selected event 57105 as shown in Figure 94 The closest stations appear at the 64 178 top of the display the furthest stations appear at the bot tom of the display It is best to have a refined location to po make sure that the sorting is accurate You can sort more than once during the analysis of an event 2 75166 _2 INVARIcb 75166 01 52 66 _ 77193 140 70005 771168 0005 PDAR fkb 78174 PDAR cb 5 PD31 bz 78174 2 PD06 s700 8 174 oo FIGURE 94 CHANNELS SORTED BY DISTANCE TO EVENT View Zoom The Zoom submenu provides a number of options that expand the time scale so that more waveform detail is visible The options are shown in Figure 95 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chap
191. ent s arrivals and sometimes with the event s waveforms C CDE Common Desktop Environment channel Component of motion or distinct stream of data Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions click Select an element on the screen by posi tioning the pointer over the element then pressing and immediately releasing the mouse button coda Signal of a given phase which follows the initial waveform of that phase coda phase Detection found within the envelope of asingle phase an otherwise unidentified phase of unknown path designated as tx Px Hx Tx Ix or Sx coherent Quality of having a fixed phase relation ship as signals from a wavefront detected on numerous seismic or infra sonic array station elements coherent beam Beam formed from unrectified waveform data usually zero meaned which uti lizes phase information in the waveform to enhance coherent energy at the azi muth and slowness of the beam and to suppress random noise command Expression that can be input to a com puter system to initiate an action or affect the execution of a computer pro gram Common Desktop Environment Desktop graphical user interface that comes with SUN Solaris Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Glossary V component 1 One dimension of a three dimen sional signal 2 The v
192. enu option zooms into one eighth of the previously displayed window To expand the window by 8 1 Choose View Zoom Expand Window by 8 You need not select an event or channel ARS zooms into a window centered on one eighth the previously dis played window The time scale is expanded by eight View Zoom Zoom on Arrival The Zoom on Arrival menu option zooms in on a selected arrival to expand detail on either side of the arrival To zoom on arrival 1 Select a single arrival 2 Choose View Zoom Zoom on Arrival ARS zooms into a two minute window centered around the selected arrival Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual eo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV View gt Zoom gt Zoom on Origin The Zoom on Origin menu option adjusts the waveform display to include all arriv als associated to the selected event This action may zoom out as well as in depending on the current zoom level To zoom on origin 1 Select an event 2 Choose View gt Zoom gt Zoom on Origin The time scale of the waveform display adjusts so that all associated arrivals appear within the displayed time window View gt Unzoom The Unzoom options generally undo or perform the opposite tasks from the Zoom options They compress the time scale so that more of the waveform data may be seen in the display Compressing the waveform display also ha
193. eoretical arrival times for phases associated to an event align ver tically on the ARS waveform display AlphaList ARS List of stations and phases con tributing to an S H l event location analyst Personnel responsible for reviewing and revising the results of automatic process ing arid Arrival identifier Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 array Collection of sensors distributed over a finite area usually in a cross triangle or concentric pattern and referred to as single station arrival Signal that has been associated to an event First the Global Association GA software associates the signal to an event Later during interactive process ing many arrivals are confirmed and improved by visual inspection ARS Analyst Review Station This application provides tools for a human analyst to refine and improve the event bulletin by interactive analysis associate Assign an arrival to an S H I event associated phase Phase that is associated with an 5 event attribute 1 Database column 2 Characteristic of an item specifically a quantitative measure of a S H I arrival such as azi muth slowness period or amplitude Glossary azimuth Direction in degrees clockwise with respect to North from a station to an event B back azimuth Direction in degrees from an event to the station background noise Natural
194. er Manual eo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures A drag action requires that you press the left mouse button while moving the pointer a click drag release operation Drag actions were used in the previous section to select submenu items in one step Another example is to use the drag action to move an object such as in manually resizing a display window This is done by moving the cursor to the corner of the window clicking on the corner object and dragging the corner to a new location making the window larger or smaller Release the mouse when the desired size is set Often the data presented in a display are too large to fit completely in the available window size Scroll bars allow you to control which portion of the data to display in the window Scroll bars are vertical horizontal depending on the nature of the dis played data To scroll click or drag in various portions of the scroll bar Scheme and Shell Windows A number of applications provide a Scheme or shell window in addition to their graphical window These are text windows that display additional status and error messages They start in an iconified or minimized state to take up as little screen area as possible You can double click on them to open them Those applications that provide a Scheme interface notably ARS and Map are able to interpret Scheme commands in the shell window An introduction to ARS Scheme is pr
195. ers is computed and displayed as shown in Figure 18 CCPPP 0635 08 Ey eMe mere bee 0 5 FiGURE 18 ViEW PERIOD 2 AND CORRESPONDING AMPLITUDE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Deselecting All Objects You can deselect all channels and arrivals by clicking once with the left mouse but ton anywhere in the waveform display except on a channel name or phase label that is click any place in the waveform display that will not select an object This action deselects all currently selected channels and arrivals in the waveform display Selected events remain selected Time Bar The time bar is located beneath the horizontal scroll bar for the waveform display as shown in Figure 19 This part of the ARS window presents the time scale for the currently displayed waveforms and varies depending on the originally loaded time window the current zoom level and the position of the horizontal scroll bar The time scale units are displayed at the bottom of the time bar Time scaling is delin eated in units of 1 10 seconds seconds minutes hours or days The date and time of the left edge of the viewed time window is displayed at the bottom left of the time bar FIGURE 19 TIME BAR IN ARS Two dynamic time scale markers labeled t and t2 are displayed on the time scale Each marker is labeled with its current offset on the
196. ertically or hori zontally oriented north or east sensor of a station used to measure the dimen sion 3 One of the parts of a system also referred to as a module or unit Computer Software Component Functionally or logically distinct part of a computer software configuration item typically an aggregate of two or more software units Computer Software Configuration Item Aggregation of software that is desig nated for configuration management and treated as a single entity in the con figuration management process configuration 1 hardware Arrangement of a com puter system or components as defined by the number nature and interconnec tion of its parts 2 software Set of adjustable parameters usually stored in files which control the behavior of appli cations at run time CPU Central Processing Unit crash Sudden and complete failure of a com puter system or component CSC Computer Software Component CSCI Computer Software Configuration Item Glossary cvar Variable accessible to the C program ming language Specifically cvars are name value pairs of character strings implemented in the C code D DACS Distributed Application Control System This software supports inter application message passing and process manage ment dataday One analysis day or 24 hours of S H I analysis the time period covered by one event bulletin defining Arrival attribute such as arr
197. es for each com ponent and requirements particular to a given release This section provides instal lation and configuration details specific to the Interactive Analysis software These details should be extracted and made part of a general installation plan The instal lation team is encouraged to review the release notes README files and manual pages provided with any particular release Obtaining Released Software The software is obtained via File Transfer Protocol FTP from a remote site or via a physical medium such as tape or CD ROM The software and associated configu ration data files are stored as one or more Tape Archive tar files The software and data files are first transferred via FTP or copied from the physical medium to an appropriate location on a local hard disk The tar files are then untarred into a standard UNIX directory structure Hardware Mapping You must select the hardware on which to run the software components Software components are generally mapped to hardware to be roughly consistent with the software configuration model Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PACKAGES The Interactive Analysis software is dependent on a number of third party soft ware packages Some of these are COTS and some are public domain PD as shown in Table 30 A complete l
198. etical Arrivals 2 Select an event to be analyzed at teleseismic distances 3 Choose Seismic gt Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals Teleseismic theoretical arrivals are placed at their predicted arrival times on the waveform display Theoretical arrival times are based on the event s current location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 4 If you update the location remove the theoretical arrivals from the dis play by choosing View Remove Theoreticals or by selecting ThO from the toolbar then redisplay them to update the arrival times for the new location Seismic Add Seismic Arrival Remarks The Add Seismic Arrival Remarks menu option adds a remark regarding a specific seismic arrival This remark may then be read by other analysts or during bulletin quality control Unlike other Remarks options in the ARS Edit menu see Edit gt Remarks on page 96 you can only add a preformatted remark using this option To add seismic arrival remarks 1 Select a single arrival on a seismic station 2 Choose Seismic Add Seismic Arrival Remarks A list of remarks appears as shown in Figure 116 3 Choose the appropriate comment then click Done The remark is attached to the arrival 4 To view the remark choose Edit gt Remarks gt Show Remarks on Selected as described on page 98 Interactive
199. eturn status which it posts in a return message to the sender of the original message Each tuxshell uses the configuration data in tuxshell queuename par to configure the command line for DFX for its specific application recall seismo recall hydro beamer beam on the fly The path to each tuxshell S par file CMS CONFIG app config distributed tux shell interactive is provided by tmboot from tuxconfig Log Files Tuxedo writes a number of log files which can be useful for diagnostic purposes The Tuxedo provided daemons write system logs in the directories var tuxedo rel analysis ULOGS ULOG jday A crontab entry is normally installed it purges ULOG files after ten days Tusxhell writes its logs in the files LOGDIR jdate interactive tuxshell role host machine pid where role is Beamer DFXRecall or DFXHydroRecall The matching DFX log file is written in the same directory with a similar filename See Detection and Feature Extraction DFX on page 362 Tuxedo Events and dman application is discussed specifically on page 364 however several fea tures of Tuxedo are used by dman to monitor message traffic and track interactive application run status In addition to messages Tuxedo provides the ability to send events to client applications dman subscribes to Tuxedo events which get sent whenever a client application registers or de registers with Tuxedo libipc takes advantage
200. evO 1 All of the applications use common software libraries to communicate using the Tuxedo framework As a Tuxedo client dman presents data maintained by the Tuxedo framework in its sta tus window A detailed description of Tuxedo as it applies to the interactive sub system is presented in Tuxedo Files on page 353 in Chapter 4 Each analyst workstation can support up to three simultaneous ARS sessions identi fied by agent numbers one through three Each session has its own dman applica tion tracking the other applications for that session The window title in Figure 239 shows 1 dman identifying this dman as monitoring activity for session 1 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 302 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V Map XfkDisplay messages SpectraPlot PolariPlot WEAssess messages WERequest messages messages FIGURE 239 DMAN STATUS WINDOW The dman window displays the current run status for each application in a session The icon beside each application name changes color based on the application s status Table 26 lists the colors representing the different application states A graph which shows the number of messages in its message queue is displayed to the right of each application name This number is usually zero because messages are processed very rapidly However queue sizes that remain above zero
201. event This option performs the same function as Beam which is located in the toolbar To use the Beam Array tool 1 Select an event 2 Select either the fk beam or cb beam on an array station a cb derived channel is always returned 3 Choose Tools Select Beam Array A list of phases appears 4 Select the phase on which to beam This determines the theoretical arrival time around which the beam interval should be created An ARS dialogue box appears during beam processing locking the ARS screen Beaming should take approximately 15 seconds after which time the ARS screen is released and the beamed channel is displayed The new channel is sorted by distance from the event and is aligned on the theo retical arrival time of the selected phase Tools Map The Map menu option launches the Map application Map presents a graphical representation of the earth s surface to which you can send objects for geographi cal display see Map Procedures on page 225 The Map submenu shown in Fig ure 112 provides options to choose a preferred color for plotting the object on the map Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V FiGURE 112 MAP SUBMENU To launch Map for the purpose of plotting the location of an event a station an arrival s station or a combination 1 Select the desired objects 2 C
202. event or channel The time scale of the waveform display adjusts to display the entire time window originally loaded into ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View gt Unzoom gt Compress Window by 2 The Compress Window by 2 menu option compresses the waveform display by a factor of 2 If 60 seconds of data are displayed Compress Window by 2 com presses the waveforms to show 120 seconds of data To compress the window by a factor of 2 1 Choose View Unzoom Compress Window by 2 You need not select an event or channel All channels waveform data are compressed by a factor of two Con versely the time window of the waveform display is twice as long View Unzoom Compress Window by 8 The Compress Window by 8 option compresses the waveform display by a factor of 8 For example if 60 seconds of data are displayed this option compresses the waveforms to show 8 minutes of data To compress the window by a factor of 8 1 Choose View Unzoom Compress Window by 8 You need not select an event or channel All channels waveform data are compressed by a factor of 8 Conversely the time window of the waveform display is eight times as long View Shift The Shift submenu options provide additional horizontal scrolling options to those provided by the scroll bar Clicking in the scroll ba
203. f measurement View Filter Filtering is a technique commonly used for enhancing waveform signal to noise While filtering can improve the appearance of waveform features it can also intro duce signal distortion Filtering and other signal enhancement techniques are dis cussed further in Techniques sections in both IDC5 2 1 and IDC6 5 2RevO 1 The Filter submenu provides several display options as shown in Figure 85 FIGURE 85 FILTER OPTIONS UNDER VIEW MENU View Filter Show Filter List The Show Filter List menu option displays a selection window with a list of avail able filters Figure 86 The filter list window remains displayed until you intention ally close it The window is displayed on the right hand screen Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V The list contains the filters most commonly used to enhance waveform appear ance The filters in the default list are all band pass filters with the exception of one band rejection filter The filter list is organized by technology Filters commonly applied to hydroacoustic signals are at the top of the list seismic filters are in the middle of the list and infrasound filters are at the bottom of the list Typically hydroacoustic signals are seen at higher band pass frequencies than the other time series technologies Infrasonic signals a
204. face Scheme Functions C Functions Data Objects FIGURE 257 ANALYST VIEW OF ARS The app defaults ARS X resource file provides the default layouts for the ARS menus and toolbar buttons and assigns the Scheme functions that are called when the analyst activates them It also defines the layout of much of the rest of ARS s graphical interface including AlphaList column titles and widths This file pro vides the minimum X resources to allow ARS to run It should not be modified The app resources ARS file provides site specific X resource customization In the case of the IDC this file almost completely redefines the ARS menus toolbar layout and Scheme function assignments The mkCMsSuser script installs a default Xdefaults file in the analyst s home directory This X resource file specifies col ors fonts and locations for many of the ARS windows Together these two files customize the appearance of the IDC ARS The ARS Scheme configuration is defined by the following files Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures CMS HOME scheme intrinsic scm CMS HOME scheme siod scm CMS HOME scheme general scm CMS HOME scheme math scm CMS HOME scheme libpar scm CMS HOME scheme ARSdefault scm ARSinit CMS CONFIG app config interactive ARS IDC scm ARS load The first
205. far as possible 2 Record information regarding symptoms and conditions at the time of the software failure 3 Retain copies of relevant sections of application log files 4 Contact the provider or maintainer of the software for problem resolu tion if local changes of the environment or configuration are not suffi cient Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures This chapter provides instructions for installing and configuring the software and includes the following topics Preparation wm Third party Software Packages UNIX System and Common Desktop Environment Executable Files a Configuration Data Files m Database Tuxedo Files wm Application specific Configuration Initiating Operations a Validating Installation Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation Procedures PREPARATION The Interactive Analysis software is one processing component of a larger 5 monitoring system Successful operation of the applications is dependent on suc cessful installation and operation of the processing components upstream of the applications Installation of the entire system should follow a carefully coordinated plan including system infrastructure design installation procedur
206. fields specify the mini mum and maximum distance of stations whose P and Pn phases are to be included in the magnitude calculation The default is set to a minimum distance of 20 0 degrees and a maximum distance of 100 0 degrees Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures DESCRIPTIONS OF ADDITIONAL ANALYST TOOLS The tools described in the remaining areas of Chapter 2 support and enhance the capability provided in ARS These tools were introduced in the ARS area Tools Menu on page 138 XFKDISPLAY PROCEDURES XfkDisplay is an interactive application that computes an arrival s azimuth and slowness using data from either arrays or 3 C stations It presents a color coded projection of signal strength computed with respect to the north south and east west components of slowness Station to event azimuth is derived from the coor dinates of peak energy Using this tool you can assess the quality of the signal for example to determine if the signal s azimuth compares favorably with a theoretical event location or if the measured slowness of an arrival is compatible with its des ignated phase type Because of its ability to separate and distinguish signal energy in different areas of the slowness plane XfkDisplay is particularly helpful in mixed event situations that is cases where the signal energy from different events are recorded at a
207. fore moving the arrival to the new time Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To undo the last retime action 1 Select the most recently retimed arrival 2 Choose Edit Retime Undo Last Retime The arrival returns to its position immediately before the last retime action This function applies only to the most recently retimed arrival and exchanges only the most recently saved arrival time Applying Undo Last Retime successively toggles between the previous two retime positions Edit Retime Reset Arrival Time The Reset Arrival Time menu option moves an arrival back to its original position the arrival time specified in the SEL3 database To reset an arrival time 1 Select an arrival 2 Choose Edit Retime Reset Arrival Time The arrival moves to its original position This is the arrival s position in the waveform as determined by the Automatic Processing system Edit Associate The Associate menu option associates one or more arrivals to an event Associating an arrival to an event indicates that the signal energy originated from the selected event and that the phase arrival time and measured characteristics should contrib ute to the event s location and magnitude solutions To associate an arrival s to an event 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more arrivals To select multiple arr
208. g its amplitude scaling as shown in Figure 16 Scrolling or zooming resets to auto scaling JNU bz F 71 79 E FIGURE 16 WAVEFORM AFTER OFFSET ADJUSTMENT Using mouse actions within the waveform trace you can display demeaned wave form counts or obtain a calibrated measure of period and amplitude Right click where desired in the waveform display to show the time and relative amplitude at Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures that time as shown in Figure 17 Because amplitude counts are demeaned and pos sibly filtered they appear as positive or negative floating point numbers for exam ple the 0 8 value shown in Figure 17 7 2 01 248 0 FIGURE 17 VIEW SELECTED TIME AND AMPLITUDE COUNTS Period and amplitude are measured based on a selected arrival To measure the period and amplitude 1 Select an arrival by left clicking on the arrival label The arrival label is sur rounded with an open box when the cursor is in the selection area and with a closed box when selected 2 Using the right mouse button select a maximum or minimum within a few seconds after the selected arrival time Time and counts are displayed as shown in Figure 17 3 Using the right mouse button select a maximum or minimum on the waveform one full period later The half period and calibrated amplitude in nanomet
209. g the Parzen taper Hanning Computes spectrum using the Hanning taper Hamming Computes spectrum using the Hamming taper Blackman Computes spectrum using the Blackman taper Welch Computes spectrum using the Welch taper 10 Cosine Computes spectrum using the 10 percent Cosine taper None Does not taper the waveform when computing a spectrum Demean Remove Subtracts the average value of the sampled wave Mean form before computing the spectrum Linear Trend Subtracts the best fit line from the waveform data before computing the spectrum Normalize Normalizes the spectra assigns the highest value power of O dB dB Scale Changes the power axis vertical axis from a dB scale to a nm Hz scale Inst Correction Applies an instrument correction to the currently displayed spectrum the instrument correction ref erence is provided by ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o Chapter 2 Operational Procedures IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions TABLE 24 EDIT MENU FUNCTIONS CONTINUED Header Function Sub function Description Units Displacement Displays the spectral power units of displacement Velocity Displays the spectral power units of velocity Acceleration Displays the spectral power units of acceleration Clear Removes all displayed spectra from the display Redraw Refreshes the display by redrawing the currently d
210. ge parses it into a command line for DFX and launches DFX Each queue s tuxshell is configured to include an appropriate par file reference on the DFX command line When DFX completes tuxshell captures its exit status and returns a message to ARS with that exit status Processing details and error conditions are written to the tuxshell and DFX log files shown below ARS and DFX use temporary database tables to exchange data and the ARS message contains references to these tables The tuxshell for each queue is configured with one of the following par files in the CMS CONFIG app config distributed tuxshell interactive direc tory tuxshell BOTF par tuxshell RSEISMO par tuxshell RHYDRO par These par files in turn specify the appropriate DFX par file CMS CONFIG app config DFX DFX botf par CMS CONFIG app config DFX DFX recall par CMS CONFIG app config DFX DFX hydro recall par The following Scheme files appropriate for each DFX task are specified by the DFX par file CMS CONFIG app config DFX scheme DFX botf scm CMS CONFIG app config DFX scheme DFX recall scm CMS CONFIG app config DFX scheme DFX hydro recall scm The tuxshell daemons for DFX write their log files to LOGDIR jdate interactive tuxshell role host pid and the DFX applications write their log files to Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installati
211. group of files provide the fundamental Scheme functionality common to all the IDC applications that use Scheme The ARSdefault scm file provides ARS with the bulk of its Scheme functionality This file is maintained by ARS developers and should not be modified The mkCMsuser script installs a default ARSinit file in the analyst s home direc tory After loading ARSdefault scm ARS loads ARSinit if it can find it in the analyst s home directory As installed ARSinit loads IDC scm which provides IDC custom Scheme functionality This file redefines functions ARSdefault scm and adds new functions Many of the menu assignments cus tomized by app resources ARS are made to Scheme functions in IDC scm The ARSinit file also directs loading of the ARS 10oad file from the analyst s home directory This file specifies the database time window network and initial channel display list for the ARS session The file is created for each session by the analyst log script through a call to the ARSscan script When ARS is run its UNIX command line must specify a parameter or par file The application which starts ARS is configured to specify CMS CONFIG app config interactive ARS ARS par This par file specifies the paths to the many configuration data files such as travel time tables and station correction tables which ARS depends on for its computations The file contains a number of other parameter definitions as well ARS par referen
212. gt Scale Types On To display scale types 1 If the scale type is undisplayed choose Options gt Scale Types gt Scale Types On The waveform scaling resize option is displayed Figure 110 Options gt Scale Types gt Scale Types Off To undisplay scale types 1 If the waveform scaling resize option is displayed choose Options gt Scale Types Off The scale type disappears from all channels on the waveform display Tools Menu The Tools Menu lists other applications in the interactive suite that ARS can access to perform specific analysis tasks For example XfkDisplay provides an interactive display in which you can acquire more detailed information about the azimuth and slowness of an arrival The SpectraPlot tool provides spectral analysis on a selected waveform segment The applications in the Tools menu communicate with ARS using an IPC called Tuxedo The Tuxedo client dman monitors application status and starts each application as necessary to respond properly to messages sent from ARS see dman on page 364 The Tools Menu is shown in Figure 111 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures AEQ ARS colors Beam Array Red Map White PolariPlot Black SpectraPlot gt Green XfkDisplay Magenta Request Auxiliary Data gt Orange Blue Send Origins to Map Request Data Show Request
213. he auxiliary data requests see Interactive Aux iliary Data Request IADR Procedures on page 248 Tools Request Auxiliary Data Show Request Status The Show Request Status submenu option tracks the status of auxiliary data requests The Interactive Auxiliary Data Request tool also displays the request sta tus dialogue box Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures To show request status 1 Choose Tools Request Auxiliary Data Show Request Status You need not select anything in ARS because ADR displays all requests for the loaded time period This includes any requests made by the Automatic Processing software before the SEL3 was created these requests are dis played in ADR as SEL1 and SEL2 If not already active ADR launches IADR is currently configured to dis play the status dialogue on the screen opposite the ARS screen See 1 Interactive Auxiliary Data Request IADR Procedures on page 248 for checking status and displaying data You can display the ADR status for the duration of the ARS session to monitor subsequent data requests Seismic Menu The Seismic menu provides options relevant to analyzing seismic data as shown in Figure 114 DFX Seismic Show Horizontals Remove Horizontals Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals Add Seismic Arriv
214. he database so that interactive modifications can be saved Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 1 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 1 Technical Instructions Introduction 1 analyst log ARS load 4 dman DM IADR Db databases D IPC messages gt SpectraPlot C FIGURE 3 INTERACTIVE PROCESSING FLOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Introduction Features and Capabilities ARS combines the three S H I time series monitoring technologies into one dis play This means that multi technology events can be refined or created in ARS ARS provides a wide range of functionality for viewing and analyzing both wave form data and derived parameters The data presentation in the waveform display can be adjusted by zooming sorting filtering and adding or removing displayed channels Arrivals can be added deleted retimed compared with theoretical arrival times and associated or disassociated with events Through ARS you refine create or reject events and save these reviewed events to the database for further processing in producing a bulletin ARS is supported by a group of analysis tools that perform expanded or specialized analysis Examples a XfkDi
215. he event has been modified one or more associated arrivals have been modified Locating the event will return it to blue red orange An arrival originally associated to this event has been reassociated to another event green The event has been saved brown The event has been discarded Waveforms The waveform display is located below the event list This display contains horizon tally and vertically scrolling traces of the waveform data for each channel Chan nels are arrayed vertically and the horizontal axis represents time Labeled arrival bars are superimposed on the waveform traces These labeled arrival bars show the time and phase type for each channel s arrivals visible in the current time window A typical waveform display for one channel is shown in Figure 13 To the left of the waveform trace is a waveform label containing the channel name and amplitude scale These components are discussed further in the next section The applied fil ter if present is displayed at the far right of the waveform see View Filter on page 106 Scroll bars to the left of and below the waveform display allow you to move vertically through the available channels or back and forth in time through the available arrivals Pn P Sx Pn PnSx 10 2 55 3BP causa FiGURE 13 ONE CHANNEL WAVEFORM TRACE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions
216. he mouse to the desired option or submenu then release the button The submenus are highlighted and open one by one when you drag the mouse over them Using this method the menu options close on release The click drag release method can be used however deeply the submenus are nested To select the desired menu option drag the mouse through the submenus until the desired option is highlighted then release the mouse This activates the function In addition to menus ARS and several other applications provide toolbars with labeled buttons which provide quick access to commonly used functions To acti vate a function from the toolbar click on the toolbar button once using your left mouse button Using Common Mouse Actions Several mouse button actions are commonly used in the Interactive Analysis Sub system applications Often you will need to select an object such as an arrival or channel in ARS or a station location in Map To select an object position the mouse pointer over the object and click on the object once using your left mouse button When objects are selected they become highlighted Another common action is double clicking This involves clicking the left mouse button twice in quick succession without moving the pointer For example the ARS Filter Selection window presents a list of filter options Double clicking a filter option both selects and applies the filter in one operation Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software Us
217. he t1 position and waveform appear as in Figure 63 Using the left mouse button click on the t1 bar at the bottom of the ARS screen and drag it to the desired location A vertical line appears and extends from the t1 bar up through the waveform while you drag The t1 position and waveform appear as in Figure 64 3 After placing t1 choose Edit gt Retime gt Retime Arrival The arrival moves to the selected position as shown in Figure 65 FIGURE 62 ARRIVAL S ORIGINAL POSITION FIGURE 63 APPLY MIDDLE MOUSE BUTTON ON WAVEFORM Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 64 APPLY LEFT MOUSE BUTTON ON T1 FIGURE 65 APPLY RETIME ARRIVAL If the new position is more than four seconds from the original arrival position and the retiming restriction applies ARS displays a warning in the message window as shown in Figure 66 You may add a new arrival if retiming requires positioning more than four seconds from the original arrival s original position FIGURE 66 MORE THAN 4 SECOND RETIME WARNING Edit Retime Undo Last Retime The Undo Last Retime menu option un does your last retime action on an arrival This option places the arrival in its previous position on the waveform The options Retime Arrival Undo Last Retime and Reset Arrival Time all save a copy of the current arrival time be
218. hnical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V Hide A Hide button resides at the bottom of the Allocation window To undisplay the Allocation window select Hide The window disappears Qc The QC button in the Control window displays the QC window as shown in Figure 253 A QC button is in the Allocation window which displays the QC window The functions in the QC window are the group of functions performed just prior to publishing a bulletin F 09 37 22 m RE Day 2000229 2000 Aug 16 gt Bulletin completed at 00 08 22 20 40 32 by bahavar RebDone submitted at 00 08 23 14 27 05 by geary Total number of events 33 First event at 00 04 26 Last event at 23 31 19 QC Complete Bulletin Complete FIGURE 253 QC WINDOW The QC window includes a number of status messages These include the number of events in the dataday the time of the first event the time of the last event completion of the bulletin quality check and initiation of the bulletin publication process rebdone These last two messages are bulletin publication milestones which along with your milestones logged in the allocation table form a bulletin Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures analysis history which is stored in the allocate hour database table The two b
219. hoose Tools Map option to select the desired color for the object to be plotted The ARS colors submenu option plots the object in the color it has in ARS The Send Origins to Map option sends all origins in the loaded time period to Map If not already active Map launches Map is configured to display on the screen opposite the ARS display screen The selected objects are plotted on the Map Map runs until you stop it You can send new objects to Map at any time Tools PolariPlot The PolariPlot menu option launches PolariPlot PolariPlot is a polarization tool used to calculate rectilinearly azimuth and slowness along the time series of an incoming wavefront recorded on three orthogonal seismological components see PolariPlot Procedures on page 274 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To launch 1 Select either a 3 C station or a 3 C element of an array station The traces may be either filtered or unfiltered but all 3 C channels must be selected 2 Position the t1 and t2 markers to delineate the time interval of data to be processed 3 Choose Tools PolariPlot If not already active PolariPlot launches PolariPlot displays rectilinearity azimuth and slowness traces for the selected station and time interval PolariPlot runs until you stop it you can send
220. iated arrivals become highlighted in the waveform display indi cating that they have been selected 3 Perform other operations on the selected arrivals Edit gt Select gt Select Associated Depth Phases You may be required to calculate snrs on all associated time defining depth phases The Select Associated Depth Phases menu option selects all depth phases which can then be run through DFX processing as a group This option eliminates the risk of missing a depth phase ARS recognizes pP sP pPKP pPKPbc pPKPab and pPKiKP as depth phases To select associated depth phases 1 Select an event 2 Choose Edit Select Associated Depth Phases If depth phases are present they become highlighted in the waveform display indicating that they have all been selected 3 Apply other functions to the selected depth phases typically DFX pro cessing Edit Rename The Rename menu option renames single arrivals or groups of arrivals to any phase name defined in ARS The Rename submenu items are shown in Figure 59 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FIGURE 59 RENAME OPTIONS IN EDIT MENU For both options listed under the Rename menu ARS responds by displaying a list of phase names to choose from Edit gt Rename gt Rename sole Selected to The Rename sole Selected to menu option renames
221. ign on the theoretical arrival time for T H placing it in the middle of the ARS display Hydro Align Selected on T The Align Selected on T menu option aligns selected stations on T To align selected stations on T 1 Make certain that hydroacoustic waveform data are displayed 2 Select one or more stations 3 Choose Hydro Align Selected on T The selected station s waveform data align on T placing them in the mid dle of the ARS display Hydro Hydro Time Bars On Before you review hydroacoustic arrivals the Automatic Processing software eval uates each hydroacoustic arrival and records their properties in the database Two of these are the time at which the arrival signal begins and the time at which it ends These times are also known as signal onset and termination times Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 153 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures You can interactively adjust the onset and termination times of a hydroacoustic sig nal The Hydro Time Bars On menu option allows you to see where the Automatic Processing software placed the onset termination times To display hydroacoustic time bars 1 Select a single hydroacoustic arrival 2 Choose Hydro Hydro Time Bars On Two small vertical bars with arrows on top appear in the waveform as shown in Figure 118 These bars represent the most recently calculated onset termin
222. ime azimuth and slowness undefining for all arrivals associated to an event Undefin ing means that the parameters do not contribute to the event location computa tion To make time azimuth and slowness undefining 1 Select an event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Choose Edit Undefine time az amp slow By displaying AlphaList you can observe that the time azimuth and slowness parameters for all phases are labelled n for non defining This indicates that these arrival parameters will not be contributing to the event location Slowness is considered unreliable for Infrasonic data and is not normally used T phases often have unreliable time azimuth and slowness owing to the uncertainty of their travel path Edit Undefine az amp slow Time azimuth and slowness are arrival parameters that can contribute to an event s location solution The Undefine az amp slow menu option makes all associ ated arrivals azimuth and slowness parameters undefining but leaves the time parameters defining Because arrival time is often the most reliably measured parameter you may wish to prevent only the less reliable azimuth and slowness parameters from contributing to an event s location solution For large seismic events with many arrivals you should use time as the sole defining parameter for
223. ime ARS interacts with the database save discard undiscard or unfreeze an event You can also manually save recov ery data at your discretion ARS can be configured to write recovery data either in your home directory or on your workstation s local disk to optimize performance INVENTORY This section lists the files database tables and database accounts that comprise the Interactive Analysis Subsystem The software is one processing component of a larger S H I monitoring system therefore these items do not exist in isolation and are installed as part of the full monitoring system Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction Files CMSS X11 Map xgksfonts CMSS X11 app defaults AEQ CMSS X11 app defaults ARS CMSS X11 app defaults Map CMSS X11 app defaults PolariPlot CMSS X11 app defaults SpectraPlot CMSS X11 app defaults XfkDisplay CMSS bin AEQ CMSS bin ARS CMSS bin DFX CMSS bin HART CMSS bin IADR CMSS bin Map CMSS bin PolariPlot CMSS bin SpectraPlot CMSS bin WaveExpert CMSS bin xXfkDisplay CMSS bin dman CMSS bin exec popup CMSS bin start hart server CMSS bin tuxshell CMSS config app config DFX par CMSS config app config DFX par CMSS config app config DFX scheme scm CMSS config app config distributed dm
224. ime for is positioned in the middle of the ARS display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Infra Unshow Infra Channels The Unshow Infra Channels menu option undisplays all infrasonic channels in one operation When analyzing one technology at a time undisplaying infrasound data relieves you from scrolling through unnecessary data To undisplay infrasonic channels 1 If infrasonic stations are displayed choose Infra Unshow Infra Chan nels You need not select an event or channel All infrasonic channels are removed from the display Infra Align Infra on I You may need to align infrasonic data for example after creating an event or updating an event location To align infrasonic channels on I 1 Make certain that infrasonic data are displayed 2 Choose Infra gt Align Infra on I The infrasonic waveforms align on the theoretical arrival time for The theoretical arrival time for is positioned in the middle of the ARS display Infra Select all Infra Channels This option adds all infrasonic channels to the selection list To select all infrasonic channels 1 Make certain that infrasonic waveform data are displayed 2 Choose Infra Select all Infra Channels The infrasonic channels are selected Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5
225. improperly defined Rejecting an event invalidates it so that it does not appear in the Reviewed Event Bulletin REB To reject an event 1 Select and analyze an event 2 After determining the event is not valid discard it by selecting Rej from the ARS toolbar ARS prompts you with a list of reasons for rejection as shown in Figure 46 3 Select one or more discard reason then click Done The event identification evid analyst ID and rejection reasons are added to the discard table The event label turns brown as shown in Fig ure 47 This indicates that the event has been discarded and will not become part of the published bulletin FiGURE 46 REASONS FOR REJECTING EVENT Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures _ 20868060 20868110 20868640 45 20 58 53 44 141 22 102124 122 22220238 3 126 FiGURE 47 REJECTED EVENT QC Quality Check The QC toolbar button performs a quality check on events These checks notify you of timing and residual errors improper associations invalid phase names improper defining parameters errors on depth phase associations and other less common errors Normally you will want to wait until completing your analysis of an event before invoking QC To QC an event 1 Select QC from the ARS toolbar The screen becomes locked while the quality check is run
226. imuth in degrees from north is displayed to the right separated by a slash Amplitude Scaling and Measurement A waveform amplitude scale bar is located between the waveform trace and the channel name This bar looks like a capital letter E Waveforms are displayed as demeaned digital instrument counts By default the waveform is auto scaled so that the maximum amplitude within the display window fits into the channel s available display area The two numbers at the top and bottom of the scale bar are the waveform vertical scale and the waveform offset By clicking and dragging the middle mouse button over the waveform vertical scale top number the wave Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV form s height is scaled larger or smaller Waveform data are clipped if they extend outside the channel s display area Figures 14 and 15 show example waveforms before and after height adjustment JNU bz E pim a FIGURE 14 WAVEFORM BEFORE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT FIGURE 15 WAVEFORM AFTER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT By clicking the middle mouse button over the bottom number the scaling jumps by a factor of 10 This adjustment is often too coarse for practical use Click and move the right mouse button over the scale bar to adjust the waveform offset this method moves the waveform up and down in the waveform display without changin
227. in a dialogue box as shown in Figure 186 2 Select a map then click OK The view changes to the map you selected SelectionDialog MapSelection List World Level 1 Level2 Other North Polar 160E 63N Russia Banded Aluetians E E073229xd Mars 1 16 7 South Polar 7 20E42N 7 Russia Combined Arabia 7 norrelief 074228 Olympus World 1 110M PDE Arabia Russia Relief China ED74229xd World 1 20M China 7 078228 7 World 1 20 EastSiberia 7 Himalayas 6081228 World Europe Hmakyas India E081229xd World Pacific India Japan C E085227xd Japan i Level2 E085228xd Level i 7 Mediterrn 7 K066205xd Mongolia 7 Mongolia 7 K069205xd Scandinavia Scandinavia BE KO73205xd 7 South USSR 7 South USSR NE Ko7s206xd Urals Urals ME 73207 7 West Siberia West Siberia K074206xd K074208xd K074209xd FiGURE 186 LisT OF MAP VIEWS AVAILABLE IN MAP View View Maps Pop Map Stack Roll Map Stack Type Map Stack Swap Map Stack Using options in the View View Maps Change Map submenu you can switch to a previously displayed map Each time you display a new map the previous map is pushed on the map stack or list of previously displayed maps Using the Pop Roll and Swap map stack options you can manipulate the viewed map using views saved in the map stack The Pop option replaces the current map with the map on the top of the stack or th
228. indicate problems Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 303 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 26 DMAN COLOR SCHEME color Definition green The process is running grey The process is not running yellow The process is starting orange The process is stopping normally red The process has abnormally exited or timed out during startup black dman has polled the application and has found that it is no longer running but has no indication as to why it has stopped running Initializing dman Analyst sessions are started through analyst log using the ARS icon button By default the session is started using agent 1 but this can be set to a different agent number see analyst log Procedures on page 312 When analyst log starts a session it starts dman which in turn is configured to start ARS and WEAssess dman then starts the other applications when necessary To start an analysis session 1 Click the ARS button in analyst log dman launches In the dman window notice the icons for ARS and WEAssess turning yellow and then green This indicates that ARS and WEAssess have been launched The ARS window displays on the left screen You can also launch dman through the CDE menu The dman option in CDE is located in a pull up menu above the Start Analyst Review button Options Menu The only menu in dman is the
229. indow so that you can apply certain functions such as filtering to all chan nels at the same time To select all channels 1 Choose Edit Select All Channels You need not select an event All channels in the ARS display become highlighted indicating that they have been selected see Figure 58 2 Apply other operations to the selected channels Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Ase On Co Ph Uftr Ph P Ad Ph Rn Ph Bm Ph AIPh UnAI SBD SBU Th Th O F K Beam SICh Loc Rej Ufrz Sav 20868110 21 68194 40 20868163 _ 20868176 1208 22 57 31 29 124 23 12 38 16 176 208686 _ 20868130 22 10 37 24 122 22 20 29 3 126 22 26 47 17 156 FIGURE 58 ARS DISPLAY WITH ALL CHANNELS SELECTED Edit Select Associated Arrivals You may want to perform processing on all associated arrivals for example to send them all to XfkDisplay display them in AlphaList or plot them in Map The Associated Arrivals menu option selects all arrivals associated with the selected event To select associated arrivals 1 Select an event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 2 Choose Edit Select Associated Arrivals All assoc
230. ing a list of selected objects However when ARS receives the message all objects selected in ARS become deselected then everything selected in Map becomes selected in ARS The ARS waveform display zooms on the newly selected origin Waveforms are aligned on P phase and are sorted by distance to the event In spite of the function s name there must be one and only one origin selected in Map or this function will fail ANOMALOUS EVENT QUALIFIER AEQ PROCEDURES AEQ Window Layout and Organization AEQ provides an indication of how statistically anomalous an analyzed event is AEQ reports the probability that the event is in an unusual location or has unusual magnitude or depth compared to previous events that have occurred in that region The rational that AEQ uses to flag events is described in GSE92 Figure 193 shows the output of an event that has been assessed by AEQ A sepa rate AEQ report window is generated for each event queried The report consists of the event s origin identifier four event attributes rated for anomaly between zero and one and an overall assessment value also ranging between zero and one Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV AEQ Results AEQ report for origin 20888022 Degree of Membershipi Class 0 00 High magnitude 100 Low seismicity areas 0 00 Deep 100 Low seismicity at
231. ion and magnitude of the event the average noise level and its standard deviation at the station and the signal to noise detection threshold IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions process Function or set of functions in an appli cation that perform a task processing unit Software component of a larger entity such as a program product Bulletins data and other information collected produced and distributed by the IDC pull down Small list of selectable objects such as menu items which appears below a menu heading Q Qc Quality Control query Request for specific data from a data base QuickTip Pop up informational message identify ing or explaining a user interface item such as a menu item or function button QuickTips display when the user hovers the mouse cursor over the interface item R RAM Random Access Memory Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions raw waveform Waveform data as they are received from a station REB Reviewed Event Bulletin the bulletin formed of all S H l events that have passed analyst inspection and quality assurance review recall processing Type of DFX processing that updates arrival features based on changes made during analyst review recipe Collection of related parameters used in performing a specific task Recipe parameters are usually defined in
232. ions W Operational Procedures To select an object click the left mouse button on the object when the cursor crosshairs are over it You can repeat this action to select additional objects The selected objects turn black The Edit Edit Selected Objects Store Selected Objects submenu option saves the selected object in the memory buffer Then the Edit gt Edit Selected Objects gt Recall Stored Objects submenu option recalls the stored objects returning them to the display Storing new objects replaces any objects previously stored The Deselect Objects submenu option deselects any objects currently selected in the Map display The Edit Edit Selected Objects Remove Selected Objects sub menu option removes any selected objects from the Map display To remove a selection of objects from the Map display 1 Use the left mouse button to click the objects to be removed 2 Choose Edit Edit Selected Objects Remove Selected Objects The selected objects are removed from the Map display Edit Edit Layers Layers provide a means of grouping objects drawn on the Map When Map is first displayed a default layer is created this is the layer on which you plot objects events phases and so forth until you create another layer You can stack layers grouping different objects on top of each other and change the ordering of layers The Edit Layers options are shown in Figure 179 View Options Analyst Tools Object Datab
233. ions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures View Filter Add Filter to List The Add Filter to List menu option creates a non standard filter and adds it to the default filter list To add a filter to the default filter list 1 Choose View Filter gt Add Filter to List You need not select a channel The filter list should not be displayed 2 A filter editing dialogue box appears as shown in Figure 88 This filter editing dialogue box is described in View gt Filter gt Edit Filter List on page 108 3 When all parameters are set to their desired values click Done 4 Choose View Filter Show Filter List to redisplay the filter list and access the new filter View Filter Add Cascade Filter to List This option creates a cascade filter meaning that each filter in a specific list can be applied in sequence to a selected waveform To add a cascade filter to the list 1 Choose View Filter Add Cascade Filter to List You need not select a station or channel or display the filter ARS displays the default filter list 2 Select one filter to add on to to create a cascade or sequence filter A screen is displayed with options to add a filter This screen is identical to the one described in View gt Filter gt Edit Filter List on page 108 3 Select options for an additional filter then click Done in the edit window A cascade filter comprised of the original filter
234. isplayed Outlines are displayed by invoking the Map Outlines Show Map Outlines option Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To remove the map outlines 1 Select View gt Map Outlines gt Unshow Map Outlines The map outlines displayed using Map Outlines gt Show Map Outlines are removed from the Map display View gt Map Outlines gt Show Selected Map You can display one of the map views by first selecting one of the outlines dis played by Map Outlines gt Show Map Outlines and then selecting View gt Map Outlines Show Selected Map To display one map view from the selection of map views 1 Click on the outline of the desired map view 2 Choose View gt Map Outlines gt Show Selected Map Map displays the selected map view View gt View Maps The View Maps submenu shown in Figure 185 provides options for displaying different map views FIGURE 185 VIEW MAPS OPTIONS IN MAP View gt View Maps gt Change Map The Change Map option lists all available maps and allows you to select one for display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures To display a different map from that currently displayed 1 Choose View Change Map A list of maps is displayed
235. isplayed spectra 1 You must choose File Compute to recalculate and update the display after invoking these menu options View Menu The View menu Figure 235 offers options to change the display of spectra Table 25 presents the functions listed under the View menu with a brief explanation of each Display Zoom on off Zoom out Log X Draw Grid Grid Draw Sub Grid Coordinates Hide Grid Smoothing Line Style Display Coordinates Sample Coordinates Off Hertz Solid EN No of Bins FIGURE 235 SPECTRAPLOT ViEW MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures TABLE 25 ViEW MENU FUNCTIONS Header Function Display Sub function Description Displays a list of spectra available for display in SpectraPlot To display a graph select it and then select Show To undisplay a graph select the spectrum then select Hide Zoom on off Allows you to zoom in or out of a plot Use the left mouse button to drag a rectangle around the desired feature Release the mouse button and the graph will be redrawn enlarging the selected area Zoom Out Zooms out from the current display When selected this option zooms out from the vertical axis by a factor of two and by one order of mag nitude when the x axis is in logarithmic display mode Log X
236. ist is provided with each release Installation proce dures for these tools are included in their respective distributions TABLE 30 COTS AND PD SOFTWARE FOR INTERACTIVE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE Package Type Sun Solaris COTS Java COTS Oracle client COTS Tuxedo COTS perl PD Tcl Tk PD UNIX SYSTEM AND COMMON DESKTOP ENVIRONMENT This section describes the configuration of an analyst s login account by the system administrator for use of the Interactive Analysis software It is assumed that the analyst s UNIX system administrator has already installed UNIX on the analyst s workstation and has set up an empty login account These instructions are based on Solaris 7 Sun Microsystem s version of UNIX and CDE 1 3 2 Sun s version of the CDE window manager software A shell script mkCMSuser does most of the work of setting up an analyst s environment by copying template files from the configuration directory tree config tree installed as part of the software distribu tion The script s use is described in Analyst Environment Installation on page 342 The procedure for configuring an analyst s account for access to the Interactive Analysis software can be described in two parts the analyst s shell envi ronment and the analyst s CDE window environment Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v v Chapter 4 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation
237. ival Information FIGURE 149 LOCATION ARRIVAL INFORMATION Table 10 describes the list of fields in the Locator Arrivals Popup Window TABLE 10 LOCATION ARRIVAL INFORMATION FIELDS Field Description Td Toggle field indicating whether or not arrival is time defining Station Station on which the arrival is declared Arrival Time Date and time of the signal onset at the station Phase Phase name S Time residual for surface solutions s F Time residual for free depth solution s R Time residual for fixed depth solution s Delta Distance from station to the current event location deg Azimuth An observed station to event azimuth deg Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V TABLE 10 LOCATION ARRIVAL INFORMATION FIELDS CONTINUED Field Description Azres Azimuth residual difference from theoretical deg Slow Observed signal slowness s deg Slores Slowness residual difference from theoretical Hide Hides locator arrivals popup window Help Provides a description of function in Locator Arrival Information Of the location arrival information fields only the Td field is interactive You may make an arrival time defining or non defining by toggling the Td button beside the desired station In Figure 149 all arrivals are defining except the arrival at st
238. ival time azi muth or slowness which is used in cal culating the event s location or magnitude defining phase Associated phase for which features are used in the estimation of the location and origin time of an S H I event deg Degrees as a distance depth phase Seismic signal that travels upwards from the hypocenter reflects off the earth s surface and travels the remaining path as a typical refracted phase It is usually IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions denoted by a phase name starting with a lower case p or s that indicates the upward leg of the path desktop Display area on an analysis workstation where all application windows are dis played detection Probable signal that has been automati cally detected by the Detection and Fea ture Extraction DFX software detection beam Same as a f k beam DFX Detection and Feature Extraction DFX is a programming environment that exe cutes applications written in Scheme known as DFX applications dman Distributed Application Manager This software element of the DACS manages the availability execution of processes E element Single station or substation of an array referred to by its element name such as YKR8 as opposed to its array name YKA in this example energy Occurrence that displays characteristics indicative of a possible nuclear weapons test Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual
239. ivals press the Shift key while selecting additional arrivals one at a time Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 3 Choose Edit Associate selected arrivals become associated to the selected event The event label and associated arrivals turn purple indicating that the event has been modified Edit Disassociate The Disassociate menu option disassociates one or more arrivals from an event You use disassociate after determining that an arrival did not originate from the selected event To disassociate an event 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more arrivals 3 Choose Edit Disassociate The selected arrivals become disassociated from the selected event The disassociated arrivals turn red indicating they are no longer associated The event label and remaining associated arrivals turn purple indicating that the event has been modified Edit Add Arrival The Add Arrival menu option adds arrivals to a channel s waveform If an event is selected the arrival is associated with the event otherwise it will be unassoci ated To add an arrival s 1 Select a channel Optionally select an event 2 Position t1 to indicate the new arrival s location Positioning t1 is described in Edit gt Retime gt Retime Arrival on page 82 3 Choose Edit Add Arriva
240. k the location of an arrival s detection time You can display or undisplay them By default they are displayed when ARS first loads data You can undisplay them if they obscure detail in the waveform Arrival Bar options are shown in Figure 106 FIGURE 106 ARRIVAL BAR DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER OPTIONS MENU Options gt Arrival Bars gt Arrival Bars On To turn on arrival bars 1 If arrival bars are undisplayed choose Options gt Arrival Bars gt Arrival Bars On Arrival bars appear in the ARS display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 e IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Options gt Arrival Bars gt Arrival Bars Off To turn off arrival bars 1 If arrival bars are displayed choose Options gt Arrival Bars gt Arrival Bars Off Arrival bars disappear from the ARS display as shown in Figure 107 MAWibz Rd 0 25 causal FIGURE 107 ARRIVAL BARS TURNED OFF Options gt Filter Parameters By default ARS describes the current filter applied to each waveform Filter param eters appear on the far right of the displayed waveform similar to that shown in Figure 107 You can enable or disable displaying this information Options gt Filter Parameters gt Filter Parameters On To turn on filter parameters 1 If filter parameters are undisplayed choose Options gt Filter Parameters gt Filter Parameters
241. k tip labels for buttons in ARS Use quick tip labels to identify hydroacoustic groups AEQ Keep a log of problems observed in AEQ during normal usage Verify that AEQ correctly flags events with deliberately anomalous attributes HART Keep a log of problems observed in HART during normal usage Use HART to display and modify azimuth on five hydroacoustic groups IADR Keep a log of problems observed in ADR during normal usage Verify that auxiliary data can be requested interactively for three events Map Keep a log of problems observed in Map during normal usage Use Map to display origins origin errors and associations PolariPlot Keep a log of problems observed in PolariPlot during normal usage Use PolariPlot to display polarization analysis results of five 3 C sta tions SpectraPlot Keep a log of problems observed in SpectraPlot during normal usage Use SpectraPlot to display the spectrum of selected stations Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures TABLE 32 EXAMPLE INTERACTIVE VALIDATION TEST CONTINUED Application Validation Procedure XfkDisplay Keep a log of problems observed in XfkDisplay during normal usage Use XfkDisplay to compute the FK of each primary station and selected auxiliary stations Use XfkDisplay to comp
242. ked You may abort the DFX processing by clicking Abort FiGURE 115 DFX PROCESSING DiALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures When DFX processing is complete ARS displays a message indicating that the DFX message was received If an error occurs and feature extraction is not successful ARS displays a warning message For successful feature measurement AlphaList azimuth slowness period and amplitude fields are updated For depth phases only the snr for the depth phase field also contains the calculated snrs Seismic Show Horizontals The Show Horizontals option allows you to display horizontal channels for all sta tions that have those channels To show horizontals 1 Select an event 2 Select one or more channels To select multiple channel press the Shift key while selecting the additional channels 3 Choose Seismic Show Horizontals The ARS screen refreshes and the horizontal channels for the selected stations appear at the bottom of the waveform display Select Sort By Distance from the toolbar to sort the added channels by distance from the event Seismic Remove Horizontals The Remove Horizontals menu option removes horizontal channels from the ARS display using one operation To remove horizontals 1 Choose Seismic Remove Horizontals You need not select an event or channel
243. ktype reference in Edit Stations names an FK recipe from the list of available Edit Parameters sets By default the fktype is set to the station name so all these names match You cannot create new Edit Parameters sets but you can edit existing ones The safest approach is to edit the parameter set named default and then change fktype in the arrival s Edit gt Stations parameter set to default You can edit the parameter set with the fktype of the station and even change the fktype name however the original parameter set will be lost and cannot be retrieved See Edit gt Stations on page 211 and Edit gt Parameters on page 213 To copy arrivals 1 Choose Edit Parameters 2 Select the default parameter set from the bottom of the parameter set selection list Edit the recipe parameters as necessary Click Apply to save the edits Click Edit Stations Choose the arrival s station from the station selection list Edit the fktype parameter to specify default as the recipe name 90 OM Ow Um e w Click Apply in the parameter edit window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 9 Choose Edit Copy Arrival s A new arrival entry appears in the arrivals list This arrival has the same arid as the original arrival and uses the default fktype You can now ana lyze the new arrival e
244. l A popup phase name selection list appears Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV 4 Select the phase name then click Done An arrival of the selected phase type is added at the position of t1 If an event is selected the arrival is associated and the event turns purple to indicate it has been modified If no event is selected the arrival appears in red indicating it is unassociated Edit Delete Arrivals The Delete Arrivals menu option deletes one arrival at a time This option is most useful for deleting incorrectly added arrivals You generally do not delete Auto matic Processing created arrivals because it is usually sufficient just to disassociate them Deleted SEL3 arrivals are not removed from the database they are simply removed from the current ARS display If you were to load the same ARS session again you would see the arrival reappear To delete arrivals 1 Select a single arrival The arrival does not have to be associated to an event 2 Choose Edit Delete Arrivals The arrival disappears from the screen ARS provides a warning if you try to delete more than one arrival at a time Edit Undefine time az amp slow Time azimuth and slowness are arrival parameters that can contribute to an event s location solution The Undefine time az amp slow menu option makes t
245. l time filter band for optimizing amplitude and onset and termination times If you add a detection or modify the editable hydroacoustic features you should invoke the DFX Hydro Features option to recompute the arrival s automatically determined hydroacoustic features While DFX computes features based on detection time for a seismic arrival it com putes features based on onset and termination time for a hydroacoustic arrival and recomputes the arrival s detection time in the process Hydroacoustic detection time is based on an estimate of the time of highest amplitude If you prefer a dif ferent arrival time run DFX first and then retime the arrival to save your preferred arrival time in the database There are two procedures for hydroacoustic phases one for examining existing arrivals and one for adding arrivals Both involve close examination of the filter band used to extract features and the onset termination times of the signal To examine existing arrivals 1 Select the arrival Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Choose Hydro Hydro Time Bars On see Hydro Hydro Time Bars On on page 153 The onset termination bars surround the signal The waveform is auto matically filtered at a filter band judged by the Automatic Processing software to contain the highest snr for that sig
246. lculated You may notice the displayed arrival bar shift to the time calculated by DFX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures Hydro HydroQC ARS provides some guidance for associating hydroacoustic phases Hydroacoustic phases cannot be associated to an event that is blocked by a large land mass The HydroQC menu option uses the position of the detecting hydrophone and the location of the event to determine whether a clear water path exists between the two If it does not HydroQC alerts you that a land mass is blocking the travel path and that detection is unlikely To use HydroQC 1 Select an event 2 If hydroacoustic phases are associated to the event choose Hydro gt HydroQC HydroQC returns a message either reporting that no blocked path for the associated hydroacoustic phases was found as shown in Figure 120 or that one or more paths are blocked as shown in Figure 121 Because the coupling mechanism for T phases is uncertain a two degree margin of error is built into the HydroQC warning system and therefore blockage by smaller land masses may not trigger a warning from HydroQC FIGURE 120 HYDROQC SHOWING NO BLOCKED PATHS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures
247. lected channel To expand a channel 1 Select one channel 2 Choose Fusion Expand Channel You need not select an event The one selected channel fills the entire waveform display as shown in Figure 139 All other channels are removed from the ARS display If previ ously filtered the waveform trace becomes unfiltered Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV _ 20882895 20882967 14 25 18 33 139 15 32 31 48 144 15 48 47 20 126 16 02 40 53 111 16 08 55 60 150 FIGURE 139 EXPAND CHANNEL DISPLAYS ONE SELECTED CHANNEL Fusion Unexpand Channel The Unexpand Channel menu option can only be used after using Expand Chan nel Unexpand Channel returns ARS to its prior display state Channels are redis played in the order they were before using Expand Channel However all waveforms are redisplayed unfiltered Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To unexpand a channel 1 After examining a waveform using the Expand Channel option choose Fusion Unexpand Channel You need not select an event Stations that were displayed prior to Expand Channel are restored to the screen aligned and sorted as before but unfiltered Fusion Expand Station The Expand Station menu option allow
248. lected to 80 Retime 82 Reset Arrival Time 85 Retime Arrival 82 Undo Last Retime 84 Select 76 All Channels 77 All Origins 77 Associated Arrivals 78 Select Associated Depth Phases 79 Undefine az amp slow 88 Undefine time az amp slow 87 Edit menu Map 227 Edit Layers 230 Edit Selected Objects 229 Object Database Query 228 Remove All Objects 229 Edit menu PolariPlot Clear All 287 Selected 286 Filter Filter 283 Unfilter 284 Set LineType or Line Style 286 Edit menu PolariPlot 282 2 D Rotations 286 Clear 286 Filter 283 Freeze Series 285 Redraw 287 Rotation Mode 285 Edit menu SpectraPlot 294 Edit menu XfkDisplay 211 Calculate 215 Copy Arrival s 218 Delete Arrival s 219 v v Index Parameters 213 Send Arrival s to ARS 217 Site Select 215 Stations 211 environment C shell 340 installing for analyst 342 error messages 332 event color scheme 30 estimating magnitude 59 list 30 locating 59 89 quality check 65 rejecting 64 resetting location 90 saving 67 70 unfreezing 66 71 F File menu 68 Exit 75 Read 68 Read Recovery Data 69 Reject Origin 73 Reject 73 Show Reason 74 Un Reject 74 Save Event 7O Unfreeze 71 Unfreeze Arrivals 72 Unfreeze Origins 71 Write Recovery Data 70 File menu Map 226 Exit 227 New Database 227 File menu PolariPlot 279 Compute 282 New 280 Open 280 Print 282 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Quit 282 Save to ARS
249. location except in the detection table where it is estimated from the data seismic Pertaining to elastic waves traveling through the earth SEL3 Standard Event List 3 S H I bulletin cre ated by totally automatic analysis of both continuous data and segments of data specifically down loaded from sta tions of the auxiliary seismic network Typically the list runs 12 hours behind real time select To choose an element on the screen by dicking on it with the mouse pointer site Location of a sensor within a station slowness Inverse of velocity in seconds degree a large slowness has a low velocity snr Signal to noise ratio Solaris Name of the operating system used on Sun Microsystems hardware IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions spectrum spectral Plot of the energy contained in wave forms as a function of frequency standard beam Beam in which the delays between sta tions are based on a pre defined set of recipe parameters referred to as the standard recipe parameters States Parties Treaty user group who will operate their own or cooperative facilities which may be National Data Centres station Collection of one or more monitoring instruments Stations can have either one sensor location for example BGCA or a spatially distributed array of sensors for example ASAR surface wave Seismic wave propagating along the sur face of the earth 1 teleseismic
250. loser in distance the full waveform data can produce better results However at large sep arations it is likely that good coherence in the signals between stations will only be found at the level of the waveform envelope especially for earthquake generated T phases The waveforms in HART are displayed initially aligned on maximum cor relation of the waveform segments If you disagree with this alignment and therefore disagree with HARTs display of azimuth you can select a new azimuth within the F statistic annulus You will notice that the waveforms shift relative to each other to represent the offset of the waveforms caused by the azimuth adjustment a Deselecting Waveforms If you feel that one of the waveforms contributing to the azimuth calcu lation is displaying bad data data drop outs or noise you can disable one or more channels from azimuth processing At least two stations must be active for HART to process an azimuth a HART will return an error if less than two stations are active in the HART display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To disable a channel from the HART azimuth calculation 1 Click directly on the waveform segment with the left mouse button To include a disabled channel in an azimuth computation click directly on the disabled waveform segment with the left mouse button to mak
251. lows you to manually rotate the matrix and then compute the same derived products for example after rotating the matrix to orient towards a known source such as the event location under refinement in ARS This allows you to compare the manual and automatic eigenvector solutions PolariPlot computes and displays by default an amplitude graph azimuth graph and rectilinearity graph for the selected 3 C station over the specified time interval TABLE 21 TRACES AVAILABLE IN POLARIPLOT Parameter Description Component Amplitude Computed by taking the square root of the sum of the squared component amplitudes Azimuth Azimuth of the eigenvector associated with the largest eigenvalue deg Azimuth LR Raleigh Azimuth of the eigenvector associated with the smallest phase observed azimuth eigenvalue deg Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 21 TRACES AVAILABLE IN POLARIPLOT CONTINUED Parameter Description Short Incidence Apparent incidence angle measured from the vertical of the eigenvector associated with the smallest eigenvalue deg Planarity Measure of the planar characteristic of the polarized ellip soid Long Incidence Apparent incidence angle from the vertical of the eigen vector associated with the largest eigenvalue deg Rectilinearity Particle
252. lter Unfilter Freeze Series Rotation Mode Line 2 D Rotations Points Set Line Type Impulse Clear Line Style Line Impulse Redraw Line Point Selected Solid Dotted Dashed Dot Dashed FIGURE 222 EDIT MENU Edit gt Filter The Filter submenu shown in Figure 223 contains two options one to specify filter settings and one to unfilter data FIGURE 223 FILTER SUBMENU Edit gt Filter gt Filter The Filter option displays a dialogue box for you to change the filter settings You can tailor the filter in a number of ways as shown in Figure 224 Scrollbars permit fine tuning of the high and low frequency boundaries Multiplier tabs increase or decrease the frequency boundaries by orders of magnitude A scrollbar permits changing the order of the filter up to an eighth order filter Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures menu permits choosing among band pass low pass high pass and band reject filters m A menu permits choosing between causal and non causal filters Input Edit Filter m 2 000 Multiplier 4 1 000 gt Low Frequency Hz 5 000 Multiplier i17 High Frequency Hz 8 Poles Filter Pass BandPass Filter Causality causal FIGURE 224 POLARIPLOT FiLTER DiALOGUE BOX When finished
253. lution is preferred because the Pref field is highlighted You can select another preferred solution by clicking on the Pref button to indicate the desired solution An example of needing to change the solution is when there is a possibility that the event is deep You may not yet be certain if the event is deep but must force the current location to a deep solution to search for depth phases By forcing a deep solution ARS aligns on phases differently than for a surface solution Solutions History Area of Locator The solutions history area of the Locator dialogue box maintains a record of past location solutions as shown in Figure 148 As you refine an event and update its location location solutions for the current event are logged for review The solu tions history area contains the same fields as the solutions area 2000 08 05 01 13 23 005 E Sm z 554 m FiGURE 148 LOGGING PAST LOCATIONS FOR SELECTED EVENT IN LOCATOR DiALOGUE Box The most current location is highlighted at the bottom of this scrolling list which is a copy of the current preferred solution in the solutions area This part of the dis play is not interactive and a past location cannot be selected to replace a current location Constraint Controls Area of Locator The constraint controls area of the Locator dialogue box allows you to fix either origin time latitude longitude or depth After adjusting constraints manually the next location cal
254. ly unassociated arrivals to build a new event You then refine and locate the new event in the stan dard manner In a non operational or experimental analysis session it is convenient to save separate arrivals if they are associated to an event You or the researcher may wish to group interesting phases for study or create an alternate origin hypothesis by associating to a new origin and saving the event This should be done with caution and saved to a non operational database account To create a new event 1 Choose Edit gt Add Origin A new origin appears at the end of the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS display This event initially has a negative evid and no location or associated arrivals Edit Delete Origin ARS provides two submenu options to delete events as shown in Figure 71 You may occasionally need to delete an origin Similar to the option Delete Arrivals The Delete Origin menu option removes the event from the display and does not affect the databases It is equivalent to leaving origins unsaved and undiscarded Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V FIGURE 71 DELETE ORIGIN SUBMENU Edit gt Delete Origin gt Delete Unassociated Origins The Delete Unassociated Origins menu option deletes one or more events that have no associated arrivals To delete unassociated arriv
255. main window and the dman window You may also display and use a mail tool text editor or interactive shell window during an analysis session Examples of these are shown in Figure 8 iconified or in a closed window state Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures 120892498 120892282 20882293 z 00 20892282 20892311 21 20892325 20892328 E 25 371 121 16 22 53 651 12 00 33 139 17 03 15 12 144 17 14 58 19 175 17 20 16 34 138 SpectraPlot PolariPlot IADR WERequest Lo MN FiGURE 8 LEFT SCREEN DURING ANALYSIS SESSION i shows a typical right screen display The analyst log ARS filter window AEQ XfkDisplay and Map are shown Tools such as ADR HART SpectraPlot and PolariPlot are configured to display on this screen as well To reduce clutter you may choose to iconify or undisplay these tools while they are not in use WEAssess is also launched to display on the right screen but is generally kept iconified see Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures Figures 8 and 9 show the default display configuration You may prefer a different display for your analysis session Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Proce dures on pag
256. move a queue the adminis trator must modify both crinteractive and ubb analysis template Refer to IDC6 5 2RevO 1 for specific installation and configuration instructions When an analyst s workstation boots a script installed in the workstation s local lib rc directory automatically runs TUXDIR bin tmboot which starts the Tuxedo IPC system in accordance with the tuxconfig file If this script is not installed then tmboot must be run manually by the system administrator tmboot starts a number of Tuxedo provided daemon applications TMS TMS QM TMQUEUE TMSYSEVT and TMUSREVT which manage interac Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures tion with the message queues and are always running on the workstation Applica tions such as ARS use calls to libipc to register with Tuxedo and interact with these daemons to post and retrieve messages from the queues For each of the DFX applications used for interactive recall processing and beam ing tmboot starts a pair of daemons the Tuxedo provided TMQFORWARD and the IDC CMS HOME bin tuxshell TMQFORWARD monitors DFX queue for activity dequeues new messages and forwards them to its partnered tuxshell Tux shell uses the message to build an appropriate command line for DFX It then exe cutes DFX and monitors DFX s r
257. movements of the earth oceans and atmosphere as seen on 5 sen sors usually measured in data preceding signals background processing Execution of a low priority process while higher priority processes are not using computer resources also the execution of processes that do not require user interaction beam 1 Waveform created from array station elements that are sequentially summed after being steered to the direction of a specified azimuth and slowness 2 Any derived waveform for example a fil tered waveform beamform Sum a set of waveforms from array sta tion elements with time delays intro duced to compensate for the time it takes a wave to travel across the array IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions blockage hydroacoustic Obstruction in the direct oceanic path between the source and the receiver BOTF Beam on the Fly processing A DFX Scheme application that creates origin beams and can be called from within ARS build 1 To create an event by detecting its seismic or hydroacoustic signals associ ating its arrivals identifying them as phases and locating the event 2 An operational version of a system or com ponent that incorporates a specified sub set of the capabilities that the final product will provide bulletin Chronological listing of event origins spanning an interval of time Often the specification of each origin or event is accompanied by the ev
258. muth and slowness You can return updated azimuth and slowness parameters to ARS XfkDisplay runs until you stop it you can send new arrivals to XfkDisplay at any time Tools Request Auxiliary Data You can request additional waveform data from auxiliary stations for display in ARS The Request Auxiliary Data submenu offers two options as shown in Figure 113 These options allow you to request data and to see the status of the request FiGURE 113 INTERACTIVE AUXILIARY DATA REQUEST OPTIONS UNDER TOOLS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Tools Request Auxiliary Data Request Data The Request Data submenu option allows you to initiate a request for auxiliary data that can be used to improve an event s location estimate You should refine an event as much as possible before requesting auxiliary data Auxiliary data requests are made for specific time intervals based on the theoretical arrival time of a P phase at the selected station With a refined location ADR requests a more appropriate time interval for the event To request auxiliary data 1 Select an event 2 Choose Tools Request Auxiliary Data Request Data If not already active ADR launches A dialogue box labeled WEAssess appears on the display opposite the ARS screen This WEAssess dialogue box allows you to make t
259. n Reject menu option removes an event from the discard table You must either save or reject events which means that in an operational environment all events ultimately either appear in the REB or they are put into a special discard table If an event is in the discard table it may still be analyzed and located but it cannot be saved and modifications are lost when the ARS session terminates To save a discarded event as a legitimate event you must remove the event from the discard table and save the event To unreject an event 1 Select a rejected event A rejected event is identified by its brown color in ARS 2 Select Un Reject The event will turn blue It can now be saved to the database when it meets other criteria for saving an event File gt Reject Origin gt Show Reason The Show Reason menu option displays the reason for why an event was rejected Figure 54 shows an example This option is useful if multiple analysts review the same time period for example during review FIGURE 54 EXAMPLE REASON FOR REJECTING EVENT Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To show reasons for rejecting an event 1 Select the discarded event Discarded events are identified by their brown color 2 Choose File gt Reject Origin gt Show Reason A dialogue box appears It shows the evid the analyst who
260. n the WEAssess tool appears it may have stations pre selected Selected sta tions appear highlighted in purple This automatic preselection is based both on rank and probability Preselection is a convenience If you are satisfied with the select list displayed automatically you need not select other stations You can add or remove stations from the select list by using the following tech niques select a station click to select the desired station This unselects all other stations wm select a continuous block of stations select the first station in the desired block and drag the mouse to the last station in the block Or select the first station and press shift key and select the last station Fig ure 202 shows a continuous block of selected stations Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 252 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V WaveExpert Assess Origin 20892079 Tyee Station Probability Ranke Dea Azimuth CUR AUX ELK Aux DAVOS FRB N 61 66 68 73 _ 62 11 33 7 87 44 82 06 2 43 7577 4029 LI 2 32 37 21 1 7 144 78 Request Selected Stations FIGURE 202 BLOCK OF SELECTED STATIONS w To select additional stations that are not listed contiguously such as the example in Figure 203 press the Control key while
261. nal This filter is identified to the right of the waveform similar to Figure 87 on page 108 You can make changes to the onset termination bars You can also choose a better filter for extracting features To do so filter the channel at different hydroacoustic filter bands until the highest apparent signal amplitude is shown in the waveform display When satisfied use the DFX Hydro option to recompute the hydroacoustic features using the new filter band After interactive DFX processing is complete the filter band you selected is displayed The onset termination bars are highlighted indicating a modified state and they occupy positions that you selected Other statis tical information is calculated based on your modified settings To add arrivals Filter the waveform at different hydroacoustic frequencies 2 Select the waveform that displays the highest snr 3 Indicate the signal s onset and termination times by placing the t1 and t2 markers where appropriate surrounding the signal 4 Add an arrival within the selected onset and termination times see Edit gt Add Arrival on page 86 You can add the arrival at the highest amplitude of the signal but keep in mind that DFX may shift the arrival s position when it calculates highest amplitude 5 When complete choose Hydro DFX Hydro The onset and termination times and optimal filter band used for the sig nal are those you specified and the arrival time is reca
262. nalyst_log CMSS scripts bin capture dt pl CMSS scripts bin cleanMStables CMSS scripts bin crInteractive CMSS scripts bin mkCMSuserg CMSS scripts bin rebqc CMSS scripts bin start Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction V CMSS scripts bin today CMSS config app config automatic WaveExpert WaveExpert IADR Assess par CMSS config app config automatic WaveExpert WaveExpert IADR Request par CMSS config app config automatic WaveExpert WaveExpert par CMSS config app config automatic WaveExpert distance rule clp CMSS config app config automatic WaveExpert we init clp LOGDIR jdate interactive role host machine pid LOGDIR jdate interactive dman host USER S agent LOGDIR jdate interactive tuxshell role host machine pid LOGDIR HART machine hart log LOGDIR WaveExpert role 1og TUXDIR bin BBL TUXDIR bin TMQFORWARD TUXDIR bin TMQUEUE TUXDIR bin TMS TMS OM TUXDIR bin TMSYSEVT TUXDIR bin TMUSREVT TUXDIR bin tmboot TUXDIR bin tmshutdown TUXDIR config scripts templates ubb analysis template var tuxedo PIDC70 analysis TLOGS tlog var tuxedo PIDC70 analysis ULOGS ULOG jday var tuxedo PIDC70 analysis config tuxconfig var tuxedo PIDC70 analysis config ubb ARSinit Mapinit Xdefaults cshrc dt
263. nce Applications International Corporation DC Processing of Seismic Hydroacoustic and Infrasonic Data SAIC 99 3023 1999 v References IDC6 2 4 IDC6 5 2RevO 1 IDC7 1 1 IDC7 2 2 IDC7 4 2 Koh98b Nye92a Nye92b IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Science Applications International Corporation Configuration of PIDC Processing Data Files SAIC 99 3025 1999 Science Applications International Corporation Distributed Application Control System DACS Software User Manual Revision 0 1 SAIC 00 3038 2000 Science Applications International Corporation Detection and Feature Extraction DFX Scheme Files SAIC 01 3000 2001 Science Applications International Corporation Analyst Review Station Scheme Functions SAIC 99 3026 1999 Science Applications International Corporation Pacific Sierra Research Inc Message Subsystem SAIC 98 3003 1998 Kohl B PIDC 6 1 Change to Structure of Operational Configuration Tree CCB PRO 98 29 1998 Nye A Xlib Reverence Manual for Version 11 O Reilly amp Associates Inc 1992 Nye A Xlib Programming Manual for Version 11 O Reilly amp Associates Inc 1992 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Glossary Symbols 3 C Three component A AEQ Anomalous Event Qualifier align Adjust the time offset of waveform data so that the th
264. nd includes the following topics Software Startup Software Shutdown Basic Procedures a Analyst Review Station ARS Procedures m XfkDisplay Procedures Map Procedures Anomalous Event Qualifier AEQ Procedures Interactive Auxiliary Data Request IADR Procedures a Hydroacoustic Azimuth Review Tool HART Procedures PolariPlot Procedures m SpectraPlot Procedures Procedures analyst log Procedures Advanced Procedures Maintenance Security Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures SOFTWARE STARTUP The Interactive Analysis Subsystem is comprised of a number of programs for interactive analysis of time series data The central component of the software is ARS which displays S H I waveform data Additional tools are provided to per form specialized analysis In general no single application is launched to run inde pendently of the others and when used in conjunction the components provide complete information about an arrival or an event In normal usage analysis is per formed in the main ARS display When you require more specific detail about an arrival groups of arrivals or an event ARS sends messages to specific tools to han dle the specialized analysis In response to these messages the tool is launched to immediately receive and respond to the messag
265. ness back to the last time Com pute was selected see File Compute on page 282 in the HART waveform section Figure 212 shows the left display in the HART tool The left display presents the waveform envelopes from the stations belonging to a hydroacoustic arrival group The onset termination bars of the signal are displayed see Hydro DFX Hydro Features on page 155 Amplitude is measured vertically and epoch time is dis played along the horizontal axis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Waveform Plot 51157931E5 ui FiGURE 212 HART WAVEFORM DISPLAY Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 Operational Procedures v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The HART waveform display contains several interactive features Compute The Compute button recomputes the azimuth for the displayed data Normally you should recompute the azimuth when the data that HART has to work with changes This includes deselecting or reselecting wave forms in HART Envelope The envelope function toggles between two states By default you should keep the envelope function selected for IMS station data analysis as this instructs HART to use only the waveform envelope in its compari son between waveform segments If the stations are c
266. new station data to PolariPlot at any time Tools SpectraPlot The SpectraPlot menu option launches the SpectraPlot tool SpectraPlot provides spectral analysis which is displayed as power versus frequency of a channel wave form s segment see SpectraPlot Procedures on page 291 To launch SpectraPlot 1 Select one or more channels 2 Position the t1 and t2 markers to delineate the time interval of data to be processed You can send more than one channel s data to SpectraPlot at a time 3 Choose Tools SpectraPlot If not already active SpectraPlot launches SpectraPlot is configured to display on the screen opposite the ARS display SpectraPlot displays the power spectrum of the waveform SpectraPlot remains running until you stop it You can send new channels to SpectraPlot at any time Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Tools XfkDisplay The XfkDisplay menu option launches the XfkDisplay tool XfkDisplay allows you to visually interpret station to event azimuth and slowness for an arrival see XfkDisplay Procedures on page 201 To launch XfkDisplay 1 Select an arrival To select more than one arrival to send to XfkDisplay press the Shift key and select the arrivals one at a time 2 Choose Tools gt XfkDisplay If not already active XfkDisplay launches You can analyze the arrival s azi
267. ng installa tion and configuration steps have been completed The hardware infrastructure is physically configured The COTS and PD third party software is installed and configured The database server is installed and configured Disk directories for waveform data and application log files are allocated The configuration directory tree is installed Analyst workstations are configured for Tuxedo IPC Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Analyst login accounts are configured Input waveform data and database tables are generated When the installation and configuration process is complete initiate an analysis session as described in Software Startup on page 18 Validate the Interactive Analysis software as described in the next section VALIDATING INSTALLATION The Interactive Analysis software can be validated in three stages In the first stage the functions of the individual applications are systematically exercised using a fixed data set or reference database configuration In the second stage standard analyst procedures are followed implicitly testing the interactive analysis tools A number of 2 hour time blocks are analyzed and one of these time blocks is scanned for missing events Either a fixed data set or operational output of the automatic processing subsystem may be used The final valid
268. nitude information Controls Displays configurable parameters for magnitude computations Help Displays description of functions in Magnitude Dialogue Box Arrivals The Arrivals function displays a window containing the events associated arrivals and their amplitude magnitude information The column presenting the preferred solution is highlighted as shown in Figure 155 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o Chapter 2 W Operational Procedures IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Magnitude Arrivals FIGURE 155 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS WINDOW Table 13 describes fields in the Magnitude Arrivals window TABLE 13 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS FIELDS Field Td Description This interactive field indicates whether or not the arrival is time defining If pressed the arrival time contributes to the location calculation If not pressed the arrival time does not M A This interactive field indicates whether the arrival s magnitude defining D N state was set manually or automatically Normally this field changes when you manually change the D N field If you specifically set this field to the manual state pressed then the current state of the D N field how ever set becomes fixed for the next location calculation Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User
269. nt 2 Select the channel s on which the theoretical arrival times should be dis played To select multiple channels press the shift key while selecting channels one at a time To select all channels press Control p 3 Choose View Theoretical Phases Theoreticals on Selected A list of phases is displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures 4 Select one phase whose theoretical arrival times should be displayed The phase s theoretical arrival time is displayed on the selected channels as shown in Figure 99 5 Ifthe theoretical arrival is not visible align the waveforms on the selected phase see View gt Align Channels gt Align Theoretical on page 103 FIGURE 99 P PHASE THEORETICAL ARRIVAL DISPLAYED ON STATION TXAR View Theoretical Phases Theoreticals on AII The Theoreticals on All menu option displays one or more theoretical arrivals on all currently displayed channels To display theoreticals on all channels 1 Select an event You need not select any channels 2 Choose View gt Theoretical Phases gt Theoreticals on All A list of phases is displayed 3 Select one or more phases whose theoretical arrival times should be dis played then click Done The selected theoretical phases are displayed on all channels Certain phases will not be displayed at ce
270. nt default phase The first FK beam produced for that station using XfkDisplay is identified as kb 00 as shown in Figure 172 If additional beams are produced for that station they are be labeled as kb 01 and so forth When you exit the ARS session temporary FK beams are discarded FIGURE 172 ARS AFTER FK BEAM IS RECEIVED FROM XFKDISPLAY Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Filters To help improve the FK result you can adjust the frequency band used during the FK calculation Just as applying a filter to a waveform trace can enhance the signal in the chosen frequency bands applying a filter to the FK calculation can enhance the energy peak in the FK plot If you do not specifically apply a filter a default fil ter is used The filter selected with this function is applied during the FK calculation to set the boundaries for converting waveforms to frequency domain A prefilter is applied to the time domain waveforms prior to the FK analysis This function also adjusts the prefilter settings to be slightly wider than the selected FK band All these filter set tings are set in the FK recipe parameters list specified by the selected arrival s fktype see Edit Parameters on page 213 The FK band is specified in the fklof and fkhif fields and the prefilter is specified in the flo and fhi fields If the Edit gt Paramete
271. nt s label Edit gt Remarks gt Delete Object Remarks If changes have been made to an event or arrival an added remark may no longer apply You can delete the remark using the Delete Object Remarks menu option To delete object remarks 1 Select the single object that the remark is attached to For example if the remark was added to an event you must select only the event 2 Choose Edit Remarks Delete Object Remarks The remark is deleted For events the R that appears with the event in the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS window disappears Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Menu The View menu as shown in Figure 81 provides options for modifying the wave form display by aligning filtering displaying theoretical arrivals changing which channels are visible and zooming and scrolling the waveform time window Align Theoretical Align Channels Align Designated Filter Unalign Display All Channels Remove Channels gt Show Filter List Copy Channels Unfilter Sort Channels Zoom Edit Filter List Unzoom Add Filter to List Shift Add Cascade Filter to List Theoretical Phases Remove Selected Channels Remove Derived Channels Remove Blank Waveforms Sort Alphabetically Sort by
272. ntributes to the magnitude calculation The Magnitude dialogue box displays the magnitude for each calcu lated depth solution and highlights the preferred depth solution The preferred solution is selected automatically as the one producing the smallest error ellipse You may change the preferred solution by selecting the small square Pref which is next to the preferred solution in the Locator dialogue box Figure 42 ARS calcu lates both an mb ave and ml ppn The mb ave is the averaged bodywave magni tude calculated for stations between 20 and 100 degrees distance from an event The ml ppn is the averaged local magnitude calculated for stations less than 20 degrees from events that are less than 40 km deep The magnitude standard error and number of defining phases are displayed in the Magnitude dialogue box for both types of magnitudes Figure 44 Like the Locator dialogue box the Magni tude dialogue box provides several options including the Arrivals option to display more detailed information about the individual phases contributing to the event magnitude Figure 45 See Magnitude Dialogue Box on page 194 for more information Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Rej Reject Event The Rej toolbar button discards or rejects an automated system generated event that you determine to be
273. ntry and make modifications to the default parame ter set as necessary to compare it with the original arrival entry s FK recipe Be sure to set the station s fktype back to the original name before sending new arrivals on that station from ARS else the new arrivals will also reference the default fktype Edit Delete Arrival s The Delete Arrival s option deletes selected arrivals from the XfkDisplay window Deleting the arrivals means that they are no longer available for FK processing Typically you delete an arrival when you have completed analysis of it To delete arrival s 1 Select only those arrival s in XfkDisplay window targeted for deletion All arrivals are set selected when initially received by XfkDisplay 2 Choose Edit Delete Arrival s The selected arrival s are removed from the XfkDisplay window The selected arrival s FK plot windows remain and must be individually dis missed View Menu The View menu provides two display options for the FK plot as shown in Figure 171 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Display FK Update Display f FIGURE 171 XrkDisPLAY ViEW MENU View Display Fk When you make adjustments to filters or parameters and re compute an FK result by choosing either Calculate Fk or Calculate from the Edit menu XfkDisplay does no
274. nual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions 2 Operational Procedures Select Ufrz from the ARS toolbar The event label and associated arrival bars and phase labels which were green in the saved state now turn blue as shown in Figure 49 Event parameters saved in the LEB database are removed and are only retained in ARS If ARS is terminated without re saving the event the event s attributes revert to those set in the input SEL3 database You can now modify the event Save or discard the event after reanalysis all events must be in either a saved or discarded state at the end of anal ysis 20868110 WW 20868640 _ 20868130 1 22 10 21 24 122 22 20 38 3126 22 26 47 17 156 FIGURE 49 UNFROZEN EVENT Sav Save event The Sav toolbar button saves an event After completing analysis on a valid event you must save the event To save an event 1 2 Select and perform analysis on an event Perform a final location and run QC on the event to make sure that it adheres to the rules defined for saving an event Select Sav from the ARS toolbar The event and its associated arrivals are saved in the LEB database To indicate the saved or frozen state the event label associated arrival bars and phase labels turn green as shown in Figure 50 Neither the event nor associated arrivals can be modified without unfreezing An event appears in the REB only if it has been saved in
275. of this event capability by requesting an event be sent to dman when Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Procedures ever an interactive application posts or reads a message This feature enables dman to monitor message traffic and update the displayed queue sizes for each of its cli ent applications Finally dman via libipc can make queries to Tuxedo for message queue size or message queue purging APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION ARS Analyst Review Station ARS can be considered the centerpiece of the Interactive Analysis software because the analysts spend more time working in ARS than any other application ARS is also the most highly customizable of all the applications The analyst s view of ARS is abstracted in Figure 257 The analyst interacts with the GUI which calls Scheme functions which call C functions which interact with the data At both the GUI and Scheme levels configuration files affect the analyst s view of ARS The ARS GUI is configured by the following three X resource files CMS HOME X11 app defaults ARS CMS CONFIG system specs app resources ARS Xdefaults Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures Analyst Graphical User Inter
276. ogue box and a Magnitude dialogue box on the screen opposite the one displaying ARS Figures 42 and 43 These boxes contain the location information the computed surface and depth solutions and station and event magnitude Figures 44 and 45 see Locator Dialogue Box on page 187 and Magnitude Dialogue Box on page 194 Locator Dialogue uoo C v jas que 4 X E FiGURE 42 LOCATOR DiALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Location Arrival Information FIGURE 43 ASSOCIATED ARRIVALS DIALOGUE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V FIGURE 44 MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Magnitude Arrivals FIGURE 45 MAGNITUDE ARRIVALS DIALOGUE To locate an event 1 Select an event 2 Select Locate from the ARS toolbar Arrivals or channels need not be selected ARS locates the event The location is displayed in the Locator dialogue box The event information in AlphaList see page 95 and the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS screen are also updated Arrival inf
277. olarization analysis IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Figure 219 shows the default graph traces in PolariPlot These traces are calculated and displayed when data from a 3 C station are sent from ARS The legend is shown on the right side of the traces and indicates the color and shape of the line representing the current series More than one series can be displayed simulta neously in PolariPlot and the Legend helps distinguish the overlapping traces FIGURE 219 POLARIPLOT DEFAULT DISPLAY GRAPHS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV The units for these three default graphs are as follow Amplitude x axis s y axis nm Azimuth x axis s y axis degrees from north Rectilinearity x axis s y axis degree of rectilinearity measured from O to 1 When you place the cursor over any of the graphs the cursor appears as a crosshair in the display The cursor provides two important visual queues First the coordinates of the crosshairs are continuously updated in the parameter fields This is useful for identifying features Second the vertical crosshair extends across all graphs and can be used to measure feature alignment on the time axis If the dis played graphs are not presented in the same time scale the cursor may be used to o
278. oltage has been converted to a digital count which is monotonic with the amplitude of the stimulus to which the sensor responds wavenumber Vector k in the direction of a propagat ing wave whose magnitude is given by the inverse wavelength of the wave scaled by a factor of 2x workstation High end powerful desktop computer preferred for graphics and usually net worked IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Index AEQ 4 7 244 configuration 360 starting up 139 alarm bell 37 AlphaList 95 180 arrival information 183 channel information 185 event information 182 hot keys 179 showing selected objects 95 showing with associated arrivals 96 toolbar functions 186 amplitude measuring 34 analyst log 5 304 abbreviated analysis 320 Aftershock 320 allocating a time period 318 Allocation window 313 ARSscan 320 configuration 365 message area 324 procedures 312 QC 325 RebQC 322 reserving time blocks 313 signaling bulletin complete 326 signaling completed analysis 319 signaling QC complete 326 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 signaling scan completed 319 starting ARS 321 unreserving a time block 317 Analyst Tools menu Map 243 Send ARS Selected 243 Send ARS Selected Origins ZAS 244 arrival adding 48 86 179 adding remark 149 associating 85 beaming 50 deleting 87 disassociating 86 displaying bars 135 displaying hydroac
279. on and Configuration Procedures LOGDIR jdate interactive lt role gt lt host gt lt pid gt where role is Beamer DFXRecall or DFXHydroRecall host is the host machine and pid is tuxshell s UNIX process identifier ID See IDC7 1 1 for general information on configuring and programming DFX dman The dman application is the demand execution manager for the Interactive Analy sis software In conjunction with the Tuxedo based interprocess communication IPC libraries dman monitors message traffic between applications and starts recipient applications as necessary to ensure they receive and respond to incoming messages The Tuxedo IPC system must be running for dman to operate is started by the CMS SCRIPTS bin start script either from the CDE menu or from the analyst log application The start script specifies the par file CMS CONFIG app config distributed dman dman par when launching dman This par file in turn references the file CMS CONFIG system specs process par dman uses its par file to specify the list of client applications that it will monitor their complete command line argument lists and numerous other configuration and operation parameters An example par file and description of parameters are given in the dman man page dman 1 writes its log file to LOGDIR jdate interactive dman machine user agent where jdate is the julian date machine is the host machine user is
280. one arrival ARS provides the list of possible phase names The arrival does not have to be associated to an event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To rename a sole selected arrival 1 Select one arrival 2 Choose Edit gt Rename gt Rename sole Selected to A phase list appears 3 Select the desired phase name then click Done Fig ure 60 The arrival s phase name changes to that selected from the list If a single event was selected the arrival automatically is associated to the event If more than one event was selected ARS displays a warning to select only one event Done Cancel FIGURE 60 PHASE LIST Edit gt Rename gt Rename All Selected to The Rename All Selected to menu option selects multiple arrivals and renames them all to a single phase name To rename all selected arrivals 1 Select multiple arrivals by individually selecting them or by using one of the menu options for selection such as Edit gt Select gt Select Associated Arrivals To manually select multiple arrivals press the Shift key while selecting multiple arrivals in sequence 2 Choose Edit gt Rename gt Rename All Selected to ARS displays a list of phase names Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Inst
281. ons in Map s Edit menu Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures View Options Analyst Tools Draw All Objects iew St Objects unbrawAllObjects Meta u FIGURE 181 ViEW OBJECTS OPTION IN MAP To temporarily remove objects from the display 1 Choose View View Objects UnDraw All Objects To restore the objects to the display 1 Choose View View Objects Draw All Objects The objects reappear View View Selected Objects The options in the View Selected Objects submenu allow you to access and manip ulate individual objects in Map as shown in Figure 182 View Options Analyst Tools hk View Objects f Map Outlines l Object Attributes View Selected Objects Undraw Selected Objects FIGURE 182 ViEW SELECTED OBJECTS OPTION IN MAP To temporarily hide one or more selected objects from the display 1 Select the objects events phases and so forth Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V 2 Choose View View Selected Objects Undraw Selected Objects The objects are removed from the display Object Attributes displays a dialogue box containing attribute informa tion for one or more selected arrivals If more than one object is selected before
282. oose View Shift Shift Left 5096 All waveforms and arrivals move one half of the time window to the left View gt Shift gt Shift Right 50 The Shift Right 50 menu option moves the waveforms to the right by 50 percent of the displayed time window To shift the waveforms right by 50 percent 1 Choose View gt Shift gt Shift Right 50 All waveforms and arrivals move one half of the time window to the right View Theoretical Phases You can display the theoretical arrival times for selected phases to aid in assessing detected arrivals The Theoretical Phases submenu provides several options for defining and controlling the display of theoretical phases as shown in Figure 98 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FIGURE 98 THEORETICAL PHASE DISPLAY OPTIONS UNDER ViEW MENU View Theoretical Phases Theoreticals on Selected The Theoreticals on Selected menu option displays selected theoretical arrival times on selected channels Figure 99 This option is identical to the Th option in the ARS toolbar see Th Theoretical Arrival Time on page 54 Only one phase s theoretical can be displayed per invocation of this option however the theoretical will display on multiple selected stations and channels To display theoreticals on selected channels 1 Select an eve
283. operates by accepting waveform data sent from ARS computing the spectral characteristics and plotting power as a function of frequency SpectraPlot can display up to 20 spectra Individual spectra are displayed in different colors See Tools SpectraPlot on page 142 for instructions on sending data to Spectra Plot from ARS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV File Menu The File menu shown in Figure 233 provides general functions for the SpectraPlot display The functions are described in Table 23 Compute Save Print Graph Quit FIGURE 233 SPECTRAPLOT FILE MENU TABLE 23 FiLE MENU FUNCTIONS Function Description Compute Recalculates and redraws the currently displayed spectra based on changes to parameters Save Saves spectra to a file Print Graph Prints the currently displayed spectra Quit Exits SpectraPlot File Compute The File Compute function must be used frequently to force recalculation of the spectrum currently displayed in the SpectraPlot display When settings available through the Edit or View menus are modified the spectrum are only recalculated and redrawn after Compute is selected This is especially true where parameters such as smoothing and normalizing are changed while the spectrum is still dis played To recompute the spectrum with changed displ
284. orma tion in AlphaList is updated Theoretical arrival times are adjusted Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The Locator dialogue box Figure 42 contains locations for three possible depth solutions 5 Surface F Free and R Fixed The latitude and longitude of the event the time of the event the calculated depth the number of defining phases the location standard error and error ellipse information and standard error on the depth are displayed in the Locator dialogue box The number of iterations required to converge on a location is also displayed Several functions can be accessed through the Locator dialogue box including the Arrivals option which displays detailed information about the arrivals contributing to the location and a Controls option which provides additional options to constrain the location More informa tion about the Locator dialogue box is provided on page 187 The Magnitude dialogue box Figure 44 provides output from the mb ave and ml ppn event or netmag calculation The term netmag is short for network mag nitude and is used to describe the magnitude of an event using all the associated arrival stamags in the network The term stamag is short for individual station magnitude A stamag is calculated from the period and amplitude information measured from each individual associated arrival that co
285. ormation The arrivals can either be dis played and sorted by Magnitude Type or Delta distance of the station from the event Hide Hide the Magnitude Arrivals window Help Present a description of the functions in the Magnitude Arrivals window v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Magnitude Controls The Controls button displays a window providing some options to control the magnitude calculation The Controls window is shown in Figure 156 The most commonly used limits are the Ignore Stations n n SD and the ability to alter the minimum and maximum distance of stations used for the magnitude calculation Magnitude Test Site Correction _ Test Site Region Lop Nur _ Use Only Stations wiCorrection _ Ignore Stations gt 3 000 SD Preset Stations Only Min 015 20 0 Dist 100 0 FIGURE 156 MAGNITUDE CONTROLS WINDOW The Magnitude Test Site Correction area is not used at the IDC If you select Ignore Stations ARS ignores stations with distances beyond a certain multiple of the standard deviation of the location calculation By default this limit is turned off If enabled the default deviation value is 3 0 The Preset Stations Only field is typically enabled pressed This limits the stations included in a magnitude calculation to those listed in the Scheme cvar variable magnitude sub stations list specified in IDC scm The next
286. ot Azimuth quadrants and circles of constant velocity are drawn for reference Slowness velocity and station to event azimuth values are listed below the plot A theoretical slowness based on the ARS computed location of the event selected in ARS is represented on the plot by a amp symbol The color scheme in the FK plot is based on computed signal power The area on the slowness plane with the highest computed power appears in red Levels decrease from this peak in the order of orange yellow green and finally blue Fig ure 159 presents an example of an arrival whose signal power appears to originate from a bearing of approximately 122 degrees azimuth with a slowness of approxi mately 15 seconds degree or equivalently an apparent velocity of 8 km s Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The plot can be thought of abstractly as viewing the station or array from directly above For seismic data a peak in the middle area of the FK plot represents signal wavefronts striking the array nearly parallel to the earth s surface A peak along the edges of the FK plot represents wavefronts striking at a significant angle to the earth s surface An array station measures the apparent horizontal components of velocity as the wavefront sweeps across the elements of the array Consider a seismic event that occurs at great teleseismic
287. ou need not select an event or channel ARS displays a list of theoretical phases 2 Select one or more phases whose arrival times are to be displayed then click Done ARS saves a new default list for regional theoretical phases When Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals is chosen ARS displays the theoretical phases in this list The list defined with this option remains in effect for the remainder of the analysis session or until it is redefined using this option Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 128 May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV View gt Theoretical Phases gt Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals The Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals option is linked with the Show Teleseismic Theoretical Arrivals option under the Seismic Menu on page 145 This Define option allows you to build a custom theoretical phase list the Show option displays it This Define option allows you to select those theoretical phases that you would like displayed when analyzing events at teleseismic distances greater than 20 degrees To define teleseismic theoretical arrivals 1 Choose View Theoretical Phases Define Teleseismic Theoretical Arriv als You need not select an event or channel ARS displays a list of theoretical phases 2 Select one or more phases whose arrival times are to be displayed then click Done ARS saves a new
288. oustic 162 displaying theoretical time 54 display next unassociated 172 display previous unassociated 173 Locator popup window 191 renaming 49 79 180 renaming all selected 81 resetting time 85 retiming 82 180 selecting unassociated 168 showing regional theoretical 148 showing teleseismic theoretical 148 undisplaying theoretical time 56 undoing retime 84 unfreezing 72 alarm bell 37 configuration 355 error messages 332 error recovery 334 event list 30 exiting 75 hot keys 179 loading data 20 21 v Index message area 36 overview 2 popup menus 38 Quick tips 37 resizing areas 37 Scheme interface 328 shutdown 23 startup 18 time bar 35 toolbar area 29 toolbar functions 41 waveform display area 31 window layout 28 ARS load 5 320 ARSscan 320 associated arrival displaying 59 selecting 42 selecting all 78 auxiliary data requesting 143 248 selecting stations with Map 254 station list 250 station sorting 252 azimuth computing for hydroacoustic 164 making undefining 87 B beam forming 56 starting DFX 139 blocked path determining 157 bulletin procedures for completing 326 C CDE 341 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions configuration notes 345 channel selecting all 77 selecting for display 57 CLIPS 360 coda phases disassociating 44 COLA 170 complementary documents ii configuration 339 AEQ 360 analyst log 365 ARS 355 checklist 365 data files 351 DFX 362 dman 364 IADR 36
289. ovided in IDC7 2 2 Obtaining Help In addition to the IDC documentation listed in References on page 369 man pages provide useful sources for additional information on the applications Man pages are available for ARS AEQ analyst log dman HART IADR Map PolariPlot SpectraPlot and XfkDisplay Often a Help button is provided in an application s menu bar this button usually provides a brief description for functions within that window When you hover the cursor over a menu option or toolbar button in ARS a quick tip appears Quick tips provide more complete function names than are provided in the cryptic menu or button label see Quick tips on page 37 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures ANALYST REVIEW STATION ARS PROCEDURES ARS Window Layout and Organization The main ARS window is the central focus for time series analysis Within its bor ders events are reviewed or built and access to the majority of the Interactive Analysis Subsystem s functionality is provided The ARS main window shown in Figure 10 is a busy display rich in information Pn ii ni H in itt t v 1 3 pz NPi n gin ix N P Io E T Poi FIGURE 10 MAIN ARS WINDOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1
290. ows Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Analysis Allocation 093632 lt lt Day 2000238 2000 Aug 25 ec ur Allocated Analyze Scan Aftershock 5 Fs SS SS o Ks E e e FQ Un Allocate Analyze Scan Aftershock ARSscan EE i Run Rebac Show mon dd mon dd Session 3 Session 3 FIGURE 245 ALLOCATION WINDOW The top of the Allocation window as shown in Figure 246 contains the current time scroll buttons to move from one dataday to another and the date of the dis played window It also contains a button to open the QC window Table 28 describes the features in this portion of the analyst log window Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV File lt lt lt 2000163 2000 3011 gt FiGURE 246 ALLOCATION WINDOW DATE AND TIME SECTION TABLE 28 FEATURES IN TOP SECTION OF ANALYST
291. ox The Magnitude Dialogue Box contains the station and event magnitudes com puted during a location computation as shown in Figure 151 Event magnitudes and station magnitudes are calculated for the three different depth locations dis played in the Locator Dialogue Box Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Magnitude Dialogue FIGURE 151 MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX The Magnitude Dialogue Box is organized much like the Locator Dialogue Box It displays the current magnitude results and a history of previous magnitude results for the selected event A toolbar with function buttons is located at the bottom of the display Figure 152 shows the portion of the Magnitude Dialogue Box that is specific to current magnitude calculation results Table 11 describes the fields FIGURE 152 CURRENT MAGNITUDE IN MAGNITUDE DIALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 11 CURRENT MAGNITUDE TOP PART IN MAGNITUDE BOX Field Description mb ave Averaged body wave magnitude mlppn Local magnitude calculated using local P And Pn station magnitudes Run Depth solution being used S Surface F Free R Fixed MAG Magnitude of the event S D Standard error on magnitude
292. par files recovery Restoration of a system program data base or other system resource to a state in which it can perform required func tions regional 1 distance Source to seismometer separations between a few degrees and 20 degrees 2 event Recorded at dis tances where the first P and S waves from shallow events have traveled along paths through the uppermost mantle residual Difference in time azimuth or slowness between a calculated attribute and its corresponding theoretical value Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Glossary V run 1 Single usually continuous execution of a computer program 2 To execute a computer program S 5 Second s time 5 Seismic hydroacoustic and infrasonic SAIC Science Applications International Cor poration save Store an analyzed event to the final database thereby preventing further changes to the event sbsnr Signal to noise ratio measured on a standard beam scan Systematically view all waveforms and seek out possible events missed by the automated system schema Database structure description Scheme Dialect of the Lisp programming lan guage that is used to configure some IDC software Glossary script Small executable program written with UNIX and other related commands that does not need to be compiled seaz Station to event azimuth Usually pre dicted from the origin
293. period Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures IADR 1 gault sel1 sel2 FiGURE 206 UsER NAME LEVEL IN IADR STATUS WINDOW Table 17 describes the columns of the ADR status tool TABLE 17 IADR COLUMNS Column Header Description Request Folders listing the data requests Folders contain sub folders and may be expanded to detail return status by evid station or channel Status Displays the status of a request The percentage of data returned is dis played The cell color indicates status as follows m red less than 50 percent data returned m yellow between 50 percent and 70 percent data returned m orange between 70 percent and 90 percent data returned m green between 90 percent and 100 percent data returned Delta Station to event distance in degrees only when stations are shown The ADR status tool interface is presented as an expandable tree structure of fold ers starting with the user level as shown in Figure 206 Clicking on folders with the left mouse button displays subfolders in the order of evids stations and finally channels Figure 207 shows a variety of folder levels open and closed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V
294. play ID Identification identifier IDC International Data Centre IMS International Monitoring System infrasonic infrasound Pertaining to low frequency sub audi ble sound in the atmosphere Glossary IPC Interprocess communication The mes saging system by which applications communicate with each other through libipc common library functions See tuxshell JRE Acronym for Java run time environment the software application in which a Java application runs K km Kilometer L lat Latitude LEB Late Event Bulletin a list of analyst reviewed S H l events and event param eters origin and associated arrival infor mation logon Process of a computer user identifying themselves by means of a user ID and password to a computer operating sys tem as a registered user beginning an interactive session IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions logout Ending or exiting a computer user ses sion long Longitude M magnitude Empirical measure of the size of an event usually made on a log scale Map Application for displaying S H I events stations and other information on geo graphical maps mp Magnitude estimated from seismic body waves M Magnitude estimated from waves mea sured near the source monitoring system See IMS N network Spatially distributed collection of seismic hydroacoustic or infrasonic stations for which the st
295. post analysis auto matic processing Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures analyst log is initiated by selecting Start Analyst Review in the CDE toolbar see Software Startup on page 18 The first window that appears is the control win dow shown in Figure 244 from which the Allocation QC and Exit options can be selected pe cc FIGURE 244 ANALYST_LOG CONTROL WINDOW The Allocation window is the primary window used by analysts The capabilities described in the introduction above are all accessed through this window The QC window is primarily used to review a whole day s analysis This window is dis cussed in QC on page 325 Allocation Window To access the Allocation window click the Allocation button in the analyst_log Control window The Allocation window is displayed as shown in Figure 245 Most of the window is occupied by a tabular representation of the 24 hours covering one day s analysis or dataday The columns represent analysis milestones Some of the cells may be highlighted and contain an analyst s name Each analyst s analyst_log accesses a common allocate_hour database table to reserve time blocks for analysis When any analyst reserves a time block all analyst logs will highlight the reserved block and show the name of the reserving analyst A more detailed look at the allocation window foll
296. proper event location these data need to be sent to ARS The azimuth and slowness information for one or more arrivals in the XfkDisplay window can be copied to ARS by the Send Arrival s to ARS option To send arrivals to ARS 1 Make the necessary changes to the azimuth and slowness in XfkDisplay Make sure the arrival is selected 2 Choose Edit Send Arrival s to ARS The azimuth and slowness information calculated in XfkDisplay is trans ferred to the arrival s parameters in ARS replacing the previous azimuth and slowness You can view the updated parameters in AlphaList Figures 169 and 170 show a section of AlphaList before and after updating arrival parameters from XfkDisplay note the changed azimuth and slow ness values FIGURE 169 ARS ALPHALIST BEFORE XFKDISPLAY UPDATE FIGURE 170 ARS ALPHALIST AFTER XFKDISPLAY UPDATE Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Edit Copy Arrival s The Copy Arrival s option allows you to analyze and compare the same arrival using more than one FK recipe Copy Arrival s creates a second arrival entry with the same arid but references the FK recipe specified by the fktype parameter from the arrival s Edit Stations parameter set If the fktype reference has been changed the copied arrival uses a different FK recipe and the original remains unchanged The f
297. r area shifts the waveform display one full time window or page Clicking on the arrows at either end of the scroll bar moves the display by smaller increments of 10 percent The Shift submenu shown in Figure 97 adds shift increments of 25 percent and 50 percent Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FiGURE 97 SHIFT OPTIONS UNDER ViEW MENU View gt Shift gt Shift Left 25 The Shift Left 25 menu option moves the waveforms to the left by 25 percent of the displayed time window To shift the waveforms left by 25 percent 1 Choose View Shift Shift Left 2596 All waveforms and arrivals move one quarter of the time window to the left View gt Shift gt Shift Right 25 The Shift Right 25 menu option moves the waveforms to the right by 25 percent of the displayed time window To shift the waveforms right by 25 percent 1 Choose View gt Shift gt Right 25 All waveforms and arrivals move one quarter of the time window to the right Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View gt Shift gt Shift Left 50 The Shift Left 50 menu option moves the waveforms to the left by 50 percent of the displayed time window To shift the waveforms left by 50 percent 1 Ch
298. r the event are displayed horizontally on one screen Seismic Select Associated Depth Phases During routine analysis you may run DFX Seismic for all depth phases associated with an event The Select Associated Depth Phases option facilitates this operation After you choose this option you can display depth phases in AlphaList or you can run DFX recall processing on them When DFX is run on a depth phase it calculates a standard period and amplitude and a depth phase specific snr This snr appears in AlphaList dsnr field To select associated depth phases 1 Select an event 2 Choose Seismic Select Associated Depth Phases All currently selected arrivals are de selected and all associated depth phases are selected Hydro Menu The Hydro menu provides options for analyzing hydroacoustic data The Hydro menu options are shown in Figure 117 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Show Hydro Channels Unshow Hydro Channels Align Hydro on T Align Selected on T Hydro Time Bars On Hydro Time Bars Off DFX Hydro Features HydroQC HydroQCMap Hydro Path Blocked MAP Hydro Path Blocked Select All Hydro Channels Add Hydro Arrival Remarks Display Hydro Arrival Group Send HART FIGURE 117 HYDRO MENU Hydro gt Show Hydro Channels Analyzing hydroacoustic waveform data is usually the last s
299. rational Procedures WV Main Window Parameters and Controls Frequency and Power The Frequency and Power parameter display fields show the coordinates of the cursor as it moves around the spectra display The View Coordinates submenu controls how these fields are updated By default the View gt Display option is selected and these fields update continuously If the Select option is selected the fields only update when the left mouse button is clicked in the graph area The Off option disables the update Smoothing Smoothing reduces the amount of data scatter in a spectrum by averaging the spectrum over a number of adjacent frequency bins The spectra lose detail as a larger number of frequency bins are used for smoothing Figures 237 and 238 show the difference between an unsmoothed and a smoothed plot respectively Choose File Compute to recompute the spectra and display the changes Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures SpectraPlot All Jl m t FIGURE 237 SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY OF UNSMOOTHED SPECTRA Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V SpectraPlot FiGURE 238 SPECTRAPLOT DISPLAY OF SMOOTHED SPECTRA
300. re typically best seen at lower band pass frequencies 160 320 3 BPcausal 120 240 3BPcausal 80 160 3BPcausal 60 120 3BPcausal 40 80 3BPcausal 80 60 3BPcausal 20 40 S3BPcausal 0 001 100 3 BP causal 80 160 3BPcausal 60 120 3BPcausal 60 3 BP causal 40 3 BP causal 3 BP causal 3 BP causal 3 BP causal 3 BP causal FIGURE 86 ARS FILTER LIST After the filter list is displayed you can use it for the rest of that ARS session To show the filter list 1 Select a channel You must have one or more channels selected to ini tially display the filter list Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Choose View Filter Show Filter List The filter list appears Only a portion of the available filters is visible A scroll bar gives access to the remainder 3 To apply a filter either select the filter and then click Apply or double click on the desired filter 4 To see which filter is currently applied to a waveform check the label toward the right edge of the waveform display in ARS In Figure 87 1 0 2 5 3 BP causal represents a 1 2 5 Hz third order band pass causal filter 5 To close the window either click Done to apply the selected filter or click Cancel to not apply it FiGURE 87 WAVEFORM WITH FILTER STATUS View Filter Unfilter The Unfilter menu option unfilters the
301. rectory These dummy files have been collected and placed in the dt menu items directory The dummy files provide an action name the filename with which to search the dt action database In dt types an action dt file is created This file defines the action to be performed The action is a recognizable UNIX command The file also defines the type of window the command should run in For GUls or shell scripts as in this example no window is necessary The data in this file is entered into the dt action database under a specified label which must match the name of the dummy file When the control is activated the action database is searched for the label and the corresponding action is performed The dtdtfile 4 man page describes the file s format The ARS dt file looks like ACTION ARS LABEL ARS TYPE COMMAND EXEC STRING start program ARS ICON ARS WINDOW TYPE NO STDIO The EXEC STRING specifies the UNIX command to execute In this case it runs the CMS SCRIPTS bin start script with the argument pro gram ARS The analyst s PATH environment variable is referenced to find the start script To summarize the general method to add an action button to a CDE pull up menu adda fp file to dt type fp_dynamic to define the action button s appearance in the tool bar add a dt file to dt types to define the button s actions add an icon set to dt icons add a dummy file to dt menu items Interactive Analysis
302. rent time block the ARS Load file is not updated and ARS uses an obsolete ARS load file To update the ARS load file for ARS 1 Using the left mouse button select the hours to be analyzed You must select consecutive hours Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures 2 Click ARSscan A dialogue box appears When the ARSscan function is finished running the dialogue box is populated with a description of the updated ARS load file 3 Click OK to continue The ARS load file is updated ARSscan operates on the time block selected in the Hours column of the allocation table not on the hours reserved in the Allocate column Although selected and allocated hours usually coincide in practice ARSscan can be used to generate an ARS load file for any time period you choose Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 These toggle buttons specify the Tuxedo session or agent number for the analysis session launched via the ARS button All applications associated with this analysis session will use this agent number to communicate This prevents messages and data from conflicting with those from another analysis session By default ARS is launched with agent 1 You can launch a second ARS session by selecting Session 2 in analyst_log before starting ARS A second dman and ARS are launched using agent 2 and all associated applications laun
303. rigin of the dynamic line Addi tional options are provided that use one or two of these selected points The options clear the points and dynamic line in addition to performing their specific function Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Options Latitude amp Longitude Distance amp Azimuth Clear Points Type Point Coordinates FiGURE 191 OPTIONS MENU IN MAP Options Latitude amp Longitude Distance amp Azimuth Type Point Coordinates Clear Points To use the MAP options 1 Click the right mouse button on the map to place a point on the map 2 Choose Options Latitude amp Longitude A dynamic line follows the mouse as you choose the option A dialogue box displays the latitude longitude of the selected point and then clears the point 3 Right click the mouse to select two points 4 Choose Options Distance amp Azimuth A dialogue box displays the coordinates of both points the distance and azimuth between them and then clears the points The Type Point and Clear Point options provide these static display boxes which do not update with mouse movement Pointer Coords described in the previous section provides a continuously updating display of latitude longitude distance and azimuth To display and Clear Points 1 Select more points
304. rival times shown in yellow The actual P arrivals often do not align with the theoretical because of differences between actual travel times and travel times calculated from earth models because of measurement error or because of location error Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures 21540 21541 21547 _ 21546 21553 21554 21555 127 22 161 01 49 38 0 141 01 58 14 36 71 02 15 49 18 65 02 29 02 21 166 02 45 24 77 161 02 46 58 17 65 02 58 35 36 1 EI FINES cb ael 5 9 aant sz IARCESicb 41 119 IARCES fkb 41 119 INOA cb 45186 NOA fkb 27 45196 ESDCicb fr 58 68 of V4 Jf OF I P ESDCIfKb 222720227 58 68 b 1 P VKAicb 81 355 VKAHkb gt PN 81 355 z P WRAIcb Dm way Wy Wy ALPIN Nis PS AIR ALA n P f 6 gt Select one or more channels FIGURE 83 WAVEFORMS ALIGNED ON THEORETICAL P PHASE View gt Align Channels gt Align Designated You can display the waveforms aligned on associated phases When applied the Align Designated menu option realigns the waveforms so that the associated arrivals of the same phase are aligned vertically Figure 84 show
305. rk of UNIX System Labs Inc X Window System is a registered trademark of The Open Group Ordering Information The ordering number for this document is SAIC 01 3002 This document is cited within other IDC documents as IDC6 5 1 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual CONTENTS About this Document PURPOSE SCOPE AUDIENCE RELATED INFORMATION USING THIS DOCUMENT Conventions Chapter 1 Introduction SOFTWARE OVERVIEW FUNCTIONALITY Features and Capabilities Performance Characteristics INVENTORY Files Database Tables Database Accounts Temporary Database Tables ENVIRONMENT AND STATES OF OPERATION Software Environment Hardware Environment Normal Operational State Contingencies Alternate States of Operation Chapter 2 Operational Procedures SOFTWARE STARTUP Starting Regular Analysis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 iv NN WO N 12 13 14 14 14 14 15 17 18 19 IDC DOCUMENTATION Startup Notes 21 SOFTWARE SHUTDOWN 23 BASIC PROCEDURES 23 Session Display Organization 23 Using Menus 26 Using Common Mouse Actions 26 Scheme and Shell Windows 27 Obtaining Help 27 ANALYST REVIEW STATION ARS PROCEDURES 28 ARS Window Layout and Organization 28 Toolbar Button Functions 41 ARS Menus 68 File Menu 68 Edit Menu 76 View Menu 102 Options
306. rom the mid part of the dialogue box You can select multiple stations 3 Select the individual channel elements in the top part of the display You can select multiple elements The bottom of the dialogue box contains buttons that expedite the selection and de selection process Click Done when finished The selected channels are displayed in ARS If you select a station but do not select any of its associated channel elements nothing from that sta tion is displayed Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV checkboxDialog jg opes ues Tal LU ser ue per ip nen es pe p NN hal BE FIGURE 90 LIST OF CHANNELS View gt Remove Channels The Remove Channels submenu provides options for removing channels from the current ARS display as shown in Figure 90 These options are typically applied to remove excess clutter from the display Removing channels does not prevent ARS from redisplaying them using Display All Channels Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures FiGURE 91 REMOVE CHANNELS SUBMENU View Remove Channels Remove Selected Channels The Remove Selected Channels menu option removes one or more selected chan nels To remov
307. rs window is displayed when the Filters option is used you will see these fields being updated You can adjust them independently by directly setting them in the Edit Parameters window To compare two filter settings on the same arrival use the method described in Edit Copy Arrival s on page 218 To apply a filter to an Fk calculation 1 Click Filters from the XfkDisplay toolbar A list of filters appears as shown in Figure 173 2 Select one filter band from the list preferably one that best matches the frequency content of the signal Alternatively you can enter the cutoff values into the fklof and fkhif fields below the filter list 3 Click Apply to choose the new filter You can also click Reset to use the default filter When you have chosen a filter click Calculate FK from the XfkDisplay toolbar to recompute the FK using the new filter XfkDisplay recomputes the FK using the new filter and returns a numeri cal result Click Display FK to see the revised FK plot The tabular annota tion in the FK plot window lists both the waveform filter and the FK band used during the FK calculation Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Filters Filter List o f m CO c3 w 0 5 0 0 0 0 fklof fkhif Ro Reset Hide Apply
308. rtain distances from an event ARS dis plays only those theoreticals at stations that are likely to record them based on distance from the event The theoretical arrival times are based on the selected event s current location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Theoretical Phases Remove Theoreticals You can remove theoretical phases from the display to remove clutter from the ARS screen or if a location has been updated to make the theoretical arrival times no longer current To remove theoreticals 1 Choose View Theoretical Phases Remove Theoreticals You need not select an event or channel All theoretical phases on all channels are removed from the ARS display View gt Theoretical Phases gt Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals The Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals menu option is linked with the Show Regional Theoretical Arrivals option under the Seismic Menu on page 145 This Define option allows you to build a custom theoretical phase list and the Show option displays it The Define option allows you to select those theoretical phases that you would like displayed when analyzing events at regional distances less than 20 degrees To define regional theoretical arrivals 1 Choose View gt Theoretical Phases gt Define Regional Theoretical Arrivals Y
309. ructions W Operational Procedures 3 Choose one of the phase names then click Done All selected arrivals phase names will change to the name selected If you selected an event the arrivals automatically are associated to the event Edit Retime The Retime menu provides several submenu options related to retiming arrivals as shown in Figure 61 FiGURE 61 RETIME OPTIONS IN EDIT MENU Edit Retime Retime Arrival Retiming an arrival is primarily an ARS waveform window operation The Retime Arrivals menu option retimes arrivals to fine tune their placement relative to the underlaying waveform feature they demarcate ARS restricts the retiming of Auto matic Processing detected arrivals to within four seconds of their SEL3 specified arrival time and provides an error message if you attempt to retime outside these bounds Analyst added arrivals are not subject to this restriction Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To retime an arrival 1 Select the arrival to be retimed An original arrival position might appear as shown in Figure 62 2 Use one of the following methods to position the t1 time marker to indi cate the desired new arrival time Using the middle mouse button click the waveform at the desired location This sets t1 to align with the waveform location selected T
310. rve hours select open hours and then click the Allocate button below the allocation table Individual hours are selected from the Hour col umn using the mouse Selected hours are highlighted in green and are usually left selected for the duration of analysis As analysis milestones are completed the Analyze Scan and Aftershock buttons below the allocation table are used to sig nal completion These buttons along with the Allocate button are described in more detail below Figure 248 shows a time block with time allocated reserved analyzed and scanned by an analyst Aftershock analysis was not performed for this time period TABLE 29 TIME ALLOCATION SECTION OF ANALYST LOG Heading Description and Use Hour Displays 24 hours of the current dataday Selected hours are shown in green Allocated Displays the names of the analysts for the hours they have allocated reserved for analysis Analyze Displays the names of the analysts when they complete analysis for allocated hours Scan Displays the names of the analysts when they complete scanning for allocated hours Aftershock Displays the names of the analysts when they complete aftershock analysis for allocated hours Hour Allocated Analyze Scan Aftershock 0 1 EH LII JL pace FIGURE 247 UNALLOCATED TIME BLOCK Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Ins
311. ry data 1 Choose File Write Recovery at any point during analysis to save the current session updates The recovery data are saved File Save Event The Save Event menu option saves an analyzed event to the database In an oper ational setting saved events are published in the REB Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To save an event 1 Select and perform analysis on an event 2 Complete analysis perform a final location and QC the event 3 Choose File gt Save Event Event data are saved and the event becomes frozen The event appears in the REB only if you have saved it in ARS If you do not save the event and you exit the ARS session any changes you made to the event are lost File gt Unfreeze The Unfreeze menu option provides two submenu options Unfreeze Origins and Unfreeze Arrivals as shown in Figure 52 These options allow you to unfreeze an origin or arrival s and make modifications FIGURE 52 UNFREEZE SUBMENU File gt Unfreeze gt Unfreeze Origins The Unfreeze Origins menu option is the same as Ufrz in the ARS toolbar Occasionally you may change your opinion of an event Sometimes additional data become available after you have saved an event or you may want to make a questionable phase non defining You cannot make changes to an event that has Interactive
312. s in XfkDisplay to a selected state To select all arrivals 1 Click Select All for the XfkDisplay toolbar All arrivals display a checkmark beside them indicating a selected status Deselect All The Deselect All function sets all arrivals in XfkDisplay to a deselected state To deselect all arrivals 1 Click Deselect All from the XfkDisplay toolbar Checkboxes beside each arrival become unchecked indicating an unselected status Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Beam XfkDisplay can create a beamed waveform segment for display in ARS XfkDisplay delays and sums together all the array channel waveform segments for a specific time interval surrounding the arrival This function has the effect of enhancing the snr in the waveform Unlike origin beams FK beams or detection beams are calculated based on the arrival s measured azimuth and slowness rather than the azimuth toward an origin location You produce an FK beam to optimize snr when the origin beam is not optimal for example when dealing with a poor event location To create a beam 1 Select the arrival to be beamed Click Beam from the XfkDisplay toolbar A temporary FK or detection beam is computed and sent to ARS The waveform segment appears in the ARS waveform display sorted by dis tance from the selected event and aligned on the curre
313. s in the greater S H I analysis system The base of the config tree is specified by the CMS CONFIG environment variable and is usually set to CMS HOME config The structure of the config tree is described in Koh98b and instructions for con figuring and customizing the files in this tree are provided in IDC6 2 4 A section of IDC6 2 4 is specific to the Interactive Analysis software Those applications that use files in the config tree are started with a parameter par file specified on their command line These par files or the par files they ref erence specify the paths and filenames for the configuration data files referenced The dman application starts most applications and its par file specifies the execu tion command lines and therefore the par file path names for these applications The dman application is described in more detail on page 364 DATABASE The Interactive Analysis software provides a major analysis step in the flow of seis mic hydroacoustic and infrasonic data through the various IDC database accounts In general the applications read and write data to the LEB account however table synonyms often redirect input from other accounts Figure 256 shows the actual analysis database accounts accessed via synonyms These redirec tions include the waveform and detection data in the IDCX account the station Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 4 v IDC DOCU
314. s of resolution data errors missing channel data noise within a signal mismatch between the FK processing band and the signal s spectrum or signals from mixed sources are all reasons why an FK result may be ambiguous In difficult cases you can review the event location and the signal energy in the waveform data and adjust the FK processing band to deduce the true azimuth and slowness See Filters on page 223 to adjust the FK processing band Besides the graphical representation of the XfkDisplay output the FK plot window also displays the output numerically as shown in Figure 160 FIGURE 160 NUMERICAL OUTPUT Or XFKDISPLAY Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The color bar is the legend relating color to signal power where red represents the highest power and blue represents the lowest power The right column displays the azimuth and slowness at the peak signal power in the FK plot The left column dis plays azimuth and slowness at the position of the cursor Table 15 describes the fields in the FK plot s tabular output TABLE 15 FK PLOT TABULAR OUTPUT Field Description Filt Bandpass of data prefilter FK band Frequency band used in the FK computation Sta Station name Phase Phase name Fstat F statistic s left column Slowness at cursor position
315. s the effect of shift ing more arrivals into the display The Unzoom options are shown in Figure 96 FIGURE 96 UNZOOM OPTIONS UNDER VIEW MENU Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Unzoom Unzoom to Previous Window All of the zoom submenu options and the compress options described below save the current zoom level before performing the selected zoom action The Unzoom to Previous Window menu option un does the last zoom action to return the time scale to its previous zoom level Unzoom can be repeated until the display is restored to its originally loaded time window A maximum of 20 zoom levels are stored There is no equivalent rezoom feature To return the display to the previous zoom level 1 Choose View Unzoom Unzoom to Previous Window The time scale of the waveform display adjusts to return to the previous zoom level The display zooms in or out depending on the previous zoom level View Unzoom Unzoom AII The Unzoom All menu option unzooms the waveform display to the originally loaded time window For example if you had originally loaded four hours of data Unzoom All displays the entire four hours of data This option returns to the base zoom level deleting all other saved zoom levels To unzoom all waveforms 1 Choose View Unzoom Unzoom All You need not select an
316. s waveforms that have been aligned on associated P phases This option aligns on actual arrival time To align associated phases 1 Select event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V 2 Choose View gt Align Channels gt Align Designated A phase list appears 3 Select the phase on which the waveforms should align then click Done in the phase list window The waveforms are time shifted to realign the chosen phase vertically in the middle of the ARS screen FIGURE 84 View ALIGN DESIGNATED View gt Align Channels gt Unalign The Unalign menu option resets the waveform alignment of all channels to the same absolute time or measurement time Therefore you can use the middle mouse button to display time on individual waveforms and the same horizontal Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures location will show the same absolute time across all channels Aligning channels on absolute time is particularly useful for scanning The option is referred to as Unalign because waveform alignment is not relative to a specific event or phase To unalign channels 1 Choose View Align Channels Unalign It is not necessary to select an event The waveforms align based on time o
317. s you to look at all the channels for the sta tion of the selected channel To expand a station 1 Select an event if desired 2 Select a channel 3 Choose Fusion Expand Station All channels or elements belonging to the station of the selected channel are displayed as shown in Figure 140 If an event is selected the chan nels are displayed sorted by distance from the event Channels that are added to the display are filtered with the same filter as the selected chan nel FIGURE 140 EXPAND STATION DISPLAY Fusion Unexpand Station The Unexpand Station menu option can only be used after using Expand Station Unexpand Station returns ARS to its prior display state All channels added by Expand Station are removed from the display Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To unexpand a station 1 After using Expand Station choose Fusion Unexpand Station All channels added to the ARS display via Expand Station are removed Previously displayed channels remain Hot Keys in ARS Hot keys are key key sequences that provide an efficient method of accessing menus and frequently used options through the keyboard Table 3 describes the hot keys available in ARS To use the hot keys press the Control or Meta key while pressing the second letter key For example ctrl a means press the Control key
318. script launches the JRE and spec ifies the Java code files The following Java archives and shared objects compose IADR Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures CMS HOME jlib IADR jar ava code archive CMS HOME jlib libjipc so QNI shared library CMS HOME jlib ipc jar IPC code arcive CMS HOME jlib util jar utilities archive The application specifies the par file ScMS CONFIG app config interactive IADR IADR par when it starts ADR This file in turn references the par file 5 5 CONFIG system specs process par The IADR application accesses the database tables IDCX request and IDCX msgdisc in addition to the standard interactive database usage HART The HART application is implemented in Java therefore its execution requires that a Java Runtime Environment RE be specified in the environment variable JAVA HOME The CMS HOME bin HART shell script launches the JRE and spec ifies the Java code files The following Java archives and shared objects compose HART CMS HOME jlib HART jar ava code archive CMS HOME jlib libHART compute so QNI shared library CMS HOME jlib util jar utilities archive HART is not monitored by Instead it is started by the cMS SCRIPTS bin start hart server script which is started by the CMS SCRIPTS bin start script which is started from the HART
319. scription Rank Weighted value based on the predicted reduction in the error ellipse of the current location s error ellipse if this stations data were added to the location computation A high number means that significant reduction in the error ellipse is predicted with use of this station Delta Distance from the event in degrees Azimuth Station to event azimuth A Stations sorted lowest to highest B Stations sorted highest to lowest Delta a Delta v 6 11 144 78 43 78 137 56 22 1489 2 128 48 21 67 123 92 22 06 122 75 22 68 112 3 2566 110 52 33 7 104 08 34 102 55 mu a 22 56 43 43 8913 46 09 97 EE SS 92 53 52 06 89 8 61 56 87 44 62 11 83 13 62 29 81 47 68 5 75 77 68 73 7317 73 17 68 73 5 68 5 81 47 62 29 83 13 62 11 FIGURE 201 WEASSESS COLUMN SORTING OPTIONS Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 251 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures The sorting changes as follows for each selected header Stations are sorted by type in alphabetical order CUR AUX is the only type currently used wm Station Stations are sorted alphabetically Probability Stations are sorted by probability of detection Rank Stations are sorted by rank m Delta Stations are sorted by distance to the event m Azimuth Stations are sorted by station to event azimuth Whe
320. selecting Object Attributes then a separate dialogue box is dis played for each superimposed one on top of each other To see object attributes from Map 1 Select those objects events phases and so forth from the map 2 Choose View View Selected Objects Object Attributes The attribute information of each selected object is displayed in separate dialogue boxes View Map Outlines Map outlines are the boundaries of available map projections Maps of a number of specific geographic regions are available for example one map outline sur rounds the North Polar region The menu options are shown in Figure 183 FiGURE 183 MAP OUTLINES OPTIONS IN MAP View Map Outlines Show Map Outlines The Show Map Outlines option displays the current map view with all the possible map outlines available Map outlines are best displayed using a world map as shown in Figure 184 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 233 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures To display a view of all map outlines available in Map 1 Choose View Map Outlines Show Map Outlines An outline of all map views available in the Map program is displayed superimposed upon the current map view FiGURE 184 MAP OUTLINES AVAILABLE IN MAP View Map Outlines Unshow Map Outlines The Unshow Map Outlines option removes the map outlines from the current map d
321. selecting stations one at a time Using the Control key you can skip over stations in the sorting order while making selections Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 253 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures WaveExpert Assess Origin 20892079 Station Probability Rank INNA EKA ELK DAVOS SPITS HFS T IRPN FiGURE 203 NON CONTINUOUS SELECTION OF STATIONS Map Selected Stations WEAssess contains one pop up option which calls the Map function When dis played Map plots two sets of stations It displays the stations and travel paths of stations that are already loaded into ARS and whose waveforms contain phases that are being used to locate the event These are displayed in black Map also dis plays stations that you have highlighted in WEAssess for request These are dis played in red This feature allows you to see the distribution of existing and requested stations around the event and evaluate which stations would contribute most to an event location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Qo May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Azimuth 6 11 57 98 22 68 166 66 13 78 FiGURE 204 MAP SELECTED OPTION IN WEASSESS To see the distribution of stations in Map
322. ser Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Enlarge Plot The Enlarge Plot option redraws the displayed graphs in a larger vertical size so that only one of the current graphs fills the current PolariPlot graph area View Compact Plots The Compact Plots option redraws all graphs in the current display in a smaller ver tical size so that three of the current graphs simultaneously fit in the PolariPlot graph area View Coordinates The Coordinates submenu shown in Figure 230 provides two mutually exclusive options for displaying coordinate values in the Active Series parameter fields above the graph area FiGURE 230 COORDINATES DISPLAY OPTIONS View Coordinates Display Coordinates The Display Coordinates option displays the polarization coordinates continuously as the cursor moves over the graph This is the default coordinate display method View Coordinates Sample Coordinates The Sample Coordinates option updates the polarization coordinates in the param eter field only when you click the left mouse button within the graph area When you click within a graph a vertical line is also drawn at the selected position Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV View Grid The Grid submenu option shown
323. ses IDC5 1 3RevO 1 IDC Processing of Seismic Hydroacoustic and Infrasonic Data IDC5 2 1 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions About this Document w Configuration of PIDC Processing Data Files IDC6 2 4 Distributed Application Control System Software User Manual IDC6 5 2RevO 1 Analyst Review Station Scheme Functions IDC7 2 2 See References on page 369 for a list of documents that supplement this docu ment The following UNIX manual man pages apply to the existing Time series Analysis software m ARS m XfkDisplay Map SpectraPlot PolariPlot m JADR HART m DFX USING THIS DOCUMENT This document is part of the overall documentation architecture for the IDC It is part of the Technical Instructions category which provides guidance for installing operating and maintaining the IDC systems This document is organized as fol lows Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the software s capabilities develop ment and operating environment Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions About this Document m Chapter 2 Operational Procedures This chapter describes how to use the software and includes detailed pro cedures for startup and shutdown basic and advanced features
324. session because it takes longer than most tools to ini tialize Usually by the time you wish to make a request WEAssess is ready and lis tening for messages Its client window appears iconified on the screen opposite ARS You initiate requests for auxiliary data from the Tools menu in ARS as shown in Figure 199 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures FIGURE 199 GENERATING DATA REQUEST FROM ARS To request auxiliary data 1 In the ARS choose Tools Request Auxiliary Data Request Data see 1 Tools gt Request Auxiliary Data page 143 The WEAssess tool with a list of stations appears as shown in Figure 200 The WEAssess tool contains a list of all auxiliary stations that are available for data request during normal operations In Figure 200 the list is from the CUR AUX net work Table 16 describes the six columns in WEAssess By default stations are displayed in order of highest to lowest rank To change the sorting order click once using any mouse button on the column header whose val ues determine the station sort order For example to sort stations based on dis tance to the event click once on the header marked Delta The stations are sorted by distance to the event with the closest station at the top If you click the same header again the stations sort in reverse order with the furthest station
325. sfonts as specified by the environment variable XGKSFontDir Map also accesses its own database account as specified in the environment variable Map DATABASE and described in IDC5 1 3RevO 1 and IDC5 1 1Rev2 Map does not write a log file but writes error messages to its Scheme window AEQ The AEQ application references a default X resource file in CMS HOME X11 app defaults AEQ It does not have an IDC customization file Configuration of AEQ is primarily through the parameters set in its par file and the rules files that are referenced AEQ provides an extensive set of configuration parameters which are described in the AEQ man page AEQ 1 application specifies the par file CMS CONFIG app config interactive AEQ AEQ par when it starts AEQ This file in turn references the following par files CMS CONFIG system specs process par CMS CONFIG system specs interactive par AEQ uses a public domain rules interpretation library CLIPS to perform its event analysis The AEQ par file specifies the CLIPS rules file cMs config interactive AEOQ AEQ clp AEQ does not write a log file although a results file can be specified in the AEQ par file Presently AEQ writes its results to its display window IADR The ADR application is implemented in Java therefore its execution requires that a Java Runtime Environment JRE be specified in the environment variable JAVA HOME The CMS HOME bin IADR shell
326. specifying filter settings click Apply to apply the new settings and retain the window click Done to apply the new settings and close the window or click Cancel to close the window without applying the filter settings Edit Filter Unfilter The Unfilter option removes filtering from all graphs in the current active series displayed series Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Edit Freeze Series By default when a new message is received from ARS the new data replaces the currently displayed data in PolariPlot To preserve the current session so that it is not erased or overwritten by the incoming message choose Edit Freeze Series before sending a new message from ARS Freeze Series is a toggle switch if enabled select it again to disable it Edit Rotation Mode The Rotation Mode option displays a dialogue box which allows you to specify a manual rotation for the input orthogonal coordinates This overrides the auto matic eigenvector computation Three options are available as shown in Figure 225 rotate to the origin specified in the orid box rotate to the latitude and longi tude specified by two sliders or rotate to the azimuth and incidence angles speci fied by two sliders OridDialog popup Azimuth FiGURE 225 ROTATION MODE DiALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User M
327. splay graphically presents an arrival s back azimuth and slowness inverse velocity to aid in evaluating its association to an event SSpectraPlot performs spectrum analysis on waveform data m Map application maps event and station locations enabling analysts to observe where an event occurred and the geographic distribution of stations where arrivals were detected AEQ compares event parameters with historical data and reports if the event is statistically anomalous in some way Automated processing functions that compute signal features such as amplitude period and signal to noise ratio snr can be recalled during interactive analysis to update hydroacoustic or seismic arrival parameters Performance Characteristics Delays are often observed during initialization of individual applications ARS takes considerable time to load data Four to eight hours of data are typically loaded into ARS for routine analysis However ARS is capable of loading more than 24 hours of data and its performance slows as more data are loaded XfkDisplay SpectraPlot Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 1 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 1 Technical Instructions Introduction PolariPlot and AEQ are all initialized when they are first used but subsequent use elicits rapid response Interactive recall processing IADR HART DFX are initial ized each time they are invoked
328. station at about the same time XfkDisplay works by performing a frequency wavenumber f k analysis for array stations or by polarization analysis at 3 C stations The algorithms for these analy ses are given in IDC5 2 1 From this analysis azimuth and slowness are presented to you for interactive review in the form of a tabular display and an interactive GUI XfkDisplay takes its name from frequency F wavenumber K spectrum and the XfkDisplay plot is referred to as the FK plot FK is a misnomer when applied to the analysis of 3 C stations Although the data presentation is the same the data are generated by different means Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v Chapter 2 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures XfkDisplay Window Layout and Organization Figure 157 shows the main XfkDisplay window with its menu bar tool bar arrival list and message area While Figure 157 shows only one arrival XfkDisplay can handle multiple arrivals the arrival list becomes scrollable when the number of arrivals exceed the window limits A number of parameters are displayed for each arrival including results and statistics for the FK analysis Table 14 describes the fields in the XfkDisplay arrival list XikDisplay ee File Edit View arid 29017659 ers fktype phase i cfreq azimuth delaz slow delslo fstat fkqual ASAR
329. t automatically redisplay a dismissed FK plot The Display Fk option redisplays the FK plot To redisplay the Fk plot 1 Select one or more arrivals 2 Choose View Display Fk FK plot windows are displayed for all selected arrivals Duplicate FK plots are produced for selected arrivals already displaying an FK plot View Update Display The Update Display option updates an arrival s FK plot to reflect a new FK calcula tion For example if you adjust an FK recipe and then use Calculate FK you can use Update Display to update the FK plot with the new information To update the Fk plot 1 If a new FK is calculated for a selected arrival and its FK plot window is already displayed choose View Update Display The displayed FK plot is updated to display the new FK calculation for the arrival Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Toolbar XfkDisplay provides a number of toolbar function buttons for options frequently accessed during routine analysis These buttons are shown in Figure 162 on page 210 Send to ARS The Send to ARS function is the same as Edit gt Send Arrival s to ARS Calculate Fk The Calculate Fk function is the same as Edit gt Calculate Display Fk The Display Fk function is the same as View gt Display Fk Select All The Select All function sets all arrival
330. t non defining Excessively large time residuals non defining Bogus depths FIGURE 251 REBQC Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 323 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Show mon dd The Show mon dd function is linked to a script whose name means monitor dat aday This script lists all events saved to the LEB database account for the selected time block The LEB is the REB before its final review and publication To use the mon dd function 1 Select hours for which saved events should be displayed Click on each hour consecutively with the left mouse button Hours must be selected consecutively for Show mon dd to function Each selected hour will turn green 2 Click Show mon dd A list of all saved events is displayed in a separate window This list is not interactive and changes to events cannot be made via this list 3 After reviewing the events in this list click OK to exit the mon dd win dow Message Area The bottom section of the analyst log Allocation window is a message box If you attempt an incorrect action or if an error occurs a message is displayed here Fig ure 252 presents such an error message ERROR Selected hours must be continuous id FIGURE 252 MESSAGE OUTPUT FROM ANALYST_LOG Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Tec
331. t the station is predicted to be blocked Simultaneously Map is launched which displays the paths between the selected stations and the event You can use the map background to ver ify Map Hydro Path Blocked predictions Hydro gt Select All Hydro Channels You may choose to perform an analysis task such as filtering or aligning on all hydroacoustic channels at the same time The Select All Hydro Channels menu option makes this task easier To select all hydroacoustic channels 1 Choose Hydro Select All Hydro Channels You need not select an event however subsequent tasks may require a selected event All hydroacoustic channels become highlighted indicating that they have been selected Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Hydro gt Add Hydro Arrival Remarks You may need to add a comment about a specific hydroacoustic arrival You may add a preformatted remark using the Add Hydro Arrival Remarks option Edit gt Remarks on page 96 provides instructions for editing general remarks To add remarks to a hydroacoustic arrival 1 Select a single arrival on a hydroacoustic station 2 Choose Hydro Add Hydro Arrival Remarks A list of remarks appears as shown in Figure 124 3 Choose one appropriate comment then click Done A remark is attached to the arrival 4 To view th
332. t to accommodate the beam They are sorted by distance to the event Figure 36 shows a temporary beam channel for station CMAR Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V FIGURE 36 TEMPORARY BEAM CHANNEL AIPh Align on Default Phase The AIPh toolbar button aligns waveforms on the default phase s theoretical arrival time as determined by the event s current location and origin time and the theo retical travel time from the event to the station To align waveforms on the default phase 1 Select an event 2 Setthe default phase if necessary 3 Select AIPh from the ARS toolbar All waveforms are time shifted to align to the default phase s theoretical arrival time at each station Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures UnAl Unalign Phase The UnAl toolbar button unaligns waveforms This function removes any time shifting of the waveforms and displays all channels on the same relative time axis To unalign a phase 1 Select UnAl from the ARS toolbar The waveforms in ARS realign to absolute time They no longer are aligned on any theoretical travel time or origin time SBD Sort by Distance The SBD toolbar button sorts channels by distance from the event based on the event s c
333. tabase from which data is to be loaded The suggested values are taken from the file ARS load which is located in your home directory and generated by analyst log 2 Verify the information then click Done The waveform data event information arrivals and channel display are loaded into ARS This process typically takes about 5 minutes for a time block of 4 hours When data are first read ARS displays the full time window Each technology has display window limits beyond which the waveforms will display as flat line traces These limits are 30 minutes for seismic 1 5 hours for hydroacoustic and 5 hours for infrasonic If the time interval being loaded into ARS is greater than these limits you will need to zoom in to a smaller time window to view actual waveforms The arrivals bars will be displayed at larger time windows but may have their phase labels omitted The Options Menu on page 129 provides options for showing and unshowing these display items File Read Recovery Data The Read Recovery Data menu option recovers changes that you have made if you lose your ARS session either through system failure or abnormal ARS termina tion To read recovery data 1 Upon starting a new ARS session after an abnormal exit instead of selecting Read choose File Read Recovery Data 1 Use dman to restart ARS instead of the ARS button in analyst log which will unsuccessfully attempt to start another dman Interactiv
334. tain tables such as site or origin File Exit The Exit option quits the Map session An alternative method is provided by Stop ping Applications in dman on page 306 To exit Map 1 Choose File Exit Map and its Scheme window disappear Edit Menu The Edit menu provides options for manipulating display objects in Map as shown in Figure 176 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures Object Database Query Remove All Objects Store Selected Objects Edit Selected Objects Recall Stored Objects Edit Layers Deselect Objects Remove Selected Objects Define Layer Select Layer FIGURE 176 EDIT MENU IN MAP Edit Object Database Query After you have connected to an appropriate database see File New Database on page 227 you can construct queries for the mappable objects arrivals origins originorigerrs and sites The menu option for each object expands to a submenu that provides options for creating and executing queries shown in Figure 177 File Edit View Options Analyst Tools Database e TAM Arrivals Enter Edit Queries Remove All Objects Origins SEIEN UEM Ys Edit Selected Objects originOrigerrs Edit Layers Sites FIGURE 177 OBJECT DATABASE QUERY OPTIONS To construct a query 1 Choose Edit Object Database Query
335. ted event s depth is reasonable and common for the area the depth output displays 0 00 low seismicity at depth If the depth is unreasonable for the calculated hypocentral location the output displays 1 00 low seismicity at depth As with the low seismicity areas it is possible for the depth to be historically uncommon which means that 1 00 low seismicity at depth is displayed but is still considered acceptable for the tectonic region In this case the summary output at the top of the AEQ display may still indicate that the event is not anomalous 0 00 ANOMALOUS 100 Low seismicity at depth FIGURE 198 AEQ Low SEISMICITY AT DEPTH OUTPUT AEQ Procedures Summary During regular analysis AEQ is generally consulted as one of the final steps in ana lyzing an event After refining the location as much as possible and with the event selected analysts select Tools gt AEQ This will send a message to AEQ to assess the event is launched if it is not already running When AEQ has finished assess ing the event it reports the degree of anomalousness in an AEQ report window When you have finished reviewing the results you can close the output display by clicking OK However you can keep display windows open AEQ launches another display window for each new message sent from ARS AEQ Menus AEQ contains one pull down menu the File menu To exit the AEQ program choose File Exit No other menus or options are available in AEQ Inter
336. ted tools If ARS reports that it is unable to initiate interprocess communications contact your system administrator Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV SOFTWARE SHUTDOWN You normally exit an analysis session either by choosing File Exit in ARS or by using the Kill All option in dman To exit ARS through the File menu 1 In ARS choose File Exit A confirmation dialogue box appears If unsaved changes exist in the ARS session the dialogue box indicates that changes will be discarded 2 Tocontinue to exit click OK To exit ARS and all tools related to the ARS agent from dman 1 Select Kill All in dman dman presents a confirmation dialogue box 2 Click OK to send an exit signal to all running applications using the same Tuxedo agent The tools exit without presenting additional dialogue box prompts Exit all Interactive Analysis Subsystem applications before you use the EXIT button on the CDE tool bar to log out of your UNIX session BASIC PROCEDURES Session Display Organization The typical analyst workstation uses two screens to display ARS and its associated tools Generally the ARS session is displayed on the left screen 0 0 screen while the other tools are displayed on the right screen 0 1 screen The left screen shown in Figure 8 contains the CDE toolbar at the bottom the ARS
337. tep in analyzing an event The Show Hydro Channels option displays a group of hydroacoustic stations at the top of the ARS display To show hydroacoustic channels 1 Select an event if desired 2 Choose Hydro gt Show Hydro Channels You need not select channels All hydroacoustic channels are positioned at the top of the ARS display If an event is selected the waveform data are aligned on the theoretical H T phase Both T and H phases are considered by ARS to have the same theoretical arrival times Hydro gt Unshow Hydro Channels The Unshow Hydro Channels option undisplays all hydroacoustic channels Undis playing hydroacoustic data relieves you from having to scroll through unnecessary data Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 152 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To display hydroacoustic channels 1 If hydroacoustic stations are displayed choose Hydro Unshow Hydro Channels You need not select an event or channel All hydroacoustic channels are removed from the display Hydro Align Hydro on T The Align Hydro on T menu option aligns hydroacoustic data on a theoretical T phase arrival time after you create an event or update its location To align hydroacoustic data on a theoretical T phase arrival time 1 Make certain that hydroacoustic data are displayed 2 Choose Hydro Align Hydro on T The waveform data al
338. ter 2 Operational Procedures V FIGURE 95 ZOOM SUBMENU UNDER VIEW MENU View Zoom Zoom t1 t2 The time scale at the bottom of the ARS window shows the time span of the cur rently displayed waveforms and varies depending on the current zoom level rang ing from hours to seconds The t1 and t2 time markers can be set to bracket a subset of the current time window The Zoom t1 t2 option zooms the waveform display to display just the time interval between the t1 and t2 markers To zoom 11 42 1 Position the t1 and t2 markers at the bottom of the ARS display Move the markers by left clicking and dragging them to the desired position 2 Choose View Zoom Zoom t1 t2 ARS zooms into the time segment defined by the t1 and t2 markers The time scale and therefore the waveforms expand The arrivals shift their positions accordingly Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures View Zoom Expand Window by 2 The Expand Window by 2 menu option zooms into exactly half the previously dis played window To expand the window by 2 1 Choose View Zoom Expand Window by 2 You need not select an event or channel ARS zooms into a window centered on one half of the previously dis played window The time scale is expanded by two View Zoom Expand Window by 8 The Expand Window by 8 m
339. th a selected event and its associated arrivals You can also use two hot key shortcuts ctrl a is the same as selecting AlphaList gt Show with Selected and ctrl b is the same as selecting AlphaList gt Show with Associated Like the main ARS window AlphaList window is divided into several areas The top area contains event information the area below that contains arrival information the next area contains channel information and the bottom area contains a tool bar for accessing functions commonly used while analyzing events within AlphaList Each of these areas is described in the following sections Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Event Information in AlphaList Figure 142 shows the top area of AlphaList window which contains event infor mation The columns present the data features that define an event such as its time location magnitude and measures of statistical accuracy Table 4 describes each of the fields in the event area of AlphaList You cannot update the event fields but these fields are updated when a new location is computed depth sdepth date and time minax strike sdobs FiGURE 142 EVENT INFORMATION IN ALPHALIST TABLE 4 EVENT FIELDS OF ALPHALIST Field Definition Sel Indicates if the event is selected If pressed the event is selected orid
340. that the application is ready to receive messages If the application does not start within 30 seconds dman turns the icon red to indicate a problem Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures messages Map messages fkDisplay SpectraPlot messages PolariPlot messages messages WEAssess messages WERequest messages a B AEQ z messages FIGURE 240 DMAN STATUS WINDOW WITH AEQ APPLICATION LAUNCHED Stopping Applications in dman In addition to stopping an application through the application s exit menu option you can stop an application through dman Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To stop an application such as AEQ in dman 1 With the AEQ application running click the AEQ application s icon in dman dman prompts you to confirm by displaying the message Really kill AEQ 2 Click OK to continue or click Cancel to keep the application running The AEQ application exits The icon in dman turns orange and then turn gray to indicate that it has stopped running For manual exits dman sends a terminate signal to the application and then turns its icon orange dman turns the icon gray when it receives notification from Tux
341. the Locate option in the tool bar in the AlphaList window or in the Locator Dialogue Box Message None Description The mouse buttons and keyboard no longer are effective in the ARS window Action The Caps Lock on the keyboard may be enabled Disable the Caps Lock function to return control to the mouse and keyboard Error Recovery Although an ARS crash is expected to be a rare event you should be aware of the methods for recovering a crashed session The sections File Read Recovery Data on page 69 and File Write Recovery Data on page 70 discuss how to recover an ARS session If the ARS session disappears meaning there has been a serious application crash the Read and Write Recovery functions and procedures allow you to recover all of the modifications made to an ARS session and to con tinue working with little or no data loss There are no similar methods to recover from crashes by the other interactive applications However each application may be quickly restarted through dman by selecting the application s icon Messages that were not processed prior to the crash are processed upon restarting the application Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 3 Troubleshooting V REPORTING PROBLEMS The following procedures are recommended for reporting problems with the appli cation software 1 Diagnose the problem as
342. their memory caches You can sometimes hear activity on the com puter s hard drive when this occurs 6 Relogin to the windowing system and verify that the new configuration is in effect 7 f you are updating an existing analyst and the configuration becomes corrupted remove the existing dt tree exit and relogin This should install a new empty dt tree upon which mkCMsSuser make a cleaner installation Use the CDE Style Manager Window tool to verify that the following two options Raise Window when Made Active and Allow Primary Window On Top are both off unchecked In a Solaris 7 default environment these are on They can cause an application to appear frozen if a primary window raises above a blocking popup window You cannot see or access the popup but the primary window does not respond The correct settings are shown in Figure 254 Also access the Style Manager Startup tool and make sure the At Login Return to Home session is set By default the Resume current session is set which restarts any applications running when the CDE session is exited This may unexpectedly start unwanted applica tions The correct settings are shown in Figure 255 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 4 Technical Instructions Installation and Configuration Procedures zc Default Window Behavior Point In Window To Make Active Click In Window To Make Active
343. this arrival That is does it contribute to the event location and time d indicates defin ing n indicates non defining azi Indicates the back azimuth deg direction from which the signal arrives at the station ares Indicates azimuth residual residual from theoretical azimuth deg ad Indicates whether azimuth is a defining feature for this arrival That is does it contribute to the event location and time d indicates defining n indicates non defining slow Slowness inverse velocity of the signal s deg sres Slowness residual residual from theoretical slowness s deg sd Indicates whether slowness is a defining feature for this arrival That is does it contribute to the event location and time d indicates defining n indicates non defining amp Measured amplitude of the signal per Indicates the dominant period of signal period of amplitude measure ment s dsnr Indicates the signal to noise ratio for depth phase signal ratio to 5 second noise base preceding the depth phase Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV The phase type is editable although choosing Edit Rename is the preferrable method for changing phase type You can edit the arrival time azimuth and slow ness to specify whether they are defining or non defining during computation of an event location To edit these fe
344. tiple same az Multiple same az Select remarks T phase weak signal low SNR T phase multiple energy peaks T phase low confidence association T phase low confidence time emergent Noise Impulsive possible explosion Cancel Multiple mixed az Multiple mixed az Announced nuclear test Cancel High background noise Known station timing error Suspected station timing error Done Cancel FiGURE 80 STATIC REMARKS SELECTION DiALOGUE BOXES Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Figure 80 also shows the static remarks available for seismic and hydroacoustic arrivals Adding remarks to an arrival is similar in procedure to adding a remark to an event Be careful to have only the intended arrival and no other arrivals or events selected or they will also receive the remark Edit gt Remarks gt Edit Object Remarks The Edit Object Remarks menu option is used to edit or delete an arrival or event s remarks To edit object remarks 1 Select an event with a remark attached to it 2 Choose Edit Remarks Edit Object Remarks A text editing box containing the current remark appears 3 Edit the remark then click Done If the remark text is cleared completely blank when you click Done the remark is effectively deleted and the R is removed from the eve
345. tructions Hour Allocated Analyze Scan Aftershock 0 1 fowler fowler fowler 1 2 fowler fowler fowler 2 3 fowler fowler fowler Chapter 2 Operational Procedures FIGURE 248 ALLOCATED ANALYZED AND SCANNED TIME BLOCK Function Buttons Two function button areas are displayed below the allocation table as shown in Figure 249 The top row of function buttons pertain to individual columns of the allocation table while the lower set provides more generalized functionality based on the hours selected in the allocation window Un Allocate Analyze Scan Aftershock ARSscan ARSload Session 1 Session 2 1 Session 3 Run Show mon dd FIGURE 249 FUNCTIONS IN ANALYST LOG Un The Un button is used in conjunction with the Allocate Analyze Scan and After shock buttons It reverses the action of these buttons Un is used to remove an analyst s name from an allocated cell in other words to de allocate the cell Using this capability to unreserve an allocated but un analyzed hour or time block is its normal intent Use caution to un complete a milestone column Signaling comple tion of an analysis milestone triggers initiation of post analysis processing on the selected time block Un signaling after post analysis processing has begun can have adverse impacts and lead to database inconsistencies Interactive Anal
346. tures tmp id ims ARS arrival tmp id ims ARS assoc tmp id gt ims ARS origin tmp id ims ARS origerr tmp id ims ARS wftag tmp id Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 1 Technical Instructions Introduction ENVIRONMENT AND STATES OF OPERATION Software Environment The software is configured to run under Solaris 7 Sun Microsystem s version of UNIX CDE 1 3 2 and X11R6 4 and Motif 2 1 windowing libraries The software depends on the ORACLE 8i database server and the Tuxedo version 6 5 interpro cess communication software Hardware Environment You must select the hardware on which to run the software components Software components are generally mapped to hardware to be roughly consistent with the software configuration model A typical analyst workstation is a Sun Microsystems Ultra60 computer with dual CPU 512 megabytes of Random Access Memory RAM and dual Creator 3D 24 bit color graphics boards driving dual 21 display monitors Less powerful hardware configurations of Sun Microsystem s worksta tions will run the software but with degraded performance Normal Operational State The Interactive Analysis Subsystem components are used interactively by operators trained in the analysis of S H I technology sources Analysis sessions are initiated by analyst action using a custom configured Sun CDE windowing interface Indi vid
347. ual modules are launched in response to interprocess communication actions using the Tuxedo interprocess communication libraries and initialized using ORACLE database tables configuration parameter files and X window resource configuration files Post interactive analysis recall processing is initiated via data base triggers configured into the ORACLE database and activated by analyst actions in the analyst log application Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 1 Introduction V Contingencies Alternate States of Operation The software requires a trained operator and is not intended for use in automated or offline mode In normal operation the software takes its input from the Standard Event List 3 SEL3 and saves its output to the Late Event Bulletin LEB ORACLE database accounts ARS and its associated tools can be configured to run using database accounts other than these for example for training or research pur poses Individual applications can be launched from the UNIX command line if proper command line parameters are provided UNIX manual man pages for each application are available to document command line usage Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures This chapter provides instructions for using the software a
348. uality check Ufrz unfreeze event Sav save event Asc On Select Associated Phases The Asc On toolbar button selects all phases associated with the single selected event Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual Q May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To select associated phases 1 Select a single event 2 Select AscOn from the ARS toolbar All arrivals associated to the event are selected in the ARS waveform dis play These can be seen in Figure 28 as having their phase label displayed in reverse video The arrivals are also selected in AlphaList if it is displayed see Edit gt AlphaList on page 95 FIGURE 28 SELECT ASSOCIATED PHASES Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Co Ph Disassociate Coda Phases The Co Ph toolbar button disassociates coda phases Coda phases are generally defined as those arrivals whether associated or not that appear closely in time behind a main arrival and that have similar azimuth and slowness to the main arrival s phase type These arrivals trigger the detector but are not likely to be a distinct phase they are reverberations following the appearance of the main phase and are not assigned travel times they are assigned the suffix x such as Px or tx to distinguish them as
349. uency and Power parameter display 299 procedures 291 smoothing 299 starting up 142 station display waveforms by distance 175 station channel selecting for display 58 T t1 and t2 35 temporary database tables purging 329 time making undefining 87 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual time bar 35 time difference determining 36 toolbar adding Next and Previous buttons 174 Ad Ph function 48 AIPh function 51 Asc On function 42 Beam function 56 Bm Ph function 50 Co Ph function 44 Ele function 58 F K function 56 Loc function 59 Ph P function 47 QC function 65 Rej function 64 Rn Ph function 49 Sav function 67 SBD function 52 SBU function 53 SICh function 57 Th function 54 Th O function 56 Ufrz function 66 Uftr function 45 UnAl function 52 use 26 toolbar XfkDisplay 221 Beam 222 Filter 223 Tools menu 138 AEQ 139 Beam Array 139 Map 140 PolariPlot 141 Request Auxiliary Data 143 Request Data 144 Show Request Status 144 SpectraPlot 142 XfkDisplay 143 Tuxedo 353 typographical conventions vi Index v v Index V validation test 366 View menu 102 Align Channels 103 Align Designated 104 Align Theoretical 103 Unalign 105 Copy Channels 115 Display All Channels 112 Filter 106 Add Cascade Filter to List 111 Add Filter to List 111 Edit Filter List 108 Show Filter List 106 Unfilter 108 Remove Channels 113 Remove Blank Waveforms 115 Remove Derived Channels 11
350. urrent location Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV To sort by distance 1 Select an event 2 Select SBD from the ARS toolbar Channels are displayed in order of increasing distance from the selected event s current location The closest sta tion to the event appears at the top of the ARS screen the furthest station from the event appears at the bottom The left bottom number in the channel information display indicates great circle distance from the event in degrees Figure 37 FIGURE 37 SORT BY DISTANCE FUNCTION SBU Sort by User defined Order The SBU toolbar button moves user selected channels to the top of the ARS wave form display To sort by user defined order 1 Select one or more channels to be sorted to the top of ARS display To select more than one channel press the Shift key while selecting multiple stations one at a time Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 o IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures 2 Select SBU from the ARS toolbar All selected channels are shown at the top of the ARS display as shown in Figure 38 1 E E El El E LL ND FIGURE 38 SORT BY USER DEFINED ORDER Th Theoretical Arrival Time The Th toolbar button displays
351. us and information on the right part of the display 6 See Hydroacoustic Azimuth Review Tool HART Procedures on page 261 to continue analysis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV Infra Menu The Infra menu provides options for enhancing review of infrasonic data The options are listed in Figure 126 Show Infra Channels Unshow Infra Channels Align Infra on I Select all Infra Channels FiGURE 126 INFRA MENU Infra Show Infra Channels Because the final infrasonic network will contain a large number of stations and infrasonic analysis often requires that all station elements and beams be displayed ARS is sometimes slower to respond when all of these channels are displayed Ana lysts often choose to display infrasonic waveform data for short periods of time mostly at the end of analyzing an event to examine phases The Show Infra Channels menu option displays all infrasonic stations as a group at the top of the ARS waveform display To show infrasonic channels 1 Choose Infra Show Infra Channels You need not select any channels All infrasonic channels usually four data channels plus beams for each station are displayed in a group at the top of the ARS waveform display If you selected an event the infrasonic data are aligned on a theoretical I phase The theoretical arrival t
352. ut tons at the bottom of the window are used to signal the completion of these mile stones QC Complete Click the QC Complete button after reviewing the bulletin for scientific and ana lytic correctness Bulletin Complete Click the Bulletin Complete button to initiate the rebdone procedure see Sum mary of Procedures for Completing a Bulletin discussed below After the Bulletin Complete is selected time blocks can no longer be allocated from this dataday Hide Hide button resides at the bottom of the QC window To undisplay the QC win dow click Hide The QC window disappears Summary of Procedures for Completing a Bulletin When both the Analyzed and Scan columns have been filled a check is made of the quality of each saved and rejected event These checks include visually review ing events applying the rebqc script and evaluating the dataday s bulletin Prob lem events are corrected and the quality of the bulletin is checked again by applying the rebqc script and by visually evaluating the dataday s bulletin After correcting any problems the MsConflict script is launched to complete the surface wave magnitude computations After another quality check any event that still has surface wave conflicts or subsequent magnitude errors are corrected and the QC Complete button is clicked Clicking the Bulletin Complete button initiates the rebdone procedure which releases or publishes the bulletin Interactive Analysis
353. utation is documented in IDC5 2 1 The dialog box contains Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions W Operational Procedures detailed information about the event location It allows you to refine event loca tions by interactively controlling some of the parameters used in the location com putation The Locator dialogue box is shown in Figure 146 It is discussed in four parts event solutions history constraints and functions Locator Dialogue FiGURE 146 LOCATOR DiALOGUE BOX Solutions Area of Locator The event solutions area of the Locator dialogue box is shown in Figure 147 Table 8 describes the contents of its fields Locator Dialogue FIGURE 147 CURRENT LOCATION DISPLAYED IN LOCATOR DIALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV TABLE 8 FIELDS IN SOLUTIONS AREA OF LOCATOR Box Field Definition Pref Preferred solution button indicates selects the preferred solution Lat Latitude of event location deg Lon Longitude of event location deg C C constrained U unconstrained location Depth Depth of event km C constrained U unconstrained depth Ndef Number of defining phases Sdobs Standard error on location
354. ute the FK of each infrasound station Use XfkDisplay to send back computed azimuth and slowness to ARS Use XfkDisplay to compute and send an FK beam Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions References The following sources supplement or are referenced in document Fer93 Gan79 GSE92 Hel94 IDC3 4 1Rev2 IDC5 1 1Rev2 IDC5 1 3RevO 1 IDC5 2 1 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Ferguson P M Motif Reference Manual Volume Six B O Reilly amp Associates Inc 1993 Gane C and Sarson T Structured Systems Analysis Tools and Techniques Prentice Hall Inc Englewood Cliffs NJ 1979 Group of Scientific Experts A New Quality Control Technique for Bulletin Preparation GSE US 74 1992 Heller D and Ferguson P M Motif Programming Manual Volume Six A O Reilly amp Associates Inc 1994 Science Applications International Corporation Veridian Pacific Sierra Research Formats and Protocols for Messages Revision 2 SAIC 00 3005 PSR 00 TN2829 2000 Science Applications International Corporation Veridian Pacific Sierra Research Database Schema Revision 2 SAIC 00 3057 PSR 00 TN2830 2000 Science Applications International Corporation Veridian Pacific Sierra Research Configuration of PIDC Databases SAIC 01 3022 PSR 99 TN1114 2001 Scie
355. v Altitude of station km type Station type name Station name Functions in AlphaList AlphaList contains a toolbar with buttons for the functions commonly needed for examining an event As with the ARS toolbar most of these functions also have menu option equivalents Figure 145 shows AlphaList toolbar function buttons FiGURE 145 ALPHALIST TOOLBAR BUTTONS Table 7 describes the function buttons in AlphaList toolbar TABLE 7 TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS IN ALPHALIST Function Description Hide Undisplays AlphaList without releasing resources Undisplay All Undisplays AlphaList and releases resources Undisplay Undisplays selected fields in AlphaList Resize Resizes AlphaList to include all fields Help Provides descriptions of the functions provided in AlphaList Default Resets the location see Edit Locate Reset to Default on page 90 Map Launches Map and displays selected events arrivals and or stations see Tools Map on page 140 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures TABLE 7 TOOLBAR FUNCTIONS ALPHALIST CONTINUED Function Description AEQ Provides the measure of anomalousness of an event see Tools gt AEQ on page 139 QC Performs the QC of an event see OC Quality Check on page 65 FK Performs azimuth and slowness computation using XfkDisplay see
356. veform display s ampli Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Chapter 2 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures tude larger than normal to see detail in a signal The Waveforms Resize Mouse option allows you to set the amplitude scale of the waveform in the display and to keep it at this value while scrolling from window to window with waveform auto scaling disabled This option applies to all channels in the waveform display Indi vidual channels may be rescaled at your discretion see Amplitude Scaling and Measurement on page 32 ARS will not auto scale or change any channel s scal ing value as the display is scrolled or zoomed To resize the waveform display by using your mouse buttons 1 Choose Options Waveforms Waveforms Resize Mouse You need not select events or channels ARS disables auto scaling as you scroll through different time windows maintaining a constant amplitude scaling for each channel Options gt Waveforms gt Waveforms Resize Auto If waveform autoscaling has been disabled by the Waveforms Resize Mouse option it can be enabled by using the Waveforms Resize Auto option ARS will again auto scale waveforms during scroll and zoom operations To automatically resize the waveforms during scrolling 1 If Waveforms Resize Mouse is enabled choose Options Waveforms Waveforms Resize Auto ARS autom
357. vent If desired perform analysis to refine the event 2 Choose Edit Locate Event The location of the event is calculated and the updated event informa tion is displayed in the Locator dialogue box Figure 42 on page 59 the Magnitude dialogue box Figure 44 on page 61 AlphaList Figure 69 and in the event label presented in the event scroll bar at the top of the ARS display Also the theoretical arrival times are adjusted to reflect the new location AlphaList Map QC FK Time n 51 n Locate FIGURE 69 ALPHALIST AFTER LOCATING Edit Locate Reset to Default The Reset to Default menu option resets the location of an event to an invalid location of 999 00 S 999 00 W and no depth as shown in Figure 70 This option may be useful for scanning where a preset location is not desirable Or if you think ARS is not computing an accurate location solution but is hanging on a local com putation minimum rather than a global computation minimum you can reset the location and attempt to relocate This situation is sometimes encountered during depth phase analysis Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Hide Undisplay All Undisplay Resize Help Default Map AEG FK Time n Az Sto n Locate FIGURE 70 ALPHALIST SHOWING DEFAULT LOCATION After resetting th
358. waveform data which means it displays it in its raw waveform state without a filter applied to it To unfilter waveforms 1 Select a filtered channel 2 Choose View gt Filter gt Unfilter The channel s filter is removed from the waveform data View Filter Edit Filter List The Edit Filter List menu option allows you to edit the characteristics of individ ual filters in the filter list You can change the frequency limits filter order or filter type Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V To edit the filter list 1 Choose View Filter Edit Filter List You need not select a channel or display the filter list ARS presents a selection box with a list of available filters 2 Select the filter to be edited ARS displays a filter editing dialogue box as shown in Figure 88 FIGURE 88 FILTER EDITING DiALOGUE BOX The filter editing dialogue box provides controls for setting all filter parameters Set high and low frequency bounds by using the slider bars and multiplier settings Use the multiplier to set the power of 10 then use the slider to adjust the frequency value The frequency value shown above the slider bar reflects the effect of the multiplier setting and the slider bar position Slider bars respond to several types of actions Click and drag the slider to
359. whose parameters require editing A parameter editing window is displayed as shown in Figure 166 3 Edit the appropriate fields then click Apply XfkDisplay uses these new station specific parameters in its future calculations Parameter changes are lost when XfkDisplay exits Clicking Cancel disregards any changes made in the parameter editing window When you are finished editing parameters close the station selection window by clicking Dismiss in that window FIGURE 165 STATION SELECTION WINDOW Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions StaSel sta fktype 5 x 21121222 leb bolt alsvid delk 10 040000 0 000000 mask il qc fix i 227422 0 250000 02 010 250000 ce SER ele EE 11 0180 000000 555811552723 000000 Mee 4521 21 000000 qc niter i er jerk sae 07 20 000000 Apply Cancel FIGURE 166 STATION SPECIFIC PARAMETER WINDOW Edit gt Parameters Chapter 2 Operational Procedures XfkDisplay uses a set recipe when performing a calculation Recipes are referenced from the Edit gt Stations parameters by the fktype entry The Parameters option allows you to edit the recipe parameters used by XfkDisplay to compute azimuth and slowness System defaults for these parameter values are specified in parame ter files which XfkDisplay reads on startup The XfkDispl
360. win dow in analyst log Three programs are initiated The dman and ARS programs are launched and their application windows appear on the left screen WEAssess is also initiated see Interactive Auxiliary Data Request IADR Procedures on page 248 An ARS window appears with only the toolbar and menu displayed No waveform data are displayed upon initial launch The initial ARS window is shown in Figure 5 6 To load data choose File gt Read The date and time that were selected in analyst log appear in a dialogue box as shown in Figure 6 The operational database and network are also specified 7 After checking the information click Done in the dialogue box ARS begins the process of loading the waveform data for that time period along with automatically processed arrivals and events You can now begin processing the data using the procedures described in the sub sequent sections Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual o May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures WV FiGURE 5 ARS MAIN WINDOW AT STARTUP Startup Notes Loading data into ARS can take several minutes The waveform display partially refreshes during the load process After the display is complete and the hour glass cursor has been replaced by a pointer cursor you can begin interacting with the data In the initial waveform display ARS shows the entire loaded time window
361. with the left mouse button To select all channels press control p 2 Select Uftr from the ARS toolbar The selected channel s display unfiltered waveform traces Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 46 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V Ph P Set Default Phase The Ph P toolbar button both displays the current default phase and allows you to set the default phase The default phase is used by several other toolbar buttons such as add phase Ad Ph and rename phase Rn Ph When ARS starts the default phase is set to P so the button is labeled Ph P as shown in Figure 31 The default phase is also reset to P whenever events are saved or discarded The button s label will update whenever the default phase is changed enu P Ad Ph Rn Ph Bm Ph AIPh UnAI SBD SBU Th Th O Beam SICh Ele Loc Sav FiGURE 31 SET DEFAULT PHASE BUTTON To set the default phase 1 Select Ph P from the ARS toolbar A select phase dialogue box appears It presents a scrolling list of the available S H I phase types 2 Select the desired phase such as PcP as shown Figure 32 The default phase becomes PcP and the Ph P label is updated as shown in Figure 33 FIGURE 32 SELECT PHASE DIALOGUE BOX Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 Q IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 T
362. y box Phase labels are normally dis played However when data are compressed to display many hours of data for example at initial data load display of phase labels will be disabled As you zoom in on the data phase labels are displayed With these menu options analysts can dis play phase labels in compressed data before zooming or once zoomed in you can undisplay phase labels for example if the phase label is obscuring detail in a waveform Phase label options are shown in Figure 104 Options Tools Seismic Hydro In Waveforms n mel Phase Labels Off Filter Parameters Scale Types 17 05 31 40 8 FiGURE 104 PHASE LABEL TOGGLES UNDER OPTIONS MENU Options gt Phase Labels gt Phase Labels On To display phase labels 1 If phase labels not displayed in ARS choose Options gt Phase Labels gt Phase Labels On The phase labels are displayed Options gt Phase Labels gt Phase Labels Off 1 Ifthe phase labels are displayed in ARS choose Options Phase Labels Phase Labels Off The phase labels disappear from the ARS display as shown in Figure 105 Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual May 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Chapter 2 Operational Procedures V FiGURE 105 PHASE LABELS TURNED OrF Options gt Arrival Bars Arrival bars are small vertical lines within the waveform display box that mar
363. ysis Subsystem Software User Manual IDC 6 5 1 May 2001 v IDC DOCUMENTATION Chapter 2 Technical Instructions Operational Procedures To Un do a function 1 Select the hours in the Hour column from which your name should be removed 2 Click the Un button The toggle box turns red 3 Click the Allocate button Your name disappears from the Allocation column for the selected time interval freeing up the hours for another analyst Only the analyst who has allocated a time period can remove their name from it Allocate The Allocate function allocates a time period to be analyzed To Allocate a time period 1 Select one or more hours in the Hour column clicking on each desired hour consecutively with the left mouse button Each selected hour turns green 2 Click the Allocate button When you select the hours and click Allocate your name is displayed in the Allocate column beside the requested hours Your name also appears in the same cells in other analyst s Allocation windows Thus you have signaled to the other analysts that these hours are reserved No other analyst can reserve these hours although any analyst can load any time period into ARS Allocate will only work when consecutive hours are selected Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual 2001 IDC 6 5 1 IDC DOCUMENTATION Technical Instructions Operational Procedures Analyze When you have completed a standard

Interactive Analysis Subsystem Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents